JP2019076508A - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a Pachinko game machine capable of improving diversity in the game machine and further effectively utilizing an operation performance of a shooting handle.SOLUTION: A Pachinko game machine includes: performance output means, such as a main board, a sub-main board, a performance display device, a speaker, each kind of LED, and the like; a touch switch for detecting contact of a player; and shooting strength volume for detecting a rotary operation of the player. Performances include a touch performance outputted with touch detection as detection of contact of the player by the touch switch as an opportunity. A state of the Pachinko game machine includes a game standby state, the game standby state includes a plurality of game standby states having different output contents of a performance by the sub-main board, and the touch performance is determined such that presence or absence of output of the performance and output contents can differ according to a difference in the plurality of game standby states.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 22

Description

  The present invention relates to a pachinko game machine using a game ball as a game medium.

In general, the pachinko gaming machine is provided with a main control board that controls the game and a sub control board that performs control processing based on a command (effect control command) from the main control board. And among these, as a sub control board, a payout control board, an effect control board, various display control boards, an electric decoration control board, an acoustic control board, etc. can be illustrated. Furthermore, in some pachinko gaming machines, the main control board transmits a command for waiting for a customer wait when the operation of the release handle is not performed for a predetermined time or more (paragraph 0181 of Patent Document 1, etc.). Further, in paragraph 0055 of Patent Document 2, it is described that the number of players is counted based on the touch signal relating to the launch handle and the fluctuation state of the decorative symbol (the state of the effect by the moving image).
Patent No. 599 1760 JP 2007-244761 A

  By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine, the application of the operation detection (also referred to as "touch detection" or the like) related to the launch handle is very limited as disclosed in the above-mentioned Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2. It has become. This is considered to be due to the fact that the degree of attention to touch detection is low and few people notice the possibility of touch detection. Although gaming characteristics such as pachinko gaming machines are required to have a variety of game characteristics and selections, it is thought that the diversity of gaming machines can be further improved by variously examining control modes starting from detection of handle operation. Be

  The present invention has been made in view of these problems, and the object of the present invention is to improve the diversity of the gaming machine, and in particular, to more effectively utilize the detection of the player's operation by the firing handle or the like. Is to provide a pachinko gaming machine that can

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention fires a game ball in a game area, and the game ball enters a start winning opening (a first start winning opening, a second start winning opening, etc.) formed in the game area. The symbol game is changed and displayed for a predetermined period of time as a symbol game after a symbol (such as a special symbol or the like) is variably displayed, and a special game can be given a profit when the symbol displayed is the predetermined display mode. A pachinko game machine that
As for the time for fluctuating display of symbols as the symbol game, one fluctuation time is set from a plurality of fluctuation times,
Main control means (such as a main board) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game;
A sub control means (such as a sub main board) which is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control means;
Effect output means (effect display device, speakers, various LEDs, etc.) for outputting an effect under control of the sub control means;
Touch detection means (touch switch or the like) for detecting a player's touch;
Rotation operation detection means (e.g., a firing intensity volume) for detecting the rotation operation of the player;
An effect operation unit operated by the player during the effect;
And a clock means (clock timer etc.) for clocking time,
Among the effects, there are effects (touch effects, etc.) that are output triggered by touch detection that is detection of a player's touch by the touch detection means.
A game standby state ("B1: game standby state (normal demonstration display)" or the like) in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is executed as the state of the pachinko gaming machine,
It has a gaming state ("B2: gaming state", etc.) in which either the symbol game or the special game is being executed,
The elapsed time in the predetermined game standby state is clocked based on the clock means,
It has an initialization means for setting the clocking time of the clocking means to an initial value based on the touch detection,
When the elapsed time in the game standby state reaches a predetermined time by the clocking means, the output of the effect triggered by the subsequent touch detection is permitted ("J2: composite with other elements", etc.) ,
Even if the effect operation unit is operated before the elapsed time reaches the predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) in the game standby state, if the elapsed time reaches the predetermined time, the subsequent touch detection It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that the output of the effect triggered by the is permitted.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the diversity of gaming machines, and to provide a pachinko gaming machine capable of further effectively utilizing the operation detection of the launch handle.

It is a front view of a pachinko game machine of one example of the present invention. It is a rear view of a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the function of a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram showing the main substrate composition of a pachinko game machine. (A) is a front view which shows the substrate case which accommodated the main board | substrate, (b) is a fragmentary sectional view which shows roughly the part in alignment with the AA in (a). It is a block diagram which shows the basic functional means of a main board | substrate, a submain board | substrate, and a subsub board | substrate. It is an explanatory view showing a main symbol display board of a main control display. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display in the fluctuation | variation of the production | presentation symbol in a presentation display apparatus, (b) is explanatory drawing which similarly shows the example of a display in the stop of production | presentation design. (A) is a table which shows a yes-no decision table, (b) is a table which shows a change pattern table for out-of-order. (A) is a chart showing the jackpot symbol determination table for the first lottery, (b) is a chart showing the jackpot symbol determination table for the second lottery, (c) shows the jackpot symbol judgment table used in the small hit It is a chart which shows a figure, (d) a detached symbol judgment table used at the time of a detached. FIG. 7B is a table showing a variation pattern table used at the time of losing, FIG. 7B is a table showing a variation pattern table used at the 15R big hit, and FIG. 7C is a chart showing a variation pattern table used at the 5R big hit. Is a chart showing the hit value and the payout rate for each set value. (A) is a chart showing a prefetch determination table, (b) is a chart showing a prefetch code correspondence table. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the power activation in a main board | substrate. It is a flow chart which shows initial setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows setting value change processing. It is a flow chart which shows game progress interruption processing in the main board. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery determination process in a main board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off process in the main board | substrate. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state before handle operation, (b) It is explanatory drawing which shows the state at the time of handle operation. It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked at the operation button, the cross key, and these periphery from front upper direction. It is a chart showing control elements concerning touch detection. It is a graph which shows the control element following FIG. (A) is a chart showing whether or not presentation execution is made according to the state of the gaming machine, and (b) is a chart showing (b) following the execution of presentation execution. 6 is a chart showing the effect types for each state of the gaming machine. FIG. 26 is a chart following FIG. 25 about the effect types. (A) is a table showing the effect of the second and subsequent touch detection, and (b) is a table showing the effect after (a). It is a timing chart which shows an example of an effect output at the time of setting change. It is a timing chart showing an example of effect output at the time of environment setting. It is a timing chart showing an example of effect output at the time of reach display. It is a timing chart showing an example of effect output at the time of big hit end demonstration display. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of effect output at the time of power failure recovery when there is a power failure during game standby, (b) an example of effect output at the time of power failure recovery when there is a power failure during symbol fluctuation Is a timing chart showing (A) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the standby screen A, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the standby screen B, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the display screen C (environment setting screen). (A) is an explanatory view showing an example of effect output at the time of touch detection at the time of standby screen A, and (b) is an explanatory view showing an example of effect output at the time of touch detection during the fluctuation stop. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the electricity supply return screen in the standby screen A, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the electricity supply return screen in during symbol fluctuation. (A) is an explanatory view showing an example of an abnormality display relating to a door opening error, (b) is an explanatory view showing an example of a setting change screen A, (b) shows an example of a setting changing screen at the time of standby screen B FIG. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a normal reach screen, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of SP reach screen, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a big hit end demonstration screen. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a big hit start demonstration screen, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a screen in a round, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a specific effect screen in a hit. (A) is an explanatory view showing an example of a specific effect screen in a hit different from FIG. 38 (c), (b) an explanatory view showing an example of an inter-round effect screen, (c) a hit different from (a) It is an explanatory view showing an example of a middle specific effect screen. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the production | presentation aspect before touch production, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the production | presentation aspect at the time of touch production. (A) is an explanatory view showing an example of effect output before a touch advance notice, and (b) is an explanatory view showing an example of effect output after a touch advance notice. (A) is a chart showing a selection table of notice groups pertaining to fluctuation before touch, (b) is a chart showing a selection table of notice groups pertaining to fluctuation of touch transition, (c) is prefetching notice concerning prefetching fluctuation before touch FIG. 6D is a table showing a selection table of FIG. 4D, and FIG. 4D is a table showing a selection table of pre-reading notices related to fluctuation of touch transition.

Hereafter, the Example of the pachinko game machine which concerns on this invention is described. Here, first, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described, and thereafter, the game procedure, effects, control mode, and the like in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described.
<Basic configuration of pachinko gaming machine>

  FIG. 1 shows a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine 10, a gaming board 50 is attached to a gaming machine frame 11 described later. Among these, the game board 50 has different constituent elements such as an accessory and a design according to the model of the pachinko gaming machine 10. Furthermore, the gaming board 50 can be separated from the gaming machine frame 11 by releasing the electrical connection relationship with the gaming machine frame 11 or the structural connection relationship.

  In addition, by sharing the structural and electrical connection relationship with the gaming machine frame 11 with respect to the gaming board 50 of a plurality of types, so-called model changes in which the gaming machine frame 11 is shared between different types of models becomes possible. There is. In the following, first, the gaming machine frame 11 will be described, and then the board configuration of the gaming board 50 will be described.

  The above-described gaming machine frame 11 has an outer frame 12, a front frame (also referred to as an "inner frame" or a "main frame", etc.) 13, and a lower front board (also referred to as a "sliding board") 14 . Furthermore, a glass door 15 and a plate unit 16 are attached to the front frame 13. Among these, the outer frame 12 is a rectangular frame used to fix the pachinko game machine 10 at a predetermined position on an island facility in a game arcade (game arcade), and as shown in FIG. The front frame 13 having the door 15 and the tray unit 16 and the lower front plate 14 described above have an opening portion whose front side is closed.

  Moreover, it is common that nailing is performed as a construction method for installing the outer frame 12 in an island installation. And wood is used as a material of a part for fixation to island facilities at least at outer frame 12. In addition, it is possible to replace with wood and to adopt a plastic material which can be nailed, for example. Moreover, it is also possible to employ | adopt construction methods other than a nailing as a construction method for installing the outer frame 12 in an island installation.

  The front frame 13 is a structure provided with an outer shape that matches the opening of the outer frame 12, and is attached to the outer frame 12 via hinge mechanisms 15A and 15B shown on the left side in FIG. The front frame 13 is opened from the closed state with respect to the outer frame 12 by swinging forward with the left edge in FIG. 1 as the fixed end and the right edge as the free end. Furthermore, the front frame 13 pivots rearward from the open state, and enters the outer frame 12 to be locked, thereby being in the closed state again. The front frame 13 is configured to close a portion between the upper short portion of the outer frame 12 and the lower front plate 14 when the front frame 13 is closed.

  The locking of the front frame 13 to the outer frame 12 and the release from the outer frame 12 are performed via a lock device (not shown). That is, as shown in FIG. 1, the cylinder portion 17 of the lock device is disposed at a lower portion on the free end side of the front frame 13, and the cylinder portion 17 covers the lower portion of the front frame 13. The keyhole is directed to the front of the pachinko gaming machine 10 through the above-described plate unit 16. When the game arcade clerk inserts a key into the keyhole of the cylinder 17 and turns this key, for example, counterclockwise, the free end of the front frame 13 is released from the lock device, and the front frame 13 is opened Become.

  With respect to such a front frame 13, the lower front plate 14 described above does not have a configuration for opening and closing like the front frame 13, and is fixed to the outer frame 12 so as not to move. The lower front plate 14 always closes the lower end portion of the front surface of the outer frame 12.

  The glass door 15 disposed at the front of the front frame 13 and the pan unit 16 are mounted on the front frame 13 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). Further, both the glass door 15 and the pan unit 16 can be independently rocked with the left edge in FIG. 1 as a fixed end and the right edge as a free end. Then, the glass door 15 and the plate unit 16 are opened by, for example, swinging the game arcade clerk horizontally horizontally forward, and are horizontally rocked backward from the opened state and locked to the front frame 13 It will be in a closed state.

  The locking of the glass door 15 to the front frame 13 and the release from the front frame 13 are performed via the aforementioned lock device (not shown). That is, when the game arcade clerk inserts a key into the keyhole of the above-mentioned cylinder 17 and turns this key clockwise, for example, in the reverse direction to the opening of the front frame 13, the free end of the glass door 15 is the lock device And the glass door 15 is opened. Then, the glass door 15 in the open state is pushed back so as to overlap the front frame 13, and the glass door 15 is pushed parallel to the front frame 13, whereby the lock device operates and the glass door 15 is again fronted. Lock on the frame 13

  Further, by opening the glass door 15, the locking mechanism (not shown) of the plate unit 16 appears and becomes operable, and the operating section (not shown) of the locking mechanism is, for example, downward By pressing the plate unit 16 into the open state. Further, the plate unit 16 in the open state is pushed back so as to overlap with the front frame 13 and the plate unit 16 is pushed parallel to the front frame 13 to operate the locking mechanism, and the plate unit 16 is again operated. The front frame 13 is locked.

  Furthermore, the glass door 15 detachably holds, for example, two parallel transparent plates, and when in the closed state, the game board 50 can be viewed from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 10 through these transparent plates. It is like that. Besides the glass plate, a transparent resin plate can be used as the transparent plate. Further, by opening the glass door 15, the front surface of the game board 50 held by the front frame 13 is exposed by the game board holding mechanism (not shown). Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, the front frame 13 has a game ball passage or the like for guiding or collecting a game ball which is a game medium.

  The tray unit 16 has an upper bowl 18, a lower bowl 19, a firing handle 20 and the like on its front surface. Among these, the upper ball tray 18 stores the game balls, supplies the game balls to the launch device 43 (see FIGS. 2 and 4) operated through the shooting handle 20, and plays the game to the lower ball tray 19 Mechanisms are provided for various functions such as ball evacuation. In addition, the lower ball tray 19 stores the game balls, receives the game balls sent from the upper ball tray 18, and sets the gaming balls to a ball box (a so-called dollar box) placed outside the pachinko gaming machine 10. Mechanisms are provided for various functions such as evacuation. There are also cases where a ball box is provided integrally with the island facility.

  Further, in the present embodiment, various speakers 21 are provided in the upper corner portion of the glass door 15, the lower front plate 14 and the like, and through the speakers 21, according to the game state, the effect pattern, etc. BGM and various sound effects are output.

  Furthermore, an operation button 22 which can be operated by the player is provided on a portion of the upper ball tray 18 facing the player. The operation button 22 is provided on the outer wall surface of the upper portion of the upper bowl 18 and is located near the center of the upper bowl 18 in the left-right direction. Furthermore, the operation button 22 is internally provided with an operation button light emitter (not shown), and performs light output in accordance with the effect pattern to be executed.

  The operation button 22 may be protruded upward in a predetermined case by using a drive source such as a motor. Although the operation button 22 in the present embodiment is not shown in detail, it can be displaced in such a manner that the tip of the operation button 22 protrudes upward by the drive of the elevating motor and form an operation lever input portion capable of performing input by tilting. It is possible to have a semi-circular eccentric cam for generating vibrations in the drive system of the operating lever.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 21, a cross key 96 is provided in addition to the operation button 22, and various environment settings can be made by the player using the cross key 96. The contents of the environment setting can be exemplified by adjusting the volume of the speaker 21, adjusting the brightness and adjusting the amount of light of the effect display to be described later, or changing the effect mode to be described later. Moreover, it is possible to provide the indicator which can perform the display which concerns on the effect which concerns on a game, and the above-mentioned environment setting, for example in front frame 13 grade | etc., Of the game machine frame 11. FIG.

Furthermore, besides the cross key, it is possible to use, for example, a lever-like operation means, a touch panel of various methods, and the like. Further, reference numeral 97 in FIG. 21 denotes a ball lending button, and reference numeral 98 denotes a return button. Further, reference numeral 98 in FIG. 21 denotes a ball removal button for the upper bowl 18.
<Back composition of pachinko game machine>

  Next, a basic configuration on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the back surface of the front frame 13 is provided with a game ball passage or the like for guiding or collecting game balls, and a set base (also referred to as "back set board" or the like) 31 serving as a prize ball path forming mechanism. The power supply unit 32 for supplying power to the entire gaming machine is provided below the set base 31, and a payout control (also referred to as "prize ball control") board for controlling the gaming machine frame side. The reference numeral 103 is attached in a state of being stored in a dedicated transparent case. In addition, on the back side of the game board 50, the main board (main control board) 102 for overall control of the entire game and the sub board 104 for executing effect control based on the control command from the main board 102 are each dedicated. It is housed in a transparent case and provided in a positional relationship corresponding to the opening of the set base 31. Furthermore, the set base 31 also includes a launcher 43 and a launch control substrate 105 that controls the launcher 43.

  In the set base 31, a prize ball tank 33 is provided above the opening described above. The prize ball tank 33 stores game balls which are supplied from the island facility and become prize balls. Furthermore, below the prize ball tank 33, a prize ball passage 34, a payout unit 35, and a prize ball discharge passage 36 are provided. The prize ball passage 34, the payout unit 35, and the prize ball discharge passage 36 are disposed along the right side from the top of the game board 50 when the pachinko game machine 10 is viewed from the rear as shown in FIG. It is done.

  The above-mentioned prize ball passage 34 is provided to rectify and guide the gaming balls stored in the prize ball tank 33 to the downstream side. Further, the above-described dispensing unit 35 can communicate with the winning ball passage 34 and can discharge the balls stored in the winning ball tank 33 downward in units of one ball. Further, the winning ball discharge passage 36 guides the gaming ball, which has flowed down from the payout unit 35, as a winning ball to the ball dish (upper ball dish 18 or lower ball dish 19).

  The power supply unit 32 described above is provided at the lower left portion of the set base 31 when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is viewed from the rear as shown in FIG. Then, the power supply unit 32 converts AC power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine into various voltages used in the gaming machine, and supplies the same to the payout control board 103, the main board 102, the sub board 104, and the like. Further, the power switch 40 for operating the power unit 32 is disposed behind other devices as indicated by a hidden line (broken line) in the lower right portion of the figure. The power switch 40 is installed so as to be turned on when the lower side of the power switch 40 is pressed and tilted downward so that the dropped game ball is not turned off even when hit directly.

  The above-mentioned payout control board 103 is disposed at the lower right part of the set base 31 when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is viewed from the rear as shown in FIG. Then, the payout control board 103 has a payout control function of controlling the payout unit 35 in accordance with an instruction relating to the payout from the main substrate 102 and a lending request from the outside. In addition, the above-mentioned launch control board 105 has a launch control function to control the launch device 43 to launch the game ball (ball) into the game area with an intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the launch handle 20 (see FIG. 1). ing.

  The main board 102 described above is disposed at the lower center of the back side of the game board 50, and mainly performs various lottery functions, setting change functions, control functions for the payout control board 103 and the sub board 104, etc. A central processing function in the pachinko gaming machine 10 is provided. The above-described sub-substrate 104 is disposed at the upper central portion on the back side of the game board 50, and mainly has a function for controlling various effects to be described later.

  As for the sub-substrate 104, a main sub-substrate (in the present embodiment, the sub-main substrate 301) responsible for the main function of effect control and a sub-sub-substrate (in the present embodiment) specialized for a specific effect function such as image creation Although the term "sub-substrate" is divided into sub-sub substrates 302) and sub-sub substrates 302). In the lower right part on the back side of the set base 31, an external relay terminal board ("frame relay terminal board", etc.) relays signals from the main board 102, the payout control board 103, etc. to devices outside the pachinko gaming machine 10. (Also called) 46) is provided.

The setting change function of the main board 102 described above is a function capable of changing the setting value that defines the theoretical hitability (the player's advantage). In the present embodiment, six types of integer values “1” to “6” are provided as setting values, and for each of these setting values, probability values relating to theoretical big hit and small hit, and The payout rate is different. Such a change of the set value, the jackpot probability for each set value, and the like will be described later.
<Board configuration of game board>

  Next, the above-described gaming board 50 and parts (board parts) disposed on the board of the gaming board 50 will be described. In the present embodiment, the game board 50 is composed of a plurality of parts made of a transparent resin material (for example, a transparent acrylic resin or the like) and a wood (a veneer board). Further, the game board 50 is formed in a plate shape, and has a game ball passage that guides the game ball to the back side of the game board 50, a predetermined space, and the like. The gaming board 50 is mounted on the front frame 13 of the gaming machine frame 11 with the board surface on which various board components are mounted facing forward, and the glass door 15 or the like in the closed state It is supposed to cover the front. Furthermore, on the front side of the game board 50, a game area 52 is defined by combining a curved band-like inner rail and an outer rail.

  As shown in FIG. 1, in the game area 52, a first start winning opening 62 and a second starting winning opening 63, a special winning opening device 90 (attacker unit), an operation opening 68, a plurality of general winning openings 72, and An out port (58) and the like disposed at the bottom of the game area 52 and hidden behind the operation button 22 in FIG. 1 are provided. Further, the game area 52 is provided with an effect display device 60 composed of a liquid crystal display device capable of performing display for effects, a center decoration 64 for decorating the periphery of the effect display device 60, and the like.

In addition, the game area 52 is provided with a large number of game nails (not shown) and a mechanism such as a windmill. In addition, it is also possible not to provide a windmill. Further, a main control display device 53 is provided outside the lower left of the game area 52 of the game board 50. The specific configuration and function of the main control display device 53 will be described later. In addition, the above-described board configuration of the game board 50 may be variously changed depending on, for example, the game characteristics and the like adopted for the pachinko gaming machine 10.
<Function of panel parts>

  Then, the specific function and structure which concern on each board component mentioned above are demonstrated. First, the above-mentioned first start winning opening 62 is a starting winning opening related to the first game, and is of a type in which the entrance of the game ball is always open and the size of the entrance of the game ball is not changed. Furthermore, the first starting winning opening 62 has a first starting winning detection device 74 (sensor) for detecting the ball entering of the gaming ball into the first starting winning opening 62, and the output signal of this sensor is the same as described above. Is input to the main board 102 of FIG.

  The above-mentioned second starting winning opening 63 is a starting winning opening related to the second game, and is disposed on the right side of the first starting winning opening 62. The second start winning opening 63 is a start opening related to a normal electric character (so-called "electric tulip" or "electric chew"), and one side of the normal symbol described later is stopped and displayed in a hitting manner. (The right side in FIG. 1) is provided with a blade (opening and closing blade) that performs an opening operation. Then, the second start winning opening 63 opens the opening and closing blades for a predetermined time based on the operation of the ordinary electric combination and spreads, whereby the ball enters the second starting winning opening 63 of the gaming ball. It becomes possible. In addition, it is good also as composition which does not provide an ordinary motor combination in the starting opening concerning the 2nd game, or arranges an ordinary electric combination about the starting opening concerning the 1st game not only in a mode of this example.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the second start winning opening 63 is provided with a second start winning detection device 75 (sensor) and a normal motorized combination solenoid 76 for opening and closing the above-mentioned opening and closing blade. . An output signal of the second start winning detection device 75 is input to the main board 102.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types are provided as modes for opening the second start winning opening 63. In these open modes, a mode for a relatively short time (for example, about 0.2 seconds) (referred to as “short open” or “short open”) or a relatively long time (for example, about 5 seconds) There are modes (referred to as “long open”, “long open”, etc.) and the like. It is also possible to provide a mode of middle opening set to the opening time between the short opening and the long opening.

  The above-mentioned general winning opening 72 is provided with a general winning detection device 73 (sensor) for detecting the entering of the game ball, as shown in FIG. The output signal of the general winning detection device 73 is input to the main board 102.

  Then, when the general winning detection device 73 is shared by a plurality of general winning openings 72, the gaming balls having a plurality of general winning openings 72 entering are collected at a location where the general winning detection device 73 is disposed, and detection is performed. It is possible. Further, it is also possible to group a plurality of general winning openings 72 for each positional relationship or for the number of winning balls (shared by the general winning detection device 73).

  The above-mentioned big winning opening device 90 is formed in a case shape by combining parts made of transparent synthetic resin, and although not shown, it is provided with a big winning opening visible inside of the player. . The special winning opening has an opening formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and is internally provided with an open / close door 91 (shown by a broken line in FIG. 1) for opening and closing this opening. The special winning opening performs an opening operation in a predetermined manner when a predetermined hit occurs. Here, in the present embodiment, the special winning opening is open upward, and the open / close door 91 can slide in the front-rear direction.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the special winning opening device 90 is a special winning detection device 78 for detecting the entering of the game ball, and a special winning opening (opening) solenoid for opening and closing the opening / closing door 91 described above. It has 80. Among these, the special winning detection device 78 has a sensor for detecting the ball entry of the gaming ball into the special winning opening device 90, and the output signal thereof is inputted to the main substrate 102.

  Note that various devices can be adopted as the special winning opening device 90. For example, as the special winning opening device 90, it is possible to adopt one having a large winning opening open in the forward direction, one having an upward opening, or the like. Further, as the special winning opening device 90, a plurality of operation patterns (opening and closing patterns) related to the above-mentioned opening and closing door 91 for opening and closing the special winning opening and having a plurality of types of different operation patterns It is possible to employ one that operates the open / close door 91 or the like. Furthermore, as the special winning opening device 90, a plurality of large winning openings may be provided, and those having the game balls distributed to the respective special winning openings may be adopted according to the situation of the game.

  The aforementioned operating opening 68 is provided with a passage detecting device 69 as shown in FIG. 3, and the passage detecting device 69 has a sensor for detecting the passage of the gaming ball in the operating opening 68. The output signal of the sensor in the passage detection device 69 is input to the main substrate 102, and the passage detection device 69 changes the output signal of the sensor according to the presence or absence of the ball entering.

  The aforementioned out port 58 is provided with an out ball detection device (out port sensor) 82, as shown in FIG. The out port sensor 82 detects a game ball (out ball) that has entered the out port 58 without becoming a winning ball (safe ball) in the game area 52. Then, the detection result of the out-port sensor 82 is used for counting out-balls and displaying (base display) on a performance display unit (in-ball status display unit 808 in FIG. 5 described later) described later. There is.

  The center decoration 64 described above has a function of presentation and the like, and inside the center decoration 64, an LED substrate on which a large number of chip-type LEDs are mounted is provided. Then, by driving the LED of the center decoration 64, the light of the LED passes through the center decoration 64, and the center decoration 64 performs light decoration (light effect). Furthermore, the light decoration in the center decoration 64 is performed not only during the game but also while waiting for the start of the game, and during the game preparation for the player to perform light amount adjustment (light amount setting) and the like. Details of these will be described later.

  In addition, a plurality of movable effect members are provided on the back surface (inner side) of the center decoration 64, and these movable effect members constitute a gimmick for effect. These movable effect members are usually hidden inside the center decoration 64 as shown in FIG. However, when a predetermined effect is performed, although not shown, these movable effect members appear in front of the effect display device 60.

  Further, in the present embodiment, light decoration (light effect) is performed also in the movable effect member. Furthermore, the light decoration in the movable effect member is performed not only during the game but also while waiting for the start of the game, and during the game preparation for the player to adjust the light amount and the like.

  Furthermore, the game ball passage 65 is formed on the right side of the center decoration 64 as viewed from the front, and the center decoration 64 has the function of the flow path of the game ball in addition to the rendering function as described above. Have.

  Further, the center decoration 64 is provided with a light guide plate 88. As the light guide plate 88, although not shown, for example, it is possible to employ one provided with two transparent plates arranged in parallel with the plate surface facing forward and backward. Furthermore, the light guide plate 88 is attached to the center decoration 64 and shields between the outside and the inside of the center decoration 64 in front of the effect display device 60. The light guide plate 88 also functions as a protective cover for the effect display device 60 at the center decoration 64.

  The light guide plate 88 can be configured, for example, as follows. That is, inside the center decoration 64, a plurality of LEDs serving as light sources are arranged in a band shape so as to face one end face of the transparent plate, for example, one of the left and right end faces. In normal times, the display content of the effect display device 60 is transmitted to the outside of the transparent plate so that the player can visually recognize without overlapping another image on the screen of the effect display device 60.

  However, in each of the transparent plates constituting the light guide plate 88, fine irregularities which can not be visually recognized under a normal environment are formed. Then, at the time of execution of a predetermined effect, for example, the above-described light source facing the end face of one of the transparent plates is driven, and the light of the light source is irradiated toward the inside of the transparent plate from the end face of the transparent plate Ru. Further, the light is diffused by the unevenness of the transparent plate irradiated with the light, and a predetermined illustration or the like is colored and floated so as to be recognizable to the player by the diffused light.

  Moreover, the unevenness | corrugation for forming the image different from the above-mentioned illustration etc. is incised by the other transparent plate among two transparent plates of the light-guide plate 88. As shown in FIG. Then, by driving the light source facing the end face at the time of a predetermined effect, an illustration different from the above-mentioned ones appears so as to be recognizable to the player.

  Here, it is possible to face the light source not only to one of the left and right end faces of the transparent plate but also to one of the upper and lower end faces, and to project another illustration or the like by the light of this light source. By doing this, it is possible to display two types of images per one transparent plate. Further, the number of transparent plates may be one, or three or more. Also, instead of or in combination with the light guide plate 88, it is also possible to use a transmissive liquid crystal display.

  The above-mentioned main control display device 53 is provided with a symbol display substrate (main symbol display substrate) 256 on which a large number of LED indicator lights are arranged, as shown in FIG. The symbol display substrate 256 includes a normal symbol display portion 59 for displaying the above-mentioned normal symbol, a first special symbol display portion 70 for displaying a first special symbol (described later) corresponding to the first game, and a second game. A second special symbol display unit 71 for displaying a second special symbol (to be described later) and various other display units are formed so as to be visible to the player from the front of the gaming machine. In addition, the above-mentioned normal symbol display part 59 comprises the normal symbol display apparatus. Further, the first special symbol display unit 70 constitutes a first special symbol display device, and the second special symbol display unit 71 constitutes a second special symbol display device.

  In the following, the ordinary symbol is "common figure", the special symbol is "special figure", the first special symbol is "first special figure", "special figure 1", "special 1", the second special symbol " It may be called "second special view", "special view 2", "special 2", or the like. Furthermore, the first special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 1" or "symbol 1" or the like, and the second special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 2" or "symbol 2" or the like.

In addition, the above-mentioned main control display device 53 means one provided on the game board 50, but as described later, the setting display unit provided on the main substrate 102 (setting of FIG. It is also possible to provide a main control display device including a display 807), a performance display unit (a ball entry status display 808 in FIG. 5A described later), and the like. In that case, the setting display unit and the performance display unit provided on the main substrate 102 can also be referred to as, for example, a "main substrate side main control display device" or the like.
<Basic game procedure>

  Subsequently, the game procedure in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. First, in the situation where the gaming ball is supplied to the above-mentioned upper bowl plate 18, when the player operates and rotates the above-mentioned firing handle 20, the upper bowl plate 18 with the strength according to the rotation angle. The game balls stored in the game are fired one by one at predetermined intervals. Then, the gaming balls are guided by the above-mentioned inner rails and outer rails, reach the upper part of the gaming area 52, and are released to the gaming area 52 from between the inner rails and the outer rails.

  In a normal game, the player shoots so that the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 52, and targets the first start winning opening 62 located in the lower central portion of the game area 52. A mode of firing that mainly uses the left side of such a game area 52 is called a so-called left strike. In addition, while the player is operating the firing handle 20, the firing of the game ball is repeated by the above-described launching device 43 at a predetermined time interval (for example, an interval of not more than 100 shots per minute). Then, the game balls discharged continuously in the game area 52, while interfering with a plurality of game nails, a windmill, etc., drop in a direction according to factors such as the speed and the incident angle (or reflection angle).

  When the gaming ball falls into various winning openings such as the general winning opening 72 and the first start winning opening 62 described above, ball entry is detected, and payout control of the gaming ball is performed. Then, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper ball tray 18 as a winning ball through the above-described payout unit 35 in accordance with the type of winning opening that has entered the ball. In addition, when the upper ball tray 18 is filled with many game balls and the paid-out subsequent game balls can not enter the upper ball tray 18, these game balls are led to the lower ball tray 19 as a flood ball. .

  The game balls dropped into the various winning openings become safe balls and are guided from the front side to the back side of the game board 50. In addition, the game ball that did not become a safe ball reaches the lower end of the game area 52 and falls into the out port (58), and is guided to the back side of the game board 50. The gaming balls having reached the back side of the gaming board 50 are guided downward through the predetermined guiding rod and the gaming ball passage in the set base 31 and directed from the pachinko gaming machine 10 to the side of the aforementioned island facilities. Discharged.

  Unlike the above-mentioned winning opening which generates the safe ball, the above-mentioned operation opening 68 is a gate through which the game ball passes. In the following, the term “prize” is used including the operation port 68, and the terms “drop”, “ball entry”, and “win” in the present embodiment include the meaning of “pass” relating to the gate.

  When the game ball enters the operation opening 68, if a predetermined change start condition (general drawing change start condition) described later is satisfied, the main symbol (described later) is displayed on the main control display device 53. Varying display. The normal symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 indicates the result of random number lottery (general drawing lottery) executed based on entering the ball into the operation opening 68, and the stop display is shown after a predetermined fluctuation time has passed. Be done.

  When the game ball enters the starting opening (here, the first start winning opening 62 or the second starting winning opening 63), a predetermined change start condition (special figure change start condition) described later is satisfied. For example, in the main control display device 53, a special symbol (described later) is variably displayed. The special symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 indicates the result of random number lottery (big hit lottery) executed based on entering the starting opening, and is stopped after a predetermined fluctuation time. .

  In the above-described effect display device 60, effect display relating to a special symbol is performed. In this effect display, whether the special symbol is in a variable display or in a stop display, or the stop display mode of the special symbol is a big hit, or it is a difference. Relatedly, effects of various predetermined aspects are performed.

  In the big hit game in which the special game is executed, a unit game in which the big winning opening device 90 operates and the big winning opening (not shown) is opened is repeated a plurality of times. Furthermore, special games include those in which unit games are repeated the maximum number of times and those in which unit games are repeated the number of times smaller than the maximum number. As the maximum number of times, 15 times (15R (round)) can be exemplified, and as the number of times smaller than the maximum number of times, 5 times (5R) or the like can be exemplified. In addition, the special game in the case of playing the unit game in which the opening of the special winning opening is executed only once is referred to as the "small hit".

  In each unit game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected in the corresponding big winning opening, or when the total opening time reaches a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds), The closing condition is satisfied, and the big winning opening is closed. Setting the total opening time as the termination condition of the unit game indicates that the upper limit value is determined even in the case where opening of the large winning opening is performed in multiple times during one unit game. ing. By giving multiple opening of the big winning opening in the unit game, to increase the technical intervention, or to be able to easily get out balls by performing in one opening, such as to give a wide range of game characteristics during the big hit, The opening mode of the special winning opening can be selected from preset patterns.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, a gaming property is adopted in which a plurality of (here, two) games corresponding to the first type pachinko gaming machine referred to in the prior art are mixed. That is, in the present embodiment, the plurality of games described above can be divided into a first game in which the first start winning opening 62 is used and a second game in which the second starting winning opening 63 is used. And, in a situation where the second game is prioritized over the first game, and at the same time the game start condition is satisfied, the second game is prioritized and executed, and the first game is held, One game and the second game are not executed at the same time.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a specific game may be executed after the end of the special game in accordance with the result of the above-mentioned big hit lottery. This specific game is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, in a mode different from the special game described above. In the present embodiment, a probability fluctuation game (hereinafter referred to as “probable change”), a fluctuation time shortening game (hereinafter referred to as “time reduction”), and an entry facilitation game are provided as specific games. As a specific game, there is a game that executes only one of a definite change, a short time, and an entry facilitation game, and a plurality of specific games are played at the same time.

  When the specific game is executed, a notification (for example, an effect that urges to hit the right) regarding the launch position and launch timing of the gaming ball recommended by the image and sound of the effect display device 60 is executed. Then, when the player increases the pivoting amount of the firing handle 20 clockwise to strengthen the firing force and shoots the game ball toward the right area of the game area 52, the game ball passing above the center decoration 64 , Enters the game ball passage portion 65 of the center decoration 64, and flows down the center decoration 64. Furthermore, the game balls discharged from the center decoration 64 fall in the direction according to the hitting while hitting the plurality of game nails and other structures.

  Some of the many gaming balls released from the center decoration 64 pass through the operation opening 68 (see FIG. 1) and are detected by the passage detection device 69 (see FIG. 3). Then, as described above, when the gaming ball passes through the operation opening 68, the above-mentioned normal symbol is variably displayed on the main control display device 53 (refer to FIG. 7), and the fluctuation display of the regular symbol is stopped in a predetermined hitting mode. Then, the normal motorized prizes of the second start winning opening 63 hit and expand for a predetermined time according to the mode.

  In the present embodiment, it is possible to guide the gaming ball having reached the right side of the gaming area 52 around the second start winning opening 63 and the big winning opening device 90 by nails or the like. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the entry facilitation game is added to the specific game at a short time, and during the short time, the opening extension of the ordinary electric role by the entry facilitation game, the ordinary electric role Probability fluctuation of the object, time-saving combination of the ordinary motorized combination is performed, and the aforementioned long open of the commonly used electric combination becomes easy to be executed. Then, during the time saving, one or more game balls can enter the second start winning opening 63 when the ordinary electric winning combination of the second starting winning opening 63 is expanded once. ing.

In addition, when a big hit occurs and a special game is executed, a large winning opening (not shown) of the large winning opening device 90 is opened, but during this special game, the player is hit to the right It is possible to And, in this case, it is possible to execute an effect that urges the player to hit the right by an image, sound or the like of the effect display device 60 before the start of the special game.
<Example of big hit type: ST>

  Next, the types of jackpots in the above-described first game and second game will be described. First, as a big hit, a big hit repeating the above-mentioned unit game 15 times (hereinafter referred to as “15R big hit” as appropriate) and a big hit repeating unit game seven times (hereinafter referred to as “7R big hit”) are provided. . In addition, about the lottery aspect of these big hit, it mentions later.

  The above-mentioned unit game is started as the special winning opening in the special winning opening device 90 is opened in the special game, and when a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has passed, or a predetermined number (for example 10) The game ends when the game ball of more than pieces is dropped, and the big winning opening is closed. The special game which repeats such a unit game is basically based on the so-called game with the goal of causing the player to acquire a game ball (sometimes referred to as a ball). Further, among various jackpots, 15R jackpots and 7R jackpots are intended to make the player acquire a relatively large number of game balls.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to provide a type (15R normal or 7R normal) that does not become a definite variation, for example, in 15R big hit or part of 15R big hit as a part of the big hit. Also, for example, even if it is a 15R big hit, the opening period of the big winning opening is short, and it is possible to substantially obtain only the same degree of balls as the 5R big hit (15R positive variation (real 5R)) or 5R big hit Even in this case, it is possible to provide an item that can hardly obtain an exit (for example, only a minimum degree (for example, one ball) in each R can enter the special winning opening device 90).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the specific gaming state such as the above-mentioned probability change or time-shortening occurs for a predetermined specific big hit. As a generation mode of such a specific gaming state, for example, it is possible to provide a jackpot which does not give at least one copy among the bonus functions such as a probability change, a time reduction, and an entry facilitation game. More specifically, it is conceivable to provide a big hit with only a definite change or a big hit with only a short time. Furthermore, it is possible to make the type of jackpot different depending on the difference in the duration of the definite variation or the difference in the duration of the short time. In addition, in the case where the electric chow support is executed together in the short time, the "short time duration" can be reworded as "the electric chow support duration". Furthermore, it is also conceivable to execute only the electric chew support among the time saving and the electric chow support.

However, the combination of the jackpot and the probability variation or the time-short etc is not limited to that of the present embodiment, and various combinations can be adopted. For example, a probability change may occur for all the big hits. In this case, all of the 15R jackpots in the present embodiment are 15R jackpots with definite variation (15R probability variations), and all of the 7R jackpots are 7R jackpots with definite variation (7R probability variations).
<A hit other than a big hit>

Also, in the present embodiment, a small hit is provided as a type of hit other than the big hit. When this small hit occurs in the first game (or the second game), the big winning opening device 90 is opened, for example, once. In addition, about the lottery aspect of a small hit, it mentions later.
<Main control display device>
<< Configuration of main control display device >>

  Next, the above-mentioned main control display device 53 (game board side main control display device) will be described based on FIG. As shown in FIG. 7, the main control display device 53 on the game board side is arranged by dividing a large number (here, 36) of LED indicator lights into two lines (upper and lower) on a symbol display substrate 256 It is configured. In the present embodiment, the number of LED indicator lamps in the upper and lower stages is 18, and the LED indicator lamps in each stage are arranged at equal intervals in the horizontal direction. In addition, the intervals between the LED indicator lights in the upper and lower positional relationship are also constant for all eighteen.

  In the main control display device 53, the ten LED indicators at the right end in the upper row when viewed from the front are used for information display according to Special Figure 1, and the ten LED indicators at the right end in the lower row are shown in It is intended to be used for such information display. In the upper and lower rows, the two LED indicators at the right end constitute a first special symbol storage display unit 83 and a second special symbol storage display unit 84 that indicate the number of pending storages. The eight LED indicator lights arranged on the left of the first special symbol memory display unit 83 constitute the first special symbol display unit 70 described above, and the eight LED indicator lights arranged on the left of the second special symbol memory display unit 84 Each LED indicator light constitutes the second special symbol display unit 71 described above.

  The first special symbol display unit 70 can perform variable display and stop display of the first special symbol according to the first game by the operation mode of eight LED indicator lights arranged in a line in the lateral direction. The first special symbol by the first special symbol display portion 70 is a symbol corresponding to the result of the first lottery performed with the game ball entering the first start winning opening 62 as a trigger, and its variation display is predetermined When it is stopped in the hit mode, a big hit occurs and a special game is executed. In the first special symbol display section 70, at the time of stop display of the first special symbol, a maximum of 255 (= 2 ^ 8) except in the case where all are turned off by the combination of lighting and extinguishing of each LED indicator light. -1) A type of identification information can be displayed.

  Similarly, the above-mentioned second special symbol display portion 71 has a maximum of 255 (= 2 in the case of the stop display of the second special symbol depending on the operation mode of eight LED indicator lights arranged in a line in the horizontal direction). ^ 8) It is possible to display identification information of the type.

  Furthermore, in the upper row, the four LED indicator lights lined up on the left of the first special symbol display section 70 are used to display information related to a normal symbol (general drawing). And two LED indicator lights lined up on the left of the above-mentioned 1st special symbol display part 70 comprise the normal symbol memory display part 85 for displaying the number of pending storages of a normal symbol, The left side thereof The two LED indicator lights arranged side by side constitute a normal symbol display section 59.

  The normal symbol display unit 59 is configured to perform variable display and stop display of the normal symbol according to the operation mode of the two LED indicator lights. Then, the normal symbol display section 59 can display 3 (= 2 ^ 2-1) types of identification information at the time of stop display.

  In addition, the round number display unit 86 is configured by two in the upper row arranged on the left side of the normal symbol display unit 59 and two four LED indicator lamps at the lower left end located below the same. In the lower part, the four LED indicator lights between the round number indicator 86 and the second special symbol indicator 71 are the first status indicator (status indicator 1) 87a and the second status indicator in order from the left. (State indicator light 2) 87b, third state indicator (state indicator 3) 87c, and fourth state indicator (state indicator 4) 87d.

  The above-mentioned first state display unit 87a is turned on at the time of probability fluctuation function operation according to the special figure, and the second state display unit 87b is turned on at the time of probability fluctuation function operation according to the common drawing. There is. In addition, the second state display unit 87b is also lighted at the time of the open extension which is a so-called power support (power support) state. Furthermore, the third state display unit 87c is used as a hit (right) state indicator light. Further, the fourth state display unit 87d is used as an error indicator.

  Here, the above-mentioned third state display unit 87 c (individual state indication lamp) is designed to light up during a big hit as well as during the power-on state. During the jackpot, the flag (power support flag) or the like for setting the power support state is off even if the unit is in continuous use. In addition, the third state display unit 87c is configured to light up at the time of a long opening or the like related to the ordinary motorized combination in the state (normal time) other than the above.

The main control display device 53 (game board side main control display device) having such a configuration is electrically connected to the above-described main board 102 as shown in FIG. The various display units in the main control display device 53 are controlled by the main substrate 102. In FIG. 3, among the various display units in the main control display device 53, only the normal symbol display unit 59, the first special symbol display unit 70, and the second special symbol display unit 71 are shown.
<< Function of main control display device >>

  When the gaming ball passes through the operation opening 68 described above, the normal symbol display section 59 blinks, and the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. Then, when a predetermined fluctuation time (general drawing fluctuation time) elapses after the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. And, if the normal symbol is displayed in the form of disengaging (disappearing aspect), if there is a ball entering the subsequent operation opening after the passage of a predetermined stop time (fixed figure stop fixed time), it is normal The next variable display relating to the symbol is started. In addition, when a normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined hitting mode (hit mode), while shifting to the next variable display as in the case of the removal, the hit of the normal symbol previously stopped is displayed. Depending on the mode, the second start winning opening 63 performs an opening operation for a predetermined time.

  The number of reservations pertaining to this common drawing lottery is the number of gaming balls that have passed through the operation opening 68 during the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and indicates the number of common symbol drawing in which the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is not yet executed. That is, when the symbol variation performed previously in the normal symbol storage display unit 85 is not completed, the variation start condition is not satisfied, and when the symbol variation is completed, the variation start condition is satisfied and is suspended. A new symbol variation will be started based on the lottery result (held lottery result) stored. And, the upper limit of the number of reservations is four, and it is arranged that the number of pending storage is not exceeded four.

  The display of the four types of numerical values by the normal symbol storage display unit 85, for example, turns off both when the number of reservations is 0 (no suspension) and turns on one of the numbers when the number of reservations is 1. It is possible to do in the mode which lights out the other. Also, if the number of reservations is 2, both are lit, if the number of reservations is 3, one of them is lit and the other blinks, and if the number of reservations is 4, both are blinked. Can be displayed.

  The display of the number of reservations of the first special symbol by the first special symbol storage display unit 83 described above is performed by displaying four types of information with one set of two LED indicator lamps. The display of the number of holdings of the second special symbol by the second special symbol storage display unit 84 is also performed by displaying four types of information with one set of two LED indicator lamps.

In the game situation where the above-mentioned right-handed game should be performed, display in a predetermined mode using the third state display portion 86c of the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 7) is performed. In the present embodiment, the third state display unit 86c is set to turn off at the time of left hitting, which is the gaming situation to be hit to the left, and to light at the time of right hitting, which is the gaming situation to be right hit.
<Structure of effect display device and basic display contents>

  Subsequently, a configuration of the above-described effect display device 60 and a basic display example of the effect display device 60 will be described. In the present embodiment, a large (for example, about 15 inches) liquid crystal display is used as the effect display device 60. In the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, effect display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 described above, and other effect display such as story display are performed. Although various images are displayed in the effect display device 60, here, basic effect display directly related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol will be described.

  As described above, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the main control display device 53, in the effect display device 60, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, the effect is displayed A fluctuation effect accompanied by fluctuation display of a symbol (also referred to as “decorative symbol” or the like) 190 is executed. In the present embodiment, the effect pattern 190 is configured by the left effect pattern 190a, the middle effect pattern 190b, and the right effect pattern 190c. In addition, about the production | presentation pattern 190a-190c of the left middle right below, according to a condition, it may be described as "the production | presentation pattern 190" and "the production | presentation pattern 190a-190c."

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the effect pattern 190 has seven types of element symbols (symbol element effect symbols) having the meanings of the symbols "1" to "7". In addition, here, the description will be made using seven types of element designs having the meanings of the symbols “1” to “7” so that the description is not complicated, but as the element design, for example, a predetermined word It is also possible to adopt a symbol having a meaning other than numbers, like. Furthermore, it is also possible to use a combination of one having a meaning of numbers and one having another meaning as an element design. In addition, in order to execute special effects (pseudo continuous notice and special zone effects described later), effects are suggested to appear (displayed by being added to or replaced with a normal pattern) only when there is a certain change A special symbol for the purpose is also included in the rendering symbol 190 in a broad sense.

  Along with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the main control display device 53, the above-described effect symbol 190 is variably displayed in the effect display device 60 (see FIG. 8A). In the present embodiment, in the variation display of the production symbols, the left production symbols 190a to the right production symbols 190c are individually moved vertically (vertically scrolled) to cause the above-mentioned element symbols to appear sequentially in the display area 194 Is executed by In addition, it is possible to employ | adopt various aspects, such as a horizontal direction, rotation, or turning besides a vertical direction, as a scroll direction of production | presentation pattern 190a-190c.

  In addition, the effect pattern 190 may constitute a combination of so-called "reach" as an intermediate stage of the variable display. In this "reach", two of the effect symbols 190 (here, the left effect symbol 190a and the right effect symbol 190c) are, for example, the same number symbols such as "7" and "7", and the same meaning. Alternatively, the combination is configured with symbols having a predetermined relationship. Furthermore, in this "reach", the remaining one symbol (here, the middle effect symbol 190b) other than the effect symbols 190a and 190c that constitute the combination of reach can not constitute a combination with other effect symbols. It has become.

  In addition, although various kinds of "reach" and other various things are employable as a display mode of the production | presentation pattern 190, the detail of various display modes is mentioned later. Further, in the effect display device 60, various effects are performed in addition to the effect by the effect pattern 190, and the details thereof will be described later.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect display device 60 uses a liquid crystal display, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, other types of display bodies such as a mechanical drum body and an LED display body are used. It may be one. Furthermore, the effect display device 60 is not limited to one provided with only one display body, and may be configured by a combination of a plurality of display bodies, for example, with the addition of an additional display body.

Furthermore, it is also possible to provide such an additional display as a movable effect member, and to construct a gimmick by the additional display. Then, usually, an additional display body is arranged outside the display area 194 so as not to hinder the visual recognition of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, and a predetermined effect pattern is executed. In some cases, it is conceivable to cause an additional display to appear in front of the display area 194.
<Configuration related to setting change function>

  Next, a configuration relating to the above-described setting change and a method of the setting change will be described. FIG. 5 (a) shows a state in which the main substrate 102 is accommodated in a transparent substrate case 801 in an enlarged manner, and FIG. 5 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 5 (a). It is shown enlarged and schematically. In FIG. 5A, the substrate case 801 is formed of a colorless and transparent plastic material in a box shape of a divided structure (for example, a structure of two divisions).

  As a divided structure of the substrate case 801, for example, a combination of a substrate holder that holds the main substrate 102 and a cover body, and a combination of the substrate holder and the cover body via a caulking structure that leaves a trace at the time of separation It can be adopted. In the substrate case 801, a connector 802 (only a part of which is indicated by a reference numeral) used for connection with other devices such as the sub main substrate 301 etc. is formed with a size that does not create a gap as much as possible. Exposed from the opening.

  The main substrate 102 is visible through the transparent substrate case 801, but in FIG. 5A, the CPU (main CPU) 501, the test terminal mounting area 806, the setting indicator 807 described above, The ball status indicator 808 is indicated by a broken line, and the illustration of the other devices is omitted. Of these, the test terminal mounting area 806 is an area where the test terminals are mounted only when conducting a ball test or the like in the product testing stage, and mounting of the test terminals is performed on the main substrate 102 in the mass production stage. Not.

  The setting display 807 described above displays the selected setting value only at the time of setting change or setting confirmation. The setting indicator 807 is the current setting with respect to the setting value for making the operation probability of the item continuous operation device (the operation probability of the device for operating the special motorized component continuously, so-called big hit probability) different. Values can be displayed. Further, a 7-segment display for one digit is used as the setting display 807. Here, in the present embodiment, although not shown, a dot display unit is provided at the lower right corner of the 7-segment display in the setting display 807.

  A setting key cylinder (also called "setting key switch") 809 and a setting change button (also called "setting change switch") 810 are arranged in the vicinity of the setting display 807, and the setting key cylinder 809 or setting A setting change operation unit 811 is configured by the change button 810 and the like. As shown in FIG. 5B, the setting change operation unit 811 opens the setting change opening / closing lid (hereinafter referred to as “opening / closing lid”) 812 of the substrate case 801, as shown in FIG. 5A. It is exposed as shown.

  The open / close lid 812 is, for example, integrally formed on the substrate case 801 via a resin hinge, and the protruding knob portion 813 is pulled by a finger to be released as shown by an arrow B while resisting the elastic force. Can be illustrated. Further, when the open / close lid 812 is closed, it is laid down (not shown) from the state of FIG. 5B, and the free end side is locked to the substrate case 801.

  The above-mentioned ball entry status indicator 808 is used as a performance display unit of the pachinko gaming machine 10, and can display a base (value of the number of winning balls per shot) for each gaming status. In the present embodiment, as shown by a solid line in an enlarged manner in the lower right part of FIG. 5A, a four-digit 7-segment display is used for the entering state display 808. In addition, a dot display unit (reference numeral omitted) is provided at the lower right corner of the 7-segment display of each digit of the entering state display 808.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the CPU 501, the test terminal mounting area 806, the ball entry state indicator 808, the setting change operation unit 811, and the setting indicator 807 are wrapped in plan view (rear view of the gaming machine). It is arranged so as not to (do not overlap). Further, in order to prevent erroneous recognition of the display, the ball entry state indicator 808 and the setting indicator 807 are disposed at an interval of a predetermined distance or more (for example, 30 mm or more).

  In the present embodiment, the left side in FIG. 5B is the free end when opening the gaming machine frame 11, and the setting change operation unit 811 and the setting display 807 are disposed near the free end side. Therefore, the ball entry status indicator 808 is disposed on the rotary shaft (fixed end) side when the gaming machine frame 11 is opened, while the setting value can be easily changed. When the gaming machine frame is opened, it is considered to prevent the player from visually recognizing the display information unintentionally. Of course, when priority is given to preventing fraud when changing setting values, etc., the setting change operation unit 811 and the setting indicator 807 are formed on the right side of the main board 102 (the rotary shaft side of the gaming machine frame 11). Just do it.

  Here, in the present embodiment, in consideration of the above-described points, an opening / closing lid 812 is provided in a portion corresponding to the setting change operation unit 811 so that the setting change operation unit 811 can not be accessed easily. The setting change operation unit 811 is configured not to be exposed except in the case of a change operation or a confirmation operation of setting information. Hereinafter, the setting change operation unit 811 and the setting display unit 807 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, on the upper surface portion of the substrate case 801 which has a positional relationship corresponding to the setting change operation unit 811, the setting key (key) can be inserted into the setting key insertion port (reference numeral omitted) of the setting key cylinder 809. In addition, an opening 816 having a predetermined size is formed so that the setting change button 810 can be operated. However, by forming a partition wall such as a side wall or the like from the opening 816 toward the upper surface of the main substrate 102, other electronic components (for example, the CPU 501) of the main substrate 102 can not be accessed through the opening 816. It has become. In addition, a setting key cylinder 809 in which a setting key insertion port (reference numeral omitted) is formed corresponding to the opening 816 and a push type setting change button 810 are vertically viewed from the back of the pachinko gaming machine 10 An open / close lid 812 corresponding to the size of the opening 816 is provided on the substrate case 801 so as to be openable / closable in a state of being urged in a direction to always close the opening 816.

  Next, an outline of the operation method such as setting change and the operation of the setting change / setting display will be briefly described. When checking the set value, first, the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) is operated to turn off the power, and then the opening / closing lid 812 is opened against the biasing force by a predetermined angle, and the setting key cylinder 809 Insert the setting key (key) into the setting key slot of and rotate the key to the right. Then, the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) is operated again without turning on the initialization switch 544 to turn on the power. By this operation, the current setting value (for example, the corresponding numerical value if the range of the setting value is “1” to “6”) is displayed on the setting display 807 formed of the 7-segment LED, and the setting display mode In order to indicate that there is a part, a segment (here, a dot portion) is driven to light. In the present embodiment, the setting value changing process is performed when the gaming machine is activated (for example, in a state where control based on an input related to the progress of the game can be executed, such as detection of winning of the start winning opening). It is configured to be impossible.

  On the other hand, when changing the setting value, first, the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) is operated to turn off the power, and then the opening / closing lid 812 is released against the biasing force by a predetermined angle, and the setting key The setting key (key) is inserted into the setting key insertion port of the cylinder 809 and the key is rotated in the right direction. Then, while pressing the initialization switch 544, the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) is operated again to turn on the power. As a result of this operation, the current setting value blinks on the setting display 807 formed of the 7-segment LED, and some segments (dot portions in this case) are turned off (lights off) to indicate that the setting change mode is set. Is displayed.

  In this state, each time the setting change button 810 is pressed, a new set value, which is +1 for the current set value, is temporarily stored, and the stored set value is displayed on the setting display 807. The manager in the game arcade operates the setting change button 810 so as to obtain an arbitrary (target) setting value. In the present embodiment, if the setting value at power on is “1”, “1” “2”... “5” “6” “1” each time the setting change button 810 is pressed once. It is changed like ".

Then, when the key inserted in the setting key cylinder 809 is rotated in the left direction in a state where it is changed to an arbitrary setting value (an arbitrary setting value is displayed on the setting display 807) by operating the setting change button, setting is performed. After the change process is completed and the current setting value is lit and displayed on the setting display 807 for a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) and the partial segments (dot portions in this case) are lit and displayed, the setting value is displayed. And both dots are turned off.
<Structure of effect display device and basic display contents>

  Subsequently, a configuration of the above-described effect display device 60 and a basic display example of the effect display device 60 will be described. In the present embodiment, a large (for example, about 15 inches) liquid crystal display is used as the effect display device 60. In the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, effect display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 described above, and other effect display such as story display are performed. Although various images are displayed in the effect display device 60, here, basic effect display directly related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol will be described.

  As described above, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the main control display device 53, in the effect display device 60, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, the effect is displayed Variable display of a symbol (also referred to as a decorative symbol) 190 is performed. In the present embodiment, the effect pattern 190 is configured by the left effect pattern 190a, the middle effect pattern 190b, and the right effect pattern 190c.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the left rendering symbol 190a has nine types of element symbols (symbol element effect symbols) having the meanings of the symbols "1" to "9". The middle effect pattern 190b and the right effect pattern 190c, which are other effect patterns, also have nine types of element symbols meaning "1" to "9" in the same manner as the left effect pattern 190a. In addition, the detail of the above-mentioned element pattern is mentioned later.

  Along with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the main control display device 53, the above-described effect symbol 190 is variably displayed in the effect display device 60 (see FIG. 8A). In the present embodiment, in the variation display of the production symbols, the left production symbols 190a to the right production symbols 190c are individually moved vertically (vertically scrolled) to cause the above-mentioned element symbols to appear sequentially in the display area 194 Is executed by

  In addition, the effect pattern 190 may constitute a combination of so-called "reach" as an intermediate stage of the variable display. In this "reach", two of the effect symbols 190 (here, the left effect symbol 190a and the right effect symbol 190c) are, for example, the same number symbols such as "7" and "7", and the same meaning. Alternatively, the combination is configured with symbols having a predetermined relationship. Furthermore, in this "reach", the remaining one symbol (here, the middle effect symbol 190b) other than the effect symbols 190a and 190c that constitute the combination of reach can not constitute a combination with other effect symbols. It has become.

  In addition, although various kinds of "reach" and other various things are employable as a display mode of the production | presentation pattern 190, the detail of various display modes is mentioned later. Further, in the effect display device 60, various effects are performed in addition to the effect by the effect pattern 190, and the details thereof will be described later.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect display device 60 uses a liquid crystal display, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, other types of display bodies such as a mechanical drum body and an LED display body are used. It may be one. Furthermore, the effect display device 60 is not limited to one provided with only one display body, and may be configured by a combination of a plurality of display bodies, for example, with the addition of an additional display body.

Furthermore, it is also possible to provide such an additional display as a movable effect member, and to construct a gimmick by the additional display. Then, usually, an additional display body is arranged outside the display area 194 so as not to hinder the visual recognition of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, and a predetermined effect pattern is executed. In some cases, it is conceivable to cause an additional display to appear in front of the display area 194.
<Electric configuration of pachinko gaming machine>

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. Here, the main ones of the electrical configurations will be extracted and described. First, as shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko gaming machine 10 is provided with a power supply substrate 251, a payout control substrate 103, a main substrate 102, a sub main substrate 301, and the like. Among these components, the above-described payout control substrate 103, a game apparatus such as a game ball, a connection device connection plate 106, a launch control substrate 107, and the like are connected to the power supply substrate 251. Further, the main substrate 102 is connected to the payout control substrate 103 via the frame relay terminal board 108. In addition, a main symbol display substrate (also referred to as a “symbol display substrate”) 256 constituting the above-mentioned main control display device 53 and a sub main substrate 301 are connected to the main substrate 102, and the sub main substrate 301 is connected. , And the aforementioned sub-sub substrate 302 is connected.

  Among the various configurations described above, the power supply substrate 251 is included in the above-described power supply unit 32 (see FIG. 2). A frame effect connection board 300 and a game apparatus connection terminal board (not shown) are connected to the power supply board 251, and a game apparatus connection terminal board (not shown) among them is a ball The ball coin operation board etc. used for coin operation are connected.

  A touch switch 310 provided on the launch handle 20 (see FIGS. 1 and 20) is connected to the above-described launch control substrate 105. Although not shown, a launch touch lever and a lock for grounding are connected to the touch switch 310. A touch switch (also referred to as a "touch sensor") 310 detects this contact and detects an aspect of an output signal when a player or a game arcade clerk or the like touches the firing handle 20 with a finger (FIG. 20B). Change.

  Furthermore, to the launch control substrate 105, a launch intensity volume 311, a launch stop switch 312, and the launch device 43 described above are connected. Among these, the firing intensity volume 1311 is used to change the firing intensity of the gaming ball in accordance with the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 20. The firing stop switch 312 is used to detect an operation on a part (such as a thumb) of the finger holding the firing handle 20 and stop the firing.

  Electric power from the power supply substrate 251 is supplied to the main substrate 102 via the payout control substrate 103 and the frame relay terminal plate. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 3, the main control display device 53, the respective passage detection devices 69a and 69b, and the ordinary motor role are provided on the main substrate 102 via a game board connection board and a game board relay terminal board (not shown). Product solenoid 76, first start winning detection device 74, second start winning detection device 75, general winning detection device 73, big winning detection device 78, big winning opening (open) solenoid 80, magnetic sensor and radio wave sensor (shown ) Are connected. Here, in the present embodiment, regarding connection of the first start winning detection device 74 and the second start winning detection device 75 to the main substrate 102, the game board connection board and the game board relay terminal board are not directly connected. It has been done.

  Power from the power supply substrate 251 is supplied to the sub main substrate 301 via the frame effect connection substrate 300 and the frame connection substrate 303. Furthermore, in addition to the frame connection substrate 303 and the frame effect connection substrate 300 described above on the sub main substrate 301, the effect for the game machine frame 11 via the glass frame effect connection relay substrate 305 and the glass frame effect connection substrate 306. Each device is connected.

  As devices for effect in the pachinko game machine 10, there are a frame electric decoration L2 substrate 317, a frame electric decoration R2 substrate 318, (left) speaker 21 (L), (right) speaker 21 (R) and the like. In addition, although the cross key (cross button) substrate, effect button substrate, lift motor, effect button (operation button) motor, button position sensor, etc. are also provided in this embodiment, these are not shown in FIG. doing.

  Further, to the sub main substrate 301, a device for a game board, a device for image display, a device for voice control, and the like are connected. Among them, as a device for a game board, there is a board electrical connection board 331. The panel electrical connection board 331 is connected to the sub main board 301 via the frame connection board 303 and the effect interface board 304 described above. Then, a center illumination decoration substrate 332 used for illumination of the center decoration 64 is connected to the panel illumination decoration connection substrate 331. Further, although not shown, a representation sensor substrate, other illumination substrates, a presentation motor, and the like are also connected to the panel electrical connection substrate 331. Here, to the effect interface substrate 304, various electric decoration substrates and effect motors are connected although illustration is omitted.

  The above-described image display apparatus connected to the sub main substrate 301 includes a sub sub substrate (image control substrate) 302. The sub sub substrate 302 includes a liquid crystal unit (a liquid crystal module and the like) via an image display connection A substrate 336. Say) 42 is connected. Here, in the present embodiment, although not shown, another liquid crystal unit connected to the rendering interface substrate 304 via the image display connection B substrate is also provided. Further, examples of the above-mentioned devices for voice control connected to the sub main substrate 301 include a voice control substrate (voice substrate) 339 and a voice rom (ROM) substrate 340.

  Subsequently, configurations of the main substrate 102, the payout control substrate 103, and the like will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, a CPU (main CPU) 501, a ROM (main ROM) 502, and an RWM 503 are mounted on the main board 102. Among these, as the CPU 501, for example, a central processing unit in a CPU device (CPU device) in which resin packaging is performed can be used. Note that “ROM” and “RWM” described in the present embodiment are a generic concept including both those incorporated in the CPU device and those externally attached to the CPU device.

  Furthermore, although not shown, in the CPU device mounted on the main board 102, in addition to the CPU 501, a control clock generation circuit, a clock generation circuit for random numbers, a random number circuit for 16-bit random numbers, an 8-bit random number Random number circuit etc. are provided. Among these, a random number circuit for 16-bit random numbers and a random number circuit for 8-bit random numbers are for generating hardware random numbers that are built-in random numbers.

  In addition, an input / output port 505 is mounted on the main board 102 to input / output data to / from devices external to the main board 102. Furthermore, although not shown, various circuit parts such as an interrupt circuit and a timer circuit are formed on the main substrate 102.

  The above-described ROM 502 stores a game program for the CPU 501 to perform processing related to a game, predetermined control data, and the like. Further, the RWM 503 described above rewritably stores data necessary for various types of processing, data generated during processing, and the like when the CPU 501 executes a game program.

  Subsequently, on the payout control board 103, a CPU (payout CPU) 511, a ROM (payout ROM) 512, and an RWM 513 are mounted. Among these, as the CPU 511, for example, a central processing unit in a CPU device (CPU device) in which resin packaging is performed can be used. The ROM 512 also stores a payout program for the CPU 511 to perform processing relating to payout, predetermined control data, and the like. Further, the RWM 513 described above rewritably stores data necessary for various types of processing, data generated during processing, and the like when the CPU 501 executes the payout program.

  The sub main board 301 described above includes a CPU (sub main CPU) 521, a ROM (sub main ROM) 522, a work RWM 523, an input port 527, an output port 528, a bus line (not shown) and the like. . The output side of the main board 102 is connected to the input side of the input port 527, and the CPU 521, the ROM 522, the work RWM 523, the output port 528, etc. are connected to the output side of the input port 527.

  The CPU 521 of the sub main substrate 301 controls the display of the effect display device 60 based on the effect control command (command) for symbol display transmitted from the main substrate 102. The ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the CPU 521 and fixed value data, and the work RWM 523 temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. Memory.

  The transmission and reception of data between the main substrate 102 and the sub main substrate 301 described above is performed in a one-way communication (one-way communication) from the main substrate 102 to the sub main substrate 301. Then, since unidirectionality of communication is secured between the main substrate 102 and the sub main substrate 301, data can not be transmitted from the sub main substrate 301 to the main substrate 102. Therefore, the information held by the main board 102 can not be referred to by the sub main board 301 unless the main board 102 transmits the information to the sub main board 301. Note that, in order to enable such communication in one direction, for example, communication restriction means (such as a buffer circuit) is mounted on the main substrate 102, and data output to the sub main substrate 301 can be It is possible to do through.

  The sub-sub substrate 302 described above includes a CPU 531, a work RWM 532, a program ROM 533, a character ROM 535, an image controller (VDP) 536, an input port 538, an output port 539, and a bus line (not shown). Furthermore, the image controller (VDP) 536 comprises a video memory 540. The output side of the sub main board 301 is connected to the input side of the input port 538, and the devices such as the CPU 531, the work RWM 532 and the program ROM 533 are connected to the output side of the input port 538.

The video memory 540 described above is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the effect display device 60, and the display content (frame image of the effect display device 60 can be displayed by rewriting the contents of the image data in the video memory 540). ) Is changed. The character ROM 535 is a memory for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the effect display device 60. The image controller 536 adjusts the operation timings of the CPU 531, the video memory 540, and the output port 539 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the display data stored in the video memory 540 from the character ROM 535 at a predetermined timing. Furthermore, the symbols are superimposed in the order of the layers for which the priority is determined in advance and displayed on the effect display device 60.
<Power supply and data backup>

  The aforementioned power supply substrate 251 includes a power supply unit 541 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine 10, and an initialization switch circuit unit 543 having an initialization switch 544. The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operating voltages to the main substrate 102, the payout control substrate 103, and the like through a power supply path (not shown). More specifically, the power supply unit 541 takes in a predetermined voltage supplied from the outside, and outputs a predetermined amount of voltage for driving various switches, motors, logic circuits, etc. And supply to other specified equipment.

  The initialization switch circuit unit 543 is an initialization signal for clearing backup data to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 when, for example, the administrator of the game store presses the initialization switch 544 when the power is turned on. Is provided with a circuit that outputs As described later, the main substrate 102 and the payout control substrate 103 can hold (back up) stored data even when power supply to the power supply substrate is cut off. Then, when the initialization signal described above is input to the main substrate 102 and the payout control substrate 103 when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is powered on, the data (backup data) backed up by the main substrate 102 and the payout control substrate 103 is It is cleared. Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the transition to the setting change state is made according to the input state of the initialization switch 544 at the time of power on and the input state of the setting key, The presence / absence of initialization, the range of initialization, and the like can be determined in accordance with the signal from the initialization switch circuit unit 543 and the input signal relating to the setting key.

  The initialization switch 544 is divided into one for the main substrate 102 and one for the dispensing control substrate 103, and the data backed up is cleared separately for the main substrate 102 and the dispensing control substrate 103. You may Also, for example, when the power is turned on, when the initialization switch 544 is operated, the backup data for the main substrate 102 and the backup data for a part of the payout control substrate 103 are cleared and added to the payout control substrate 103. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the remaining backup data of the payout control board 103 is cleared by further operating the initialization switch (not shown) for payout.

  As described above, the RWM 503 in the main board 102 is supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply board 251 even after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is shut off, and data can be held (back up). That is, in the RWM 503, a backup area 503a is provided in addition to a memory and an area (not shown) for temporarily storing various data and the like. The backup area 503a is a stack pointer at the time of power shutoff when the power is shut off (when a power interruption occurs) or the like due to the occurrence of a power failure (including a so-called momentary power interruption due to a momentary voltage drop). , Each register, and an area for storing values such as I / O. Then, with the normal power supply startup and the elimination of the power failure, the state of the main board 102 and the like is returned to the state before the power supply cutoff based on the information of the backup area 503a.

  The writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is shut down by the power-off process (described later), and the restoration of each value written to the backup area 503a is executed in the power-on process (described later) when the power is turned on. . As the backup area 503a, it is possible to use RWM (external RWM) externally connected to the CPU 501 and to which a backup power supply is connected.

  In addition, as for RWM 513 in payout control board 103, as in RWM 503 of main board 102, a backup voltage is supplied from power supply board 251 after powering off pachinko gaming machine 10 so that data can be held (backup). It has become. That is, the RWM 513 of the payout control board 103 is provided with a backup area 513a in addition to a memory and an area (not shown) for temporarily storing various data and the like. This backup area 513a stores the values of the stack pointer at the time of power shutdown, each register, I / O, etc. when the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure (when the power failure occurs). Area. Then, with the normal power-on and the elimination of the power failure, the state of the payout control board 103 is returned to the state before the power-off based on the information of the backup area 513a.

  The writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is shut down by the power-off process in the payout control board 103, and the recovery of each value written in the backup area 513a is the power-on process in the payout control board 103 when the power is turned on ( Control start processing). As the backup area 513a, as in the case of the main substrate 102, it is possible to use an RWM (external RWM) externally connected to the CPU 511 and to which a backup power supply is connected.

  The above-described main board 102 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 that monitors power supply interruption due to a power failure as described above. The power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 outputs a power failure signal (power failure signal) to the CPU 501 of the main substrate 102 and the CPU 511 of the payout control substrate 103 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. More specifically, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 monitors the voltage of DC stability (for example, 30 volts) which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541 of the power supply substrate 251, and this voltage becomes less than a predetermined voltage. In this case, the occurrence of a power failure (power interruption) is detected, and the above-mentioned power interruption signal is output. The CPU 501 of the main board 102 and the CPU 511 of the payout control board 103 execute predetermined power-off process based on the input of the power-off signal.

  The electrical characteristics of the main substrate 102 and the like have sufficient time for execution of predetermined processing such as power-off processing even after the DC stable voltage becomes lower than the predetermined voltage at which the output of the power-off signal is performed. In the meantime, the output of the voltage of 5 volts which is the drive voltage of the control system is configured to be maintained at the normal value.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the output of the power supply substrate is supplied to the main substrate 102 through the payout control substrate 103. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the output of the power supply substrate may be supplied to the delivery control substrate 103 through the main substrate 102, or separately supplied to the main substrate 102 and the delivery control substrate 103 separately. You may

  Further, the above-described power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 can be disposed at a portion other than the main substrate 102. For example, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 may be formed on the power supply substrate 251, and a power failure signal may be input from the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 to each substrate on the power supply substrate 251. Moreover, it is also possible to omit the input of the power interruption signal from the main substrate 102 to the payout control substrate 103. Furthermore, the main substrate 102 may be able to exhibit the function of the power supply substrate 251. In this case, forming the power supply unit 541 on the main substrate 102 can be considered.

  Furthermore, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 may be provided on the payout control substrate 103, and the power control processing based on the power failure signal and the power failure signal may be performed on each of the payout control substrate 103 and the main substrate 102. Further, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 may be provided only on the payout control substrate 103 among the main substrate 102 and the payout control substrate 103, and a power interruption signal may be transmitted from the payout control substrate 103 to the main substrate 102.

  Here, the main CPU 501 and the payout CPU 511 described above are provided with an NMI (non-maskable interrupt) terminal. Also, as a trigger for execution of the above-mentioned power-off processing, a hardware-like one that generates a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) based on the fact that a power-off signal indicating a voltage drop is input to the NMI terminal of the main CPU In the periodic interrupt processing based on the setting, there is a software-like operation performed by confirming a power-off flag set when a voltage drop is detected.

  In this embodiment, the power-off process is performed based on the hardware-like trigger by the NMI. The signal input to the NMI terminal can be performed, for example, by inputting the power-off signal from the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 to the NMI terminal. Here, the signal input to the NMI terminal can occur not only when the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 outputs a power-off signal, but also due to the mixing of noise into the signal line connected to the NMI terminal. The transition to the power-off process can also be performed based on a software method, as will be described later as another embodiment. It is also possible to set a power-off flag based on the power-off signal input to the NMI terminal and to use it as an execution trigger of the power-off process. Here, data backup is performed by the main substrate 102 and the delivery control substrate 103, but not limited to this, for example, data backup of the storage area is performed by the sub main substrate 301, and in the sub main substrate 301 It is also possible to perform data backup similarly to the substrate 102 or the delivery control substrate 103.

  Next, basic functions of the main board 102 will be described. The main substrate 102 of the present embodiment performs various functions such as, for example, entry judgment, lottery, and command transmission, by the operation of each of the above-described configurations (see FIG. 4).

  In FIG. 6, representative functional means in each of the main substrate 102, the sub main substrate 301, and the sub sub substrate 302 are shown. Among these, the main board 102 is the ball entry determination means 110, the first lottery means 111, the second lottery means 112, the common drawing lottery means 113, the hold control means 114, the main display control means 115, the special game control means 116, Specific game control means 117, opening and closing control means 118, advance information notification means 119, main command transmission means 120 and the like are provided. Then, the main board 102 is a lottery concerning a special symbol, a lottery concerning a normal symbol, a hold control, a main control display, a special game, a specific game, an opening / closing control, prior information by these functional means as will be described in order below. Execute notification etc.

The above-mentioned ball entry determination means 110 is a sensor provided in each winning hole with the ball entering the gaming ball to each winning hole (operation opening, various starting winning holes, large winning holes, general winning holes, out ports, etc.) Based on the signal output from.
<< Looze function to affect special symbol >>

  The aforementioned first lottery means 111 executes the first lottery based on the entry into the first start winning opening 62. The first lottery means 111 has functions of a first lottery value acquisition means 121, a first success / failure determination means 122, a first symbol determination means 123, and a first pattern determination means 124. The result of the first lottery is represented by the first special symbol stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display portion 70 of the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 7) described above.

  Similarly, the aforementioned second lottery means 112 executes the second lottery based on the entry of the ball into the second starting winning opening 63. The second lottery means 112 has the functions of a second lottery value acquisition means 125, a second success / failure judgment means 126, a second symbol determination means 127, and a second pattern determination means 128. The result of the second lottery is represented by the second special symbol stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display portion 71 of the main control display device 53 described above.

  The first lottery value acquisition means 121 provided in the first lottery means 111 mentioned above takes the value of the jackpot random number according to the first lottery, triggered by the entry of the ball into the first start winning opening 62, as the first hit lottery value. Get as. In addition, the second lottery value acquisition means 125 provided in the above-mentioned second lottery means 112 takes the value of the jackpot random number according to the second lottery as the second success or failure in response to entering the second start winning opening 63. Acquire as a lottery value.

  In the present embodiment, the big hit random number acquired as the first hit / lottery value and the big hit random number obtained as the second hit / lottery value are hardware random numbers (hard random numbers) and software random numbers (soft random numbers). It is generated by the operation (addition) used. As a hardware random number, for example, a built-in random number generated by a 16-bit random number circuit is used, and as a software random number, a value updated every interruption by a random number generation program in software is used. Note that either one of hardware random numbers and software random numbers may be used.

  The first success or failure judging means 122 in the first lottery means 111 makes a success or failure judgment based on the first success or failure lottery value, and whether or not the first success or failure lottery value falls under a predetermined value (hit value) To judge. Similarly, the second success or failure judging means 126 in the second lottery means 112 makes a success or failure judgment based on the above-mentioned second success or failure lottery value, and the second success or failure lottery value becomes a predetermined value (hit value) which is a hit. Determine if applicable. In the determination by the first determination unit 122 and the second determination unit 126, the correspondence table between the first and second lottery values and the second lottery value and the lottery result of the big hit lottery (for example, FIG. a) is used. Here, as shown in FIG. 9 (a), normal time variation when big hit refers to a random number range that always makes a big hit, and positive variation when big hit is a random value range where a big hit only when certain variation occurs It is shown that.

  The first symbol determination means 123 in the first lottery means 111 and the second symbol determination means 127 in the second lottery means 112 are won when any of the big wins in the big hit lottery pertaining to the first special symbol or the second special symbol The type of special symbol is determined based on the jackpot symbol determination table (see FIG. 10). The jackpot symbol determination table for the first lottery defines the relationship between the symbol lottery value, which is a random number (symbol random number) related to symbol determination, and the type of the special symbol.

  Here, the symbol lottery value may be also referred to as "symbol random number per special symbol", "symbol random number" or the like related to a special symbol. Further, in the present embodiment, small hit is included in the type of the hit, and the first symbol determining means 123 and the second symbol determining means 127 are special when the small hit is won in the big hit lottery relating to the special symbol. The type of symbol is determined based on the small hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 10 (c)).

  The symbol lottery value is acquired, triggered by the entrance to the starting winning opening, as in the case of the above-mentioned winning or not lottery value. In addition, the type of special symbol is associated with the type of hit, and is linked to the acquired symbol lottery value to determine the type of big hit and the presence or absence of a small hit.

  The first pattern determination means 124 in the first lottery means 111 and the second pattern determination means 128 in the second lottery means 112 are based on the special pattern fluctuation pattern table for the variation pattern of the special symbol in the special symbol display unit corresponding to each. decide. The special figure fluctuation pattern table defines the relationship between a number of special figure fluctuation patterns and a pattern lottery value which is a random number value (variation pattern random number) related to the fluctuation pattern determination of the special symbol.

  The pattern lottery value is acquired, triggered by the entrance to the starting winning opening, as in the case of the above-mentioned success or failure lottery value. Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern according to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is, for example, according to various gaming situations such as big hit, off time, reach, presence or absence, number of reservations, number of changes after big hit, etc. A plurality of different special figure fluctuation pattern tables are provided.

  The fluctuation pattern (special pattern fluctuation pattern) according to the special symbol defines the time (variation time) from the start of fluctuation to the stop in the fluctuation display of the special symbol. The special pattern fluctuation pattern defines various long and short fluctuation times, such as one second or less to several tens of seconds, depending on the type. That is, a fluctuation time is defined as an end condition of the fluctuation display in each special figure fluctuation pattern, and the special symbol display portion 70 or the second special symbol display portion 71 (see FIG. 7) described above is special. The variation display of the symbol is started, and when the defined variation time has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  For most of the special figure fluctuation patterns to be selected at short time, the fluctuation time is set shorter than the special figure fluctuation pattern to be selected at short time. However, the special pattern fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the number of reservations is 4 at a non-short time include those with a short fluctuation time as compared to a specific special pattern fluctuation pattern at the time of time reduction. There is.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern selected in a predetermined situation such as the time of probability change is such that the one with extremely short fluctuation time (for example, about 0.6 seconds) occupies most. And in such a situation, based on the change pattern of a very short time, the change display of a special symbol and the rendition accompanying this are performed.
<< Relationship between the success or failure random number and the set value pertaining to the special symbol >>

  Subsequently, the relationship between the random number according to the special symbol and the setting value will be described. FIG. 9A shows the pass / fail random numbers for the set value “1” among the set values “1” to “6” in the present embodiment. As for the success or failure random number table of the setting value “1” shown in FIG. 9A, the big hit value at the time of normal (probability) within the random value range “0 to 65535” for any of the first drawing and the second drawing. Is “0 to 205”. Furthermore, the random number range “206 to 64875” is an outlier value in any of the first lottery and the second lottery at normal times.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability (during definite variation), "206 to 615" is the big hit value in both of the first lottery and the second lottery. Further, in both the first lottery and the second lottery, the random value range “616 to 64875” is a deviation value in both the normal time and the probability variation time. Furthermore, the random number range “64876 to 65535” is a small hit value in both the normal time and the definite time change in both the first lottery and the second lottery.

  FIG. 12 shows a list of hit values for each setting value. Among these, as shown in FIG. 9A, for the set value “1”, “0 to 205” is the big hit value at the normal time. For this reason, the number of random numbers is 206, and the probability of a big hit in normal time is 1/318 (≒ 206/65536). On the other hand, for the set value "2", the big hit value at the normal time is "0 to 206". For this reason, the number of random numbers is 207, and the normal big hit probability is 1/317 (≒ 207/65536).

  Furthermore, with regard to the set value "3", the big hit value at the normal time is "0 to 207". Then, the number of random number values is 208, and the big hit probability in normal time is 1/315 (≒ 208/65536). For the set value "4", the big hit value at the normal time is "0 to 208". Then, the number of random number values is 209, and the big hit probability in normal time is 1/314 (≒ 209/65536).

  In addition, with regard to the set value "5", the big hit value at the normal time is "0 to 209". Then, the number of random numbers is 210, and the big hit probability in normal time is 1/312 (≒ 208/65536). For the set value “6”, the big hit value at the normal time is “0 to 210”. Then, the number of random number values is 211, and the probability of a big hit in normal time is 1/311 (≒ 211/65536). As described above, the range of the big hit value is determined such that the larger the setting value is, the higher the big hit probability is.

  For the high probability time, the big hit value is “0 to 615” at the set value “1”, and the big hit probability is 1/10. For the set values “2” to “6”, the big hit value is “0 to 618”, “0 to 621”, “0 to 624”, “0 to 627”, “0 to 630” in order. The approximate jackpot probability is, in order, “1/106”, “1/105”, “1/105”, “1/104”, “1/104”.

  Here, the reason that the general jackpot probability includes the same value such as "1/105" or "1/104" is because the number of decimal points is rounded to indicate the jackpot probability. In the present embodiment, the range of the big hit value is determined so that the big hit probability becomes higher as the numerical value of the set value becomes larger. Further, the multiplying factor of the probability of the low probability time and that of the high probability time is “3 times” in all set values and is common.

  As for the small hit, the random number range is “64876 to 65535” regardless of the set value in both the normal time and the high probability. Therefore, regardless of the probability state or the set value, the occurrence probability of the small hit is 1/99 in all cases. Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 12, the design values of the payout rate are 97%, 98%, 99%, 100%, 101%, and 102% for the set values “1” to “6”, respectively.

  In the examples of FIG. 9A and FIG. 12, “0” which is the minimum value of the numerical range is used as the big hit value, but not limited to this, “0” may be excluded from the big hit value. By doing this, for example, it is possible to prevent the injustice provided in the case where an injustice is made such that the involuntary random number value to be updated, for example, due to the reset of the power supply is intentionally minimized. Furthermore, it is possible not to assign "0" to a small hit, and not to assign a maximum value (here, "65535") to a big hit or a small hit.

In the present embodiment, preliminary determination (so-called pre-reading) is performed on the result of the lottery that is performed using the random number shown in FIG. 9 (a) and FIG. It mentions later based on (a) and (b).
<< Various lottery functions pertaining to ordinary symbols >>

  Subsequently, the above-mentioned common drawing lottery means 113 will be described. The common drawing lottery means 113 includes a common drawing lottery value acquiring means 129, a common drawing equivalence determination means 130, a common drawing symbol determining means 131, and a common drawing pattern determining means 132. Then, when the passage judgment of the game ball in the operation opening 68 is detected by the above-mentioned ball entry judgment means 110, the common drawing lottery means 113 executes a drawing (common drawing lottery) relating to a normal symbol based on the detection result. Do.

  In this common drawing lottery, the common drawing lottery value acquiring means 129 acquires a common drawing lottery value which is a random number (general drawing symbol random number) related to the ordinary symbol, and the common drawing symbol determining means 131 Referenced. In this common drawing determination table, the correspondence between the common drawing lottery value and the type of the normal symbol is defined. Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol linked to the common drawing lottery value is the one corresponding to the hit by the common drawing hit / nonconforming judging means 130, and if it corresponds to the hit, the kind of the hit is judged. Be done.

  In addition, a common drawing pattern lottery value is acquired triggered by entering the ball into the operation opening 68, and the common drawing pattern determination means 132 uses the acquired common drawing pattern lottery value to change the fluctuation pattern (general drawing fluctuation pattern according to the ordinary symbol) ) Is determined. Each common drawing fluctuation pattern corresponds to a common drawing pattern lottery value which is a random number (common drawing fluctuation pattern random number) according to the common drawing fluctuation pattern, and is linked to the acquired common drawing pattern lottery value, and the game situation It is decided that the common drawing fluctuation pattern according to is decided.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the common drawing lottery value which is a random number related to a normal symbol and the common drawing pattern lottery value are created using only software random numbers.
<< Functions related to holding special symbols >>

  Subsequently, the above-mentioned hold control means 114 will be described. The hold control means 114 has a first hold means 133, a second hold means 134, and a common view hold means 135. Among these, when there is a new entry to the first starting winning opening 62, the first holding means 133 is acquired by entering the ball if the predetermined change start condition relating to the first special symbol is not satisfied. The information (first special map hold storage information) relating to various random numbers (first success or failure lottery value, first symbol lottery value, etc.) is temporarily held and stored. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the suspension relating to the first special symbol is set to four, and within the range not exceeding the upper limit value, the suspension relating to the first special symbol is possible.

  The variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol executed when there is the above-mentioned ball entry is finished, and furthermore, the first special symbol or the second special symbol generated before the above-mentioned ball entry In the case where there is no suspension pertaining to the above, the variation start condition pertaining to the first special symbol is established, and a new symbol variation pertaining to the first special symbol is permitted.

  Also about the above-mentioned second stocking means 134, when there is a new entry to the second starting winning opening 63, if the predetermined fluctuation start condition concerning the second special symbol is not satisfied, it is acquired by entering the ball Information relating to various random numbers (second success or failure lottery value, second symbol lottery value, etc.) is temporarily stored on hold.

  When the variation display of the second special symbol which has been executed when there is the above-mentioned ball entry is finished, the variation start condition concerning the second special symbol is satisfied, and the new symbol variation concerning the second special symbol Will be permitted. In addition, in the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the hold related to the second special symbol is set to four similarly to the first special symbol.

The first special symbol and the second special symbol described above determine the variation start condition after the special game is ended when the symbol to start the special game is stopped and the special game is controlled.
<< The function regarding the reservation of the normal pattern >>

  Subsequently, the above-mentioned common view holding means 135 will be described. The common drawing holding means 135, when entering the ball in the operation opening 68 (see FIG. 1), if the predetermined fluctuation start condition related to the normal symbol is not satisfied, the random number acquired by entering the ball (general drawing lottery The information related to the value etc. (general drawing reserve storage information) is temporarily stored on hold. And until the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol concerning the above-mentioned ball entry is not permitted. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the suspension related to the normal symbol is set to four, and within the range not exceeding the upper limit value, the suspension related to the normal symbol is possible.

The fluctuation display of the normal symbol which has been executed when there is the above-mentioned ball entry is finished, when the ordinary electric part does not operate, the fluctuation start condition which relates to the normal symbol is satisfied, the new which relates to the normal symbol Pattern variations will be permitted.
<< Function related to main control display >>

  Subsequently, the main display control unit 115 described above will be described. The main display control means 115 includes a first special view control means 136, a second special view control means 137, a common view control means 138, a hold display control means 139, and other display control means 140. Among them, the first special view control means 136 changes the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 70 (see FIG. 7) according to the change pattern of the first special symbol determined by the first lottery means 111. Display (for example, blinking display that blinks a predetermined part of LED indicator lights every 100 msec) is performed. The first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the determined symbol in the first special symbol display unit 70 when the variation time determined by the variation pattern has elapsed.

  Furthermore, if the variation start condition relating to the second special symbol mentioned above is satisfied, the second special figure control means 137 follows the variation pattern determined by the second lottery means 112, the second special symbol display portion 71 ( The second special symbol is variably displayed in FIG. 7). Then, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed by the determined symbol in the second special symbol display unit 71 when the variation time determined by the variation pattern has elapsed.

  Further, the common drawing control means 138 follows the changing pattern of the normal symbol determined by the common drawing lottery means 113 if the fluctuation start condition relating to the above-mentioned normal symbol is satisfied, the normal symbol display portion 59 (see FIG. 7) ), The variation display of the normal symbol is performed. Furthermore, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed with the determined symbol in the normal symbol display section 59 when the variation time determined by the variation pattern has elapsed.

Furthermore, the suspension display control means 139 displays the above-mentioned first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the number of reservations related to the ordinary symbol. Then, the display of the number of reservations is performed by the first special symbol memory display unit 83, the second special symbol memory display unit 84, and the ordinary symbol memory display unit 85 of the main control display device 53 shown in FIG. It will be. Further, the above-mentioned other display control means 140 controls the display on the main control display device 53 other than the above-mentioned first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol, and various hold display.
<< Features related to special games >>

Next, the above-mentioned special game control means 116 will be described. The special game control means 116 determines that the special game operation condition is established when the special symbol is stopped in a predetermined big hit mode when hitting the big hit, and the predetermined game according to the type of the big hit as described above. A special game is executed in which the game is opened in a mode (a predetermined number of unit games or an opening pattern of a big winning opening in a unit game).
<< Features related to specific games >>

  Subsequently, the above-mentioned specific game control means 117 will be described. The specific game control means 117 performs control relating to the above-mentioned probability change, time reduction, and the like. The specific game control means 117 shifts the gaming state after the end of the special game to a probability changing state, a time saving state or the like according to the type of the big hit. The definite change condition is attached to some types of jackpots, not all types of jackpots. Furthermore, for some jackpots, the definite change state continues until the next big hit, and for the other big hits with positive change, it is continued until the total number of display changes after the special game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times) . During the definite change state, the winning probability of the big hit by the first lottery means 111 and the second lottery means 112 is maintained at a value higher than that of the normal time which is the non-deterministic change time.

  In addition, the time saving state is continued until the sum of the variable display counts of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined termination condition count (for example, 100 times) counting from the end of the special game. Furthermore, the first pattern determination means 124 and the second pattern determination means 128 have a variation pattern for time reduction so that the variation display time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is generally shorter than that in the normal state during time saving. Choose

Furthermore, as described above, the ball entry facilitation game is executed according to when the time saving is executed as the specific game, and the operation of the ordinary electric role becomes easy, and is disposed at the entrance of the second start winning opening Opening and closing blades are easy to open. The opening and closing control of the opening and closing blade is controlled by an opening and closing control unit 118 described later.
<< Function related to opening / closing control >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned opening / closing control means 118 will be described. The opening / closing control means 118 controls the opening / closing operation of the ordinary electric winning combination (opening / closing blade) of the second start winning opening 63 and the special winning opening device 90. When the normal symbol is stopped in a specific manner, the opening / closing control means 118 sends an opening instruction to the normal motorized combination solenoid 76 to open the normally arranged electric combination of the second start winning opening 63. Further, in the special game, the opening / closing control means 118 performs control for sending an opening instruction to the big winning opening (opening) solenoid 80, and opens the big winning opening device 90.
<< Function about prior information notification >>

  Then, the above-mentioned prior information notification means 119 is demonstrated. The prior information notification means 119 is acquired regardless of whether or not the symbol variation display corresponding to the entering ball is suspended when the first starting winning opening 62 or the second starting winning opening 63 has entered the ball. A process for transmitting information related to various random number values to the sub substrate (herein, the sub main substrate 301) as prior notification information is performed.

  As the above-mentioned prior notification information, the above-mentioned each winning lottery value (the first winning lottery value or the second winning lottery value), each symbol lottery value (the first symbol lottery value or the second symbol lottery value), each pattern It is possible to illustrate information such as what win / fail range, symbol range, and pattern range the lottery value (first pattern lottery value or second pattern lottery value) belongs to.

Note that transmission of such advance notification information enables various pre-reading effects on the side of the sub substrate 104. And, as the pre-reading effect, it is possible to illustrate pending announcement and consecutive announcement etc, but these details it mentions later.
<< Function related to command transmission >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned main command transmission means 120 will be described. The main command transmission unit 120 transmits a command (main command) from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301. Command transmission from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301 is performed including various information at various timings such as start winning, special symbol variation start, special symbol variation stop, big hit occurrence, etc. .
<Basic function of sub board>

  Next, basic functions of the sub substrate 104 described above will be described. In the present embodiment, the sub substrate 104 is composed of the sub main substrate 301 and the sub sub substrate 302, and performs various functions such as command reception from the main substrate 102, determination of a presentation pattern, presentation control, presentation execution, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the sub main board 301 has main command receiving means 141, effect pattern determining means 142, sub main command transmitting means 143 and the like. Further, the sub main board 301 is provided with functional means such as a sound control means 144 for controlling a speaker output and the like, and a light control means 145 for controlling a game effect lamp output and the like.

  The effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determining means 142 includes information to specify the display effect displayed on the effect display device 60 and the sound effect and the light effect to be performed together with the display effect as required, During the variable display of the pattern 190, an effect is suggested that indicates the level of the expectation of the big hit. Here, the "expected degree" in the present embodiment can be paraphrased as "reliable degree". As for “expected degree” below, those describing the stage (normal pattern, chance-up pattern, finalized pattern) to enhance the sense of becoming a big hit due to fluctuation when appearing among the patterns of the same type of advance presentation, or 1 production The probability of the hit fluctuation pattern being included in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the effect of 1 when confirmed with the hit fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern in hit fluctuation) information and out-of-out fluctuation pattern information (fluctuation pattern in out-shift fluctuation) generating There is a case where it may be used for each description of what is stated, and generally, "representation with high degree of expectation" refers to the rendition which often makes a big hit when the rendition concerned occurs.

  When the effect pattern is determined by the effect pattern determining means 142, effect pattern information indicating the determined effect pattern is transmitted to the sub sub board 302 as a sub main command via the sub main command transmitting means 143. Further, the command transmitted from the sub main substrate 301 to the sub sub substrate 302 also includes sound information and the like in order to read out sound data, lamp data and the like from the ROM of the sub sub substrate.

As shown in FIG. 6, the sub main board 302 is provided with sub main command reception means 146, effect execution control means 147, and the like. Then, in the sub-sub substrate 302, based on the sub main command from the sub main substrate 301, the effect execution control means 147 sequentially outputs necessary image data to the liquid crystal unit 42 (see FIG. 4) to construct an animation image. The effect display device 60 displays a moving image for effect.
<Specific example of a specific game>

Next, the specific aspect of the specific game mentioned above is demonstrated. As described above, as a special game, the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol (probable variation), the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol (time reduction), and the ball entry facilitation game (the probability fluctuation function of the ordinary symbol, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is shortened Function, a combination of the open extension function of the ordinary motorized part) is provided. And, at least one of these various specific games is executed according to the result of the big hit lottery (the stop display symbol of the special symbol) and the game result during the big hit. In the present embodiment, not a so-called ST machine described above, but a specification in which a definite variation period lasts until the next big hit is adopted in part of the big hit, but a specific aspect will be described later.
<< probability fluctuation game >>

  The above-mentioned definite change is to change the probability state of the game relating to the special symbol after the big hit so that the occurrence probability of the big hit becomes higher than the normal probability state. In the pachinko gaming machine adopting the ST, the duration (the probability variation period) of the definite variation state is determined based on the number of times of variation of the special symbol.

The number of times of variation of the special symbol is determined as one from the variation display of the special symbol to the stop indication. And, in the fixed variation period in ST, the total number of fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the end of the special game is set to a predetermined number (for example, 100 times). A function that allows the definite variation period to end before the occurrence of the next big hit can be referred to as ST, count variation, or the like.
<< fluctuation time shortening game >>

  The above-described time reduction substantially shortens the variation time of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) in the main control display device 53 described above, as compared to the normal game. Here, "generally shorten" is not always shorter than the normal game in all cases, and in some cases, when the variation time of the special symbol is equal to the normal game or longer than the normal game Is meant to be included. And, according to this time, since the variation time of the special symbol becomes short, even if the winning of the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening 62 and the second starting winning opening 63) occurs continuously, it is special It is possible to smoothly advance the variable display and the stop display of the symbol at short intervals, and it is possible to secure many opportunities for a big hit lottery.

  Furthermore, the duration (short period) of the time saving state is determined based on the number of times the special symbol changes as well as the probability changing state. And in this embodiment, the time saving state is continued until the total number of times of fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the end of the special game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times).

  In the example described above, the definite variation period and the short duration are set to the same period, but the positive variation period and the short duration may be different from each other. For example, it is possible to set the definite variation period to 104 times and set the short time period to 100 times. Also, the definite variation period and the short time period are not limited to being constant. For example, the probability variation period can be set to any of four times, 25 times, 100 times, etc., depending on the type of the big hit that occurred. Also, depending on the type of jackpot that occurred, it is possible to set the time period to any of 25 times, 50 times, 75 times, 100 times, etc.

  In addition, it is possible to have a so-called fall lottery function. As this fall lottery, the following can be illustrated. For example, after a definite change or time reduction reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) smaller than the above-mentioned maximum number of changes (100 times in this case), for each change of special symbol every time until the maximum number of changes is reached A lottery (specific game end lottery) whether or not to end the definite change or the time reduction is executed. When the player wins this specific game end lottery, the definite change and the time reduction are ended, and the gaming state from the next change returns to the normal state not accompanied by the definite change or the time reduction.

Furthermore, it is possible to execute only one or the other in the specific game as well as performing both the definite variation and the time reduction. For example, depending on the type of jackpot hit, it is possible to give only a short time and not give a definite change, or to give only a positive change without giving a short time.
<< Ease of entry game

  Then, the above-mentioned ball entry facilitation game is demonstrated. This ball entry facilitation game is a gaming state in which the function related to the ordinary electric role is set to the player in an advantageous manner, and the opening mode of the second start winning opening 63 can be more easily accepted than the game ball. is there. When the ball entry facilitation game is executed, the second time by the control pattern such as the time variation relating to the normal symbol, the probability fluctuation relating to the normal symbol, the opening extension relating to the ordinary electric role, or the combination of these control modes. The ease of entering the start winning hole 63 is enhanced, and the easy entry state is formed. In relation to this "entering easy game" and the aforementioned "base", "power support", etc., "high base", "high base state", "low base", "low base state", " Terms such as "non-electric support" are used. In the following, the "low base state" corresponds to the "non-power support state", and the "high base state" corresponds to the "power support state".

  Of the various control modes described above for the normal symbol, the time symbol pertaining to the normal symbol is a control aspect in which the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability variation pertaining to the normal symbol is the winning probability of the normal symbol Is a control mode (probable variation related to a normal design) that improves Furthermore, in the control mode, the opening extension pertaining to the normal motorized combination is such that the opening time of the second start winning opening 63 is opened longer (long opening) than the opening (short opening) at normal times (during non-specified game). is there.

  As described above, the entry facilitation game during the specific game is entered into the second start winning opening 63 using the three functions of time reduction of the regular symbol, probability fluctuation of the open lottery, and opening extension of the ordinary electric character. Increase the ease of the ball. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one or two of these three functions may be used to enhance the ease of entering the second start winning opening 63. Further, the configuration may be such that switching between a period for performing at least one of the three functions and a period for not performing the function is performed according to the gaming state.

The duration of such an entry facilitation game can be determined based on the short time associated with the special symbol. For example, it is possible to adopt a control mode in which the ease of entering the game is continued during the short time according to the special symbol, and the ease of entering the game is ended when the time reduction according to the special symbol is finished. And in this case, the variation pattern of the normal symbol (common figure variation pattern) where the symbol variation is started after the time saving of the special symbol is finished is provided for the normal time (during non-specified game) It is possible to determine from among the variation patterns.
<Major effects in pachinko machines>
<< Basic display form of production design >>

  Next, the main effects of various effects performed by the sub main substrate 301 and the sub sub substrate 302 based on a command from the main substrate 102 to the sub main substrate 301 will be described. And here, first, the basic display mode of the above-mentioned effect pattern 190 (refer to Drawing 8 (a) and (b)) is explained.

  The effect pattern 190 is variably displayed on the effect display device 60 as the special symbol is variably displayed on the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 8A). Furthermore, in response to the special symbol being stopped and displayed on the main control display device 53, the effect pattern 190 is displayed on the effect display device 60 in a stopped state (see FIG. 8B).

  The stop symbol displayed along with the stop of the effect pattern 190 is configured by a combination of three symbols of the left effect pattern 190a, the middle effect pattern 190b, and the right effect pattern 190c. And, when the result of the big hit drawing in the main baseplate 102 becomes the big hit, for example “the combination of the even pattern where 3 symbols are equal, such as“ 777 ”and“ 555 ”, as a stop symbol representing the big hit Is displayed. Also, if the result of the big hit lottery is a loss, for example "767", "928", "331" etc., one part or all of the rendering symbols are in different combinations from other rendering symbols, effects The symbol 190 is stopped and displayed.

  Here, "stop symbol" or "stop of symbol" in the present embodiment means that the three effect symbols 190 are "fixed stop". That is, even if the three effect designs 190a to 190c are displayed in the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 while keeping the combination of, for example, "767" or "928", they are only "confirmed stop". It does not correspond to what was done. Then, it is possible to call a state in which the effect design 190 has not reached the "fixed stop" while keeping the combination in this way as the "temporary stop" state.

  As a display mode of such "temporary stop", for example, a state in which the effect pattern 190 vibrates (shakes) little by little can be illustrated. And it is possible to call the mode of "temporary fluctuation etc." etc. the mode of temporary stop which is swaying little by little with the production | presentation pattern 190 maintaining a combination. As a swing mode of the effect pattern 190 in this "temporary stop", vertical or horizontal linear movement, horizontal rotational movement, etc. can be exemplified, and a movement range of about several millimeters can be exemplified.

  Moreover, as a display mode of the above-mentioned "decision stop", the state which stopped all the production | presentation patterns 190a-190c maintaining the combination can be illustrated through the state of temporary stop. Furthermore, at the time of the “determination stop”, it is possible to perform an effect indicating that the determination stop has been performed. And as an effect indicating that the finalized display is performed, the state of the finalized stop is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, about 1 second), or the special effect is added to each of the finalized design symbols 190a to 190c. Can be illustrated (design effect), and the LED (lamp) provided on the center decoration 64 can be illuminated.

  Here, as a symbol effect, the effect points 190a to 190c are flashed only momentarily (for example, about 0.5 seconds), or the bright spots are circulated one or more times around each effect pattern 190a to 190c. It is possible to adopt various modes such as enlarging or reducing the symbols 190a to 190c, moving the rendering symbols 190a to 190c by several millimeters, and returning them to their original positions.

  Moreover, in the display mode of above-mentioned "reach", the production | presentation design which kept the combination of reach may be displayed in the mode of above-mentioned "temporary stop." Then, after the reach display by this “temporary stop”, the symbol (in this case, the middle effect pattern 190b) that has been variably displayed forms a combination of disjoints (a combination of distracted reach) and “temporarily stops” and combines the combinations It is possible to illustrate an effect that "fixed stop" is performed while the variable display is ended while being maintained. In addition, from the state where 3 production design 190a-190c has done the “temporary stop” with the combination of the off reach, medium production design 190b resumes fluctuation, the one where reach production is high reliability (reliability concerning big hit) An effect (latter half reach) of developing to a relatively high degree) can also be exemplified.

  In addition, as a mode of scroll display of the production | presentation pattern 190, it is not limited to the above-mentioned vertical scroll, It is possible to employ | adopt various display modes. Then, as another display mode, for example, the horizontal scroll mode in the horizontal direction (right to left etc.) or the rotation of the left effect pattern 190a to the right effect pattern 190c individually around the vertical axis (rotation) It is possible to illustrate a rotation mode in which variable display is performed. Also, for example, while the left effect pattern 190a to the right effect pattern 190c are enlarged along the straight track or the curved (turning) track from the rear to the front, that is, from the back of the screen to the front in the display area 194. It is also possible to illustrate a display mode in which the sheets are sequentially fed out. Furthermore, it is also possible to adopt a scroll display mode in which the effect pattern going from the rear to the front comes down from the top to the front.

  Further, the mode of scrolling is not limited to adopting any one of the various modes as described above, and for example, when a predetermined effect is executed, the predetermined scroll mode is switched to another scroll mode Things are also possible. In addition, it is also possible to make the scroll mode different for each of the effect modes in a plurality of effect modes.

  Moreover, in FIG. 8 (a), (b), the display mode by which the combination of the production | presentation pattern 190 is stopped and displayed only in the middle of the up-down direction of the display area 194 is illustrated, and an effective line is a horizontal direction. It is only one line. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of effective lines may be two lines or five lines.

Furthermore, in FIG. 8B, the left effect pattern 190a to the right effect pattern 190c are shown in simplified form only by the numerals of a predetermined character, but the effect pattern 190 is illustrated in FIG. 33B. In combination with a part that means a predetermined symbol such as a number (an element symbol that is the aforementioned symbol element effect pattern) and a part that consists of a pattern that represents other than the predetermined symbol (an element symbol that is a non-symbol element effect symbol) It is possible to constitute by And as a part which consists of a pattern showing other than a predetermined symbol, various design drawings, person's drawings, and these combination etc. can be illustrated, and furthermore, various design drawings and person's drawings combined with a symbol, animation It is also possible. In the example of FIG. 33 (b), a heart pattern is employed as a pattern representing something other than a predetermined symbol.
<< Example of production pattern >>

  Subsequently, the above-described effect pattern will be described. A large number of effect patterns are provided in a state associated with the fluctuation pattern determined by the main substrate 102. Furthermore, in the effect pattern, an aspect of the effect including the effect pattern 190 is defined. More specifically, in the effect pattern, an effect process such as a change process from the start of fluctuation to the stop of fluctuation for the selected effect pattern 190, a background to be displayed in combination with the effect pattern 190, and story development is defined. There is. And, as the rendering pattern, there are those corresponding to the above-mentioned "with reach" and "without reach".

  Among these, when the effect pattern of “with reach” is executed, reach effect of becoming a big hit is performed in the effect display device 60 if one more effect pattern (here, the inside effect pattern 190b) is aligned. Then, when the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a big hit, the display of the odd-numbered “777” or “333” according to the type of the big hit is performed by the effect pattern 190 which has been decidedly stopped. In addition, when the result of the acceptance lottery concerning the special symbol is a loss, for example, a combination indicating a loss such as “767” or “515” is performed by the effect symbol 190 which has been fixedly stopped.

  Furthermore, when the effect pattern of "no reach" is executed, a combination of no reach where the left effect design 190a and the right effect design 190c do not become a reach combination, such as "928" or "331", for example, It is performed by the effect pattern 190 which has been fixedly stopped.

Some of these presentation patterns have long and short variation times, and in particular, the "reach" variation patterns include variations that last for several minutes. In the present embodiment, “no reach (about 3 seconds to 10 seconds)” and “normal reach (10 seconds to 20 seconds) in the fluctuation pattern (see FIGS. 11A to 11C) related to the special symbol described above. "No reach" production pattern, normal reach production pattern, super reach production pattern corresponding to "degree", "super reach (reach with big hit reliability) (about 30 seconds to 2 minutes)" are provided. Then, with these effect patterns, for example, a plurality of effect patterns are associated with one variation pattern, and the number of effect patterns is more diverse than the above-described variation patterns. Furthermore, "super reach" can be paraphrased as "SP (special) reach".
<< Hold effect display concerning special symbol >>

  Next, the on-hold display (on-hold effect display) according to the special symbol performed in the effect display device 60 will be described. In the lower part of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, as shown in FIGS. 8 (a) and 8 (b), there is shown a first number-of-helds display portion 196 which indicates the number of pending lottery values for the first game. A second number-of-holds display portion 197 indicating the number of pending lottery values in the 2 games is displayed. Here, in order to simplify the description and the illustration, each holding display is represented by a perfect circle, but the holding display may be performed by a combination of other shapes and colors, a character image, an animation, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, when the hold related to the first game occurs, a predetermined hold display is performed on the above-described first number-of-holds display portion 196. Furthermore, as the number of pending increases, a pending indication is added. Then, when the number of pending has reached the upper limit, as shown in FIG. 8A, the first pending number display unit 196 performs four pending displays.

  Further, the hold display in the first hold number display unit 196 can be performed from the first display position to the fourth display position. That is, the first hold number display unit 196 includes the first display position to the fourth display position, and the portion on the right end of the first hold number display unit 196 viewed from the player is the first display position. It has become. Then, a second display position, a third display position, and a fourth display position are provided in order toward the left end. Furthermore, in the following, the suspension display performed from the first display position to the fourth display position will be referred to as “storage 1”, “storage 2”, “storage 3”, and “storage 4”, respectively.

  For example, in the effect display device 60, a hold occurs while the effect pattern 190 relating to the first game is being performed, and a single hold display is not performed on the first hold number display unit 196. Then, the hold display is performed at the first display position at the right end (the position of the above-described "storage 1"). At this time, it is assumed that no other hold display has been performed yet, and "G2" to "G4" have not occurred. As described above, in the situation where "retention 1" is generated, if a further requisition is generated, the display relating to the generated requisition is performed at the position of "retention 2" on the left of "retention 1". Then, when "Hold 1" and "Hold 2" are displayed, and "Hold 3" and "Gold 4" are not displayed, if hold is further generated, "Hold 3" is displayed according to the number of held hold. And "G4" is displayed.

  Then, if the variable display being executed when "GREEN 1" occurs is ended, and other fluctuation start conditions related to the first game are also established, the pending storage information related to the above "GREEN 1" At the stage of being digested, the hold display of “storage 1” moves to the right of the first number-of-holds display portion 196. The fluctuation information display unit 195 is provided at the right side of the first hold count display unit 196. The variation information display unit 195 is an area for displaying information (the variation information) related to the variation display being executed at that time. That is, when the variable display according to the corresponding storage information is executed, the suspension display of “storage 1” moves to the fluctuation information display unit 195 and changes to the fluctuation information display 198.

  Here, when moving the hold display of “GREEN 1” to the fluctuation information display unit 195, display elements such as the size, color, and form of the item may be changed. In the example of FIGS. 8A and 8B, the size is expanded when changing the hold display of “1” to the fluctuation information display 198.

  As described above, when the pending display that has been in the "storage 1" moves to the fluctuation information display unit 195, the standby order of the subsequent suspension display is carried forward, and the "storage 2" shifts to the position of the "storage 1". Furthermore, when "G3" or "G4" exists, "G3" shifts to the position of "G2" and "G4" shifts to the position of "G3". Then, when a hold occurs further in such a situation, a "hold 4" is newly generated, and the number of holds reaches the upper limit. In addition, if a new hold does not occur, the shift of the hold display is performed with the start of the next variable display, and the waiting order of each hold is advanced.

  In addition, it is possible to be regarded as hold effect in a broad sense, including the state in which the fluctuation information display 198 in the fluctuation information display unit 195 has been changed from the hold display in “G1” to “G4”. The present invention is not limited to this, and it is treated as holding display until "Hold 1" to "Hold 4" is held, and does not include the state changed to the fluctuation information display 198 in the fluctuation information display unit 195 in the holding display. It is also possible.

  In addition, when the variable display concerning production design 190 is not done, when the number of reservations is 0, there is a ball entry in the 1st starting winning a prize opening 62, “ho 1” indication is not done (or it displays for a moment) And the fluctuation information display 198 is directly performed on the fluctuation information display unit 195. Then, only in such a case, it is possible to handle such that the fluctuation information display 198 in the fluctuation information display unit 195 is not included in the hold display.

  Subsequently, although the above-described second hold count display unit 197 will be described, the description of the same points as the first hold count display unit 196 will be omitted. In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the second hold count display unit 197 is opposite to the first hold count display unit 196 with the variation information display unit 195 described above (on the right side as viewed from the player) ) Are arranged in such a way that the relationship between “1” and “2” is symmetrical with a color different from that of the first reserved image.

  Moreover, about a pending | holding display, it is possible to perform in the aspect according to various game states. For example, when the probability of a big hit lottery is a normal probability and a high probability, etc., it can be exemplified to make the modes of holding display different from each other when being controlled to different effect modes.

Furthermore, the positional relationship between the first number-of-holds display portion 196, the second number-of-holds display portion 197, and the fluctuation information display portion 195 is not limited to that described above, and the second game is performed as in the present embodiment. (1) The pachinko game machine of the type that performs the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the effect pattern 190 in the order of occurrence of the start winnings pertaining to the first game and the second game instead of executing in priority to the game Eight hold displays may be arranged on the left side of 195.
<< Pending look-ahead effect pertaining to special symbol >>

  Next, the reservation pre-reading effect which is one of the notice effects (pre-reading effect) concerning the special symbol is explained. The pending look-ahead effect is an effect to be executed based on the above-described pending storage information (first special view pending storage information or second pending storage information). In addition, with the prefetching presentation effect, the reach or big hit occurs to the pending for which the digestion is performed later than the effect being performed using the effect pattern 190 etc. at that time using the function of the above-mentioned prior information notification It is performed as an effect that suggests the expectation of doing.

  For example, the pending display occurring at the position of “Holding 3” in the first pending number display unit 196 described above is different from the basic display mode in which no pending change is made (for example, blue), and green pending display By performing the above, it is shown that the degree of expectation such as the occurrence of reach is high as compared with the case of the normal blue aspect. And in addition to blue and green coloring, display modes such as yellow, red, gold, iridescent, predetermined pattern etc. are provided, and the expectation of big hit in the order of yellow, red, gold, iridescent, predetermined pattern than green The effect is shown to indicate that the degree is high.

  Here, as a display mode of the above-mentioned "predetermined pattern", an animal pattern such as a giraffe, a display mode including a predetermined character image, and the like can be illustrated. Moreover, it is also possible to adopt not only the coloring and the pattern of the reserved display but also an item other than a perfect circle shape, a person image and the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform pre-reading effect by combining the above-mentioned various display modes with blinking or light emission. Moreover, it is possible to refer to, for example, “trigger hold” or the like for which hold on to pre-reading effect including pre-reading effect is held.

  The prefetching effect relating to the suspension as described above may be performed also in the second game. In addition to the basic color (orange), it is possible for the second game to have display modes such as red, gold, iridescent and predetermined patterns. In addition, it is also possible to adopt an item other than a true circular shape, a person image or the like as the hold display relating to the second game.

  Furthermore, the preread effect using the hold display in the first game and the second game as described above can be called "hold change" or the like. And such "hold change" indicates a display mode different from the basic display mode as described above from the beginning of the hold occurrence, or indicates a change of the display mode at the timing after the hold occurrence. is there.

  Among these, for example, a change occurs in the display mode at the timing after the occurrence of a hold, for example, a hold is generated and a hold display is started, the reservation of the hold progresses, and the hold display is, for example, “hold 2”, An example can be illustrated in which the pending display changes while advancing to "reserve 1". Then, for example, when the hold occurs, the hold display is performed in blue (in the case of the second game, orange) at the position of “Hare 3”, and when moving to the position of “Hare 1”, another color such as green Change, etc. is done.

  In addition, in any of the first game and the second game, when it becomes the fluctuation information display 198, from the basic color, the display mode such as red, gold, rainbow colors, a predetermined pattern, or true from the basic color, or true It may change to a display mode such as an item other than a circular shape or a person image, and may represent the expectation of the big hit.

  Furthermore, the following can be illustrated as a control aspect concerning the above-mentioned pending change. For example, when holding occurs, a lottery (holding change pattern lottery) is performed to determine an effect pattern (pending change pattern) of the holding change. The hold change pattern table is used for the hold change pattern lottery, and in the hold change pattern table, the presence / absence of the hold change, and when performing the hold change (in the case of the hold change), what kind of timing The matters relating to the determination of the rendering pattern, such as what display mode is to be executed, are defined. Also, as the hold change pattern, one for the first game and one for the second game are defined.

  Moreover, it is possible to cancel one of the pending look-ahead presentation effects when there are a plurality of the pending changes for the pending change from "Hai 1" to "Hai 4". More specifically, for example, when "Hot 4" occurs, the hold related to "Hot 4" corresponds to the hold change pattern changing to green, and any hold occurring first occurs, In the case of the pending change pattern changing to rainbow color, the pending change related to the above-mentioned “save 4” can be exemplified by canceling the pending change and not executing it.

Furthermore, for example, when "HARE 4" occurs as in the above-mentioned example, the hold related to "HARE 4" matches the hold change pattern that changes to the rainbow color, and all the hold that has previously occurred. However, if the rainbow color does not change and only the green changes to a pending change, the pending change occurring earlier may be canceled and not executed. In addition, when performing holding | maintenance change, it is also possible to perform the production | presentation (it may also be called "holding | holding change suggestion production | presentation") which suggests that holding | maintenance change is performed, and this point is mentioned later separately.
<< Continuous notice pertaining to special symbols >>

  Next, as another pre-reading effect pattern, continuous notice (continuous effect) relating to a special symbol will be described. This continuous notice includes genuine ones and fake ones. Of these, genuine continuous notices mean ones that provide continuous notice effects over a plurality of variable displays relating to special symbols. ing. In addition, the pseudo continuous notice means that an intermittent notice effect (pseudo continuous notice) is performed such that there is a change of a special symbol a plurality of times with respect to one time variable display relating to the special symbol.

  As the above-mentioned "continuous notice", for example, a character who becomes a main character in a story on presentation moves to a different room sequentially aiming at a room as an ultimate reaching purpose for each change of one time concerning a special symbol Can be exemplified. In addition, as "continuous advance notice" of other modes, the character who becomes the main character is to fight against a different enemy and win for each change of one time concerning the special symbol, and aim at the final target enemy Can also be illustrated.

  Furthermore, it is possible to carry out the above-mentioned genuine continuous notice (which may be referred to simply as "continuous notice" hereinafter) based on the advance notification information transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301. More specifically, for example, based on the prior notification information received when the hold of "Hear 3" occurs, sub main board 301, as the effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display which relates to the special symbol after that and subsequent It is possible to select one having contents including continuous notices over three variable displays.

  Then, when one hold is digested and the hold of the above-mentioned "G3" is shifted to the position of "G2", the first of the effect patterns relating to the selected consecutive notices. An effect pattern relating to the advance notice is executed. Furthermore, when the suspension is sequentially digested, and the suspension display moves from “G2” to “G1”, the second notice of three times is executed, and the fluctuation information is displayed from “G1”. When moving to the unit 195, the final third notice is executed.

  It should be noted that in the sub main board 301, the fluctuation pattern according to the fluctuation display being executed at the time when the above-mentioned "retention of 3" occurs, or "previous 2" or "retention 1" that has occurred before that. It is also possible to confirm such pending storage information. That is, when the above-mentioned "G3" suspension occurs, information indicating that a predetermined reach effect with high jackpot reliability is to be executed, or a jackpot occurs among various information already stored. If there is information representing “to do”, it is possible to cancel the effect pattern relating to the continuous advance notice selected when the “Hot 3” hold occurs. In addition, depending on the expectation of the retention for "G3", it does not give a continuous announcement immediately from the next fluctuation, but waits for one fluctuation, "G1" fluctuation and pre-readout mode 2 There may be a case where continuous announcements are made across changes.

  In addition, as the above-mentioned pseudo continuous notice (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "pseudo continuous notice"), reach display is intermittently performed a plurality of times in the effect pattern according to one time variable display of a special symbol. It is possible to illustrate such a thing, a thing that a character repeats a plurality of actions, and a thing that repeats temporary stop and re-variation of the effect pattern 190, and the like.

The contents of the continuous notice as described above are merely examples, and various contents other than those described can be adopted as the contents of the continuous notice.
<< Demonstrate pattern pertaining to ordinary pattern >>

  Next, the effects relating to the above-mentioned normal symbol will be described. In the present embodiment, the effect display related to the normal symbol is not performed. However, it is possible to perform the effect relating to the normal symbol as a part of the effect in the effect display device 60. And when performing the effect display of a normal symbol in this way, it is possible to perform the display of the grade which can distinguish a kind of a hit and a hit, for example as an effect pattern.

  Further, as described above, when the effect display device 60 is configured by a combination of a plurality of display bodies, the effect display device 60 is provided with a relatively large display body and small display bodies (or a plurality of display bodies) compared thereto. It is possible. Then, a large display body can be referred to as, for example, a "main display body" or a "main liquid crystal", and a small display body can be referred to as, for example, a "sub display body" or a "sub liquid crystal". Furthermore, when the relatively small display body as described above is provided, the effect pattern (199) according to the normal pattern may be displayed on the small display body, for example. In addition, for example, an LED indicator light may be provided as a set of two at a predetermined portion of the center decoration 64 described above, and this may be used as a effect display device related to a normal symbol.

In addition, when performing the effect using the effect pattern according to the normal symbol, it is possible to perform the on-hold effect display according to the normal symbol as a part of the effect in the effect display device 60. Further, as described above, when the effect display device 60 is configured by a plurality of display bodies such as a large display body and a small display body, for example, a small display for effect hold display relating to a normal symbol It may be displayed on the body. In addition, for example, an LED indicator light in which two are set as one set is provided at a predetermined part of the above-mentioned center decoration 64, thereby performing effect display of the number of reservations pertaining to the normal symbols from "1" to "4" It is also good.
<< Production pertaining to limited frequency pattern >>

  Next, effects relating to the limited frequency pattern (hereinafter referred to as “limited frequency pattern effects”) will be described. The limited frequency pattern effect is provided as part of the effect pattern described above. Further, the limited frequency pattern effect is an effect set so as to easily appear in a predetermined gaming state, corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in a specific period by the pattern determining means of the main board. The content of the limited frequency pattern effect is effect content indicating a specific tendency, and as the content of the limited frequency pattern effect, for example, in a specific variation during time saving game, a predetermined variation pattern is a main substrate It can be determined, and it can be exemplified to produce a reach with high reliability as an effect.

In addition, as a game situation where a limited frequency pattern effect is likely to appear, at the time of game start, immediately after a predetermined effect pattern is executed (for example, immediately after a small hit or an out ball no hit), a predetermined effect mode (probable variation, In the short time game mode), immediately after the end of the special game, etc. can be exemplified. In addition to these, as a game situation where a limited frequency pattern effect is likely to appear, the number of reservations for the first game (or the second game) has reached a predetermined number (for example, four), or the reservation is The case where it does not exist etc. can be illustrated. Furthermore, in the situation where the limited frequency pattern effect is executed, the effect pattern to be executed is performed from the limited frequency pattern defined in the limited frequency table, using the limited frequency table provided in advance according to the situation at that time. It is to be selected.
<< Direction using operation buttons >>

  Next, an effect (hereinafter referred to as “button effect”) using the above-described operation button 22 (see FIG. 1) will be described. The operation button 22 is pressed by the player when the button effect is executed, and exerts a function of giving the player the feeling that he / she is participating in the effect of the game or the winning or losing lottery. is there. As the button effect, for example, in the process of fluctuating and displaying the effect pattern 190 (see FIGS. 8A and 8B), “Push”, “Consecutively hit” in the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 with the pattern of the operation button 22 It can be exemplified to display a guide prompting operation such as characters such as “long press please” or a moving image of an indicator indicating the remaining time.

  Further, as the button effect, when the player operates the operation button 22 in accordance with the above-described guide display, an effect such that the character emits a comment or an effect such that the ally character attacks the enemy character can be exemplified. Moreover, when the operation button 22 is operated, the above-mentioned movable effect members (601 to 603 and the like) operate to notify that it is a reach. Furthermore, a button effect may be performed during reach effect, in which case, when the operation button 22 is operated, the above-mentioned movable effect members (601 to 603 etc.) operate to obtain an expectation to a big hit etc. Can also be illustrated.

  Further, with regard to the operation button 22 described above, the operation of the operation button 22 is normally invalid, but during the button effect, the button operation valid period is such that the operation of the operation button 22 is valid. The button operation effective period is a constant time set in advance.

  Note that various types of operation input devices such as the operation button 22 can be adopted in addition to the above. For example, an operation handle of a car, an operation lever of an aircraft, a model of a character related to the contents of presentation It is also possible to adopt one in which a touch sensor is added to (figure). In addition, it is also possible to use an operation button and an operation lever or the like in combination, and selectively use them according to the situation such as the contents of the effect.

Furthermore, as described above, the cross key 96 (FIG. 21) is provided in the vicinity of the operation button 22, and the operation button 22 may be used as a determination key or the like in a situation where environment setting etc. are performed. And, in the present embodiment, in the situation where the variation display of the effect pattern 190 etc. is performed by the presentation display device 60 or the situation where the variation display is not performed, the presentation operation using the operation button 22 and the cross key 96 is It may be done.
<< Direction at the time of big hit occurrence >>

  Next, the effects when a big hit occurs will be described. Effects when a big hit occurs, effects at the start of the special game (big hit start demonstration), effects during the special game (round effect), effects at the end of the last round (hit end demonstration), at the end of the special game There are production (big hit end demonstration) and the like. Here, the presentation of the above-mentioned big hit start demonstration is the production of the period where closing of the attacker (big winning opening) from the execution start of the big hit game (special game) to the start of the execution of the first round (unit game) is maintained. The presentation of the above-mentioned big hit end demonstration is a period during which closing of the attacker (big winning opening) from the end of the last round (unit game) execution to the end of the big hit game (special game) execution is maintained. It can be said that it is an effect.

  When the above-mentioned effect pattern 190 is decided and stopped, it is displayed that a big hit is to be started along with a sound such as a fanfare. As the display that this big hit is started, the display of the big hit start demonstration screen shown in FIG. 38A can be illustrated. Furthermore, it is possible to exemplify a content of performing a right-handed guidance effect as a striking instruction during a special game, and guiding the player to perform right-handling by increasing the amount of rotation of the launch handle 20. Further, as the display of the content for guiding to perform right-handling, it is possible to display a message “Turn steering wheel to the right” or the like in the right-handed guidance display area 383 of FIG.

  Here, the presentation contents at the start of the big hit may be different between the first hit (big hit on the low base) and the consecutive villa (big hit on the high base). Specifically, when the first hit is made, a display such as "big hit start!" May be displayed, and when the hit is made, a display such as "big hit continuous!" May be performed. Also, for guidance to the right, the message "Please turn the steering wheel to the right" will be displayed at the first hit, but such a message will not be displayed or it will be displayed differently on the consecutive villas (simply "right") Large characters may be displayed for a short time). As described above, the jackpot demonstration demonstration at the time of continuous shooting may be made shorter than the jackpot demonstration demonstration at the first hit, in which case it is natural that the jackpot demonstration time is greater than that at the first hit. It will be shorter at the end of a row. Similarly, the time value of the big hit end demonstration effect (big hit start demonstration time) may be made shorter at the time of consecutive connection than at the time of first hit. In addition, with regard to touch effects that can be performed during the big hit start demonstration described later, whether the contents of the effects or the execution of the effects are permitted based on the case of the first hit and the consecutive villas, or the number of consecutive villas It is also possible to associate

  As the above-mentioned special game effect, it is possible to illustrate a moving image of content that can not be viewed unless the player has won the big hit. At this time, a predetermined music is output from the aforementioned speaker 21 (see FIG. 1). Furthermore, as a moving image during a special game, for example, a predetermined character in a dramatography adopted for directing the pachinko gaming machine 10 depicts a state of fighting a rival enemy as a rival, and a state of enjoying a whistle Can be illustrated. Here, (FIG. 38 (b)) illustrates, as a moving image in a special game, a moving image in which two women fight the enemy together.

  In addition, for example, in the lower part of the screen, for example, “1R”, “2R”,..., “15R”, “1 round”, “2 round”,. It is possible to notify by display such as. Furthermore, as part of the special game, for example, it is possible to display the number of occurrences of the big hit when a big hit occurs during a specific game and the big hit is continuous.

  In the display example of FIG. 38 (b), a hold count display area 367 is displayed at the lower part of the screen to distinguish between the special views 1 and 2 and the reserve counts. Further, similarly, in the display example of FIG. 38 (b), a reduction effect symbol display area 361, a round number display area 368, and a count number display area 369 are displayed. Similarly, in the display example of FIG. 38 (b), the upper right portion of the screen displays “the first change in probability” and “the number of wins: 195”, which indicates the number of consecutive shots or the number of consecutive big hit games , The display of the winning prize ball number during consecutive villas is performed.

  Here, instead of targeting only the winning balls from the game during the round (by entering the big winning opening (90)) as the display target of the winning balls number, the same shooting position as the big winning opening (90) ( A winning ball based on entry to a general winning opening (sign omitted) arranged in the shooting direction) may also be displayed as the winning ball number. In addition, when so-called over winning (the entering number exceeding the specified count number in the first round against the big winning prize opening) which is the winning a part for excess is generated, an effect (for example, Sound output such as “Tane!”, Or “display such as“ Nice! ”In the effect display may be performed.

  Further, as effects in the special game, for example, it is possible to perform specific effects (specific effects in hitting) as shown in FIGS. 38 (c) and 39 (a) to 39 (c). In (c) of FIG. 38 and (a) to (c) of FIG. 39, specific effect screens A to D in a hit are illustrated. These hit specific effect screens A to D are displayed as a trigger for giving a change to the story development, or inserted as a branch point of effects when notification of the number of rounds or promotion effect to a definite change is performed during a big hit game It is possible to use it for such applications. In addition, the meaning and the content of the display example of FIG.38 (c) and FIG. 39 (a)-(c) are mentioned later.

  Then, as an effect after the above-mentioned special game, what relates to a result of an effect content in a special game can be illustrated. More specifically, the content etc. which a winner represents an emotion can be illustrated according to the result of the fight between characters. The effect after such a special game can also be called an ending effect.

  Furthermore, as the effect after the special game, it is possible to illustrate what additionally displays the number of consecutive times of the big hit, and what displays the number of balls awarded by the player by the special game at that time. In addition, it is also possible to additionally display the number of occurrences of the big hit when a big hit occurs during the specific game and the big hit is continuous. Further, with regard to the jackpot continuation, it is also possible to execute an effect pattern that is not selected before that when the jackpot generation number reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times).

  FIG. 37C shows a screen display example at the time of the big hit end demonstration. At the time of this big hit end demonstration, the indication of the letter and the like “the end” which shows the end of the big hit game is done. Further, a lower message display area 364 is displayed at the lower part of the screen, and a message of "Change to standby screen with touch of handle, transition to customization screen with effect button ON" is displayed. In this big hit end demonstration screen, it is also possible to display the number of winning prize balls in the big hit game or in the twin villa with that. In the example of FIG. 37C, the display of “big hit +1” and “number of acquisitions: 1500” is performed in the lower left part of the screen.

  If the type of big hit includes a big hit without a definite change, do not notify the notification of whether or not a definite change will occur after the end of the special game, during the special game or at the end of the special game. Is also possible.

  For example, when a total of 10 rounds of special games are played, the effect of notifying the player whether or not a definite change has been made until the end of the eighth round is not performed, and after the end of the eighth round, the definite change In the case of winning, it is possible to adopt an effect or control mode in which an effect to that effect (specific effect in hitting) is performed over one or more rounds.

  Similarly, in a pachinko gaming machine including a big hit that does not involve a definite change, when the gaming ball is detected in a predetermined area at a predetermined timing such as before the start of the special game, during the special game, or at the end of the special game. It is also possible to adopt an effect or a control mode such as being a definite variation.

  In this case, for example, a ball entry device having a detection area for gaming balls (herein referred to as "V ball entry device") is added to a portion below the winning opening in the game area 52 (see FIG. 1) Set up. Furthermore, at a predetermined timing such as at the end of the special game, the V ball storage device is made capable of receiving the game balls, and if the game ball is detected by the V ball storage device in this state, the probability state thereafter is The control is made to be in a positive change state over a predetermined period. And, when the game ball does not enter into the V entry device, or when the game ball does not enter the predetermined area in the V entry device, control is performed so that the probability state after that does not become a definite change state It is possible to say that.

  Moreover, it is also possible to give such a definite change by entering a ball only as an effect. That is, when hitting a big hit with a definite change in the big hit lottery, the V ball entry device is made to be able to receive the game ball at a predetermined timing. Then, a sorting mechanism is provided in the V-in-ball device, and when hitting a big hit with a certain change in advance, the gaming ball that has entered the V-in-a-ball device is guided to a certain change region, and the player makes a certain change Perform the effect that you have won. In addition, when hitting the jackpot without a definite change in advance, it is conceivable that the gaming ball is led to a non-deterministic change (normal) area, and the player performs an effect indicating that the definite change has been obtained.

  Then, as an effect after the above-mentioned special game, what relates to a result of an effect content in a special game can be illustrated. More specifically, the content etc. which a winner represents an emotion can be illustrated according to the result of the fight between characters. The effect after such a special game can also be called an ending effect.

  Furthermore, as the effect after the special game, it is possible to illustrate what additionally displays the number of consecutive times of the big hit, and what displays the number of balls awarded by the player by the special game at that time. In addition, it is also possible to additionally display the number of occurrences of the big hit when a big hit occurs during the specific game and the big hit is continuous. Further, with regard to the jackpot continuation, it is also possible to execute an effect pattern that is not selected before that when the jackpot generation number reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times).

Furthermore, when a small hit occurs, it is not possible to perform the effect of notifying the occurrence of the small hit, or during the game after the small hit is generated, it is the same as normal, and it can not be distinguished whether It is conceivable to perform the presentation of the content.
<Various examples of concrete effects>
<< Effect by superposition of multiple effect members >>

  Next, various concrete effects that can be implemented in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with examples. First, it is possible to perform effects by the display of the effect display device 60, the display of the light guide plate 88 described above, and the superposition of the movable effect members. This type of effect is a complex effect by positioning the movable effect member in front of the effect display device 60 and combining the display content of the effect display device 60 with the light decoration or movement of the movable effect member.

  As an example, in the state where any movable effect member pops out in front of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, at least a part of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 can be seen outside the movable effect member For example, when displaying an image of burning flames on the effect display device 60, the effect of the combination in which the movable effect member performs light decoration or operation is performed in front of the flame. Furthermore, in the light guide plate 88, for example, effects such as flashing of a flame pattern or effects of blinking a ripple pattern are provided, whereby a difference in distance between the light guide plate 88 and the effect display device 60 is caused. Visual effects can be exhibited.

  Furthermore, in this state, by performing the effect by the movable effect member between the light guide plate 88 and the effect display device 60, the state of the movable effect member and the image of the effect display device 60 are displayed on the light guide plate 88. It can be made to be visible to the player while being partially obstructive. Furthermore, by combining changes in the pattern-like display before and after the movable effect member, complicated situation display can be superimposed on the movable effect member, and it becomes possible to express the environment in which the movable effect member is placed in a complicated manner. .

  And by these things, a more complicated presentation can be performed by the limited structure of the light-guide plate 88, a movable presentation member, and the presentation display apparatus 60, and it becomes possible to diversify presentation. Note that, even when the light guide plate 88 is changed to, for example, a transmissive liquid crystal display body, a portion of the transmissive liquid crystal display body is viewed with a portion of the display contents of the movable effect member behind the display element 60 By setting the transmission state to the extent that can be achieved, it is possible to perform effects by superposition as in the case of the light guide plate 88.

  In addition, as a mode of utilization of the light guide plate 88, the transmission liquid crystal display body, etc. (herein referred to as the light guide plate 88 etc.), a mode of emphasizing the light guide plate 88 etc. and a mode by combination of the effect display device 60 are adopted. It is possible. In the above-mentioned “aspect of emphasizing the light guide plate 88 etc.”, a color display for making a predetermined image float is performed using most of the display surface of the light guide plate 88 etc., and the display content of the effect display device 60 behind is displayed. This is a display mode in which the player's awareness is not as directed as possible.

On the other hand, in the above-mentioned "aspect of the combination with the effect display device 60", the ratio of the area of the light guide plate 88 or the like where the color display is performed is suppressed to a predetermined degree, and the display of the effect display device 60 behind This is a display mode in which the effect of combining the display of the light guide plate 88 or the like and the display of the effect display device 60 is shown to the player, with the player's awareness going to the content. Then, in a predetermined case, the effect in the “mode of emphasizing the light guide plate 88 etc.” is performed, and in the other predetermined case, the effect in the “mode by combination with the effect display device 60” is performed. And so on.
<< Direction using hold display >>

  Then, various things can be illustrated also as an effect using the above-mentioned suspension display. For example, a pending change suggestive effect that suggests that a pending change is to be performed is exemplified, and the variation information display 198 of the variation information display unit 195 shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B is once erased, and the variation is performed. The information display unit 195 displays, for example, character information (character state transition suggestion information) that suggests that the reserved color changes to increase the degree of expectation, such as “color change?”. Then, after the display of such state transition indication information, the fluctuation information display 198 in the fluctuation information display unit 195 may be changed to mean high expectation such as red or rainbow color, for example. Do.

  It is also possible to display a display such as "color change?" Described above as one roulette eye or one pattern of a rotating drum (reel). For example, information displays such as “no change”, “color change?”, “Red”, and “rainbow” are adopted as the roulette eye and the pattern of the rotating drum, and the roulette and the rotation are Display drum objects. Then, in the variation information display unit 195, the display of "no change", "color change?", "Red", and "rainbow" sequentially changes, and the subsequent variation information is displayed in a mode corresponding to the stopped information. It is contemplated that 198 will be done. In addition, it is also possible to display an object of a roulette or a rotary drum without erasing the fluctuation information display 198.

  In addition, as another aspect of the effect using the hold display, when the hold change is performed in the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold number display unit 197 in FIGS. For example, it is considered to actively notify that there has been a change or that a pending change occurs immediately, by displaying pending change information such as “pending change”, “red pending”, “rainbow pending”, etc. Be Here, the display of such holding change information may be performed at the center of the display area 194 in the effect display device 60, or the holding change in the first holding number display unit 196 or the second holding number display unit 197. It may be performed in the vicinity of the pending display.

In addition, as described above, one or more types of pending change suggestive effects are provided to indicate that pending changes are to be made, and the rate at which pending changes are made or the type of pending changes is made depending on the type of pending change suggestion effects. It is also preferable to make the degree of change (for example, the rate at which the retained color changes from blue to red differ between Type A and Type B, etc.). In addition, when there are a plurality of pending displays and pending changes can be made for multiple pending displays, it is not possible to know which pending change will be made at the start of the pending change suggestion effect. If configured in this way, it is possible to improve interest in terms of whether the previously changed suspension changes further or the non-changed suspension changes.

  Moreover, when performing a pending | holding change suggestion production | presentation, the timing of a pending | holding change can be made into the various timings in symbol fluctuation. For example, in the case where the hold change suggestion effect is an area or an image object dedicated to the hold change suggestion, a plurality of start and end timings do not overlap with the fixed stop period of the decorative symbol (production symbol) You can set the timing.

  On the other hand, when the holding change indication effect is performed only in conjunction with the change indication of the decoration pattern without making it as a holding change indication only, for example, a pseudo decoration pattern that indicates the holding change using the display area of the decoration pattern It is possible to execute a pending change suggestion effect that displays (for example, "pending change symbol"). And, in this case, it is possible to set the timing at which the symbols in one or a plurality of columns temporarily stop, and the timing at which the stop symbol is announced.

In addition to the various hold change timings described here, the hold color may be changed at the start of the hold display or at the time of the shift.
<Various commands sent from main board to sub main board>

  Next, main commands of various commands transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301 will be described. First, as the transmission timing of the command, during the initial screen display, during the customer waiting demo (standby demo), at the time of symbol fluctuation start of the special symbol, at the time of symbol confirmation of the special symbol, during symbol confirmation of the special symbol, at the big hit start demonstration, When the big hit medium large winning opening is open, when the big hit middle large winning opening is closed, there is a hit end demonstration, a big hit end demonstration end, etc. Among these, during the initial screen display, it is a period from when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is turned on to when the customer waiting demo is started and the steady state is entered. In addition, at the start winning, at the time of power failure recovery, and at the time of error detection, command transmission is performed in any case. Furthermore, command transmission is also performed when RWM is cleared.

  Among these, as the command at the time of RWM clearing, there are a command of initialization of the effect display, initialization of the effect LED, and various errors. The effect indicator initialization command is for displaying a predetermined effect pattern on the effect display device 60. The effect LED initialization command is to light part of the game effect lamp when communication is normal. The various error commands are for displaying effects etc. in accordance with the state of the error.

  There is a customer waiting demo command as a customer waiting demonstration command. The customer waiting demonstration command is for setting the effect display device 60 and the game effect lamp for the customer waiting demonstration and erasing the sound.

  As a command at the start of symbol fluctuation of special symbol, symbol 1 memory number, symbol 2 memory number, communication inspection 1, communication inspection 2, effect frequency A to Z, effect selection state 0 to 2, fluctuation additional information, symbol 1 effect There are commands of pattern, symbol 2 effect pattern, symbol 1 character effect, and symbol 2 character effect. The symbol 1 storage number command indicates the number of pending storages of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 storage number command indicates the number of pending storages of the second special symbol. The communication check 1 command and the communication check 2 command are for confirming whether normal communication is performed. The various commands of the number of times of presentation A to Z indicate the number of times concerning the effects according to the above-mentioned limited frequency table, and the various commands of the effect selection states 0 to 2 indicate the types of effects according to the limited frequency table It is a thing. The fluctuation additional information command indicates information for adding an element (reproduction constituent element) that indicates, for example, an expectation of a big hit in the rendition pattern. The symbol 1 effect pattern command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 effect pattern command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the variation pattern of the second special symbol. It is a thing. The symbol 1 character effect command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the symbol of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 character effect command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the symbol of the second special symbol. is there.

  As commands at the time of symbol determination of the special symbol, there are commands of symbol 1 effect pattern stop and symbol 2 effect pattern stop. The symbol 1 effect pattern stop command and the symbol 2 effect pattern stop command are for stopping the effect pattern 190 based on the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively.

  As commands during symbol determination of special symbol, fluctuation time reduction number 0 (at low probability), fluctuation time reduction number A to Z (at low probability), fluctuation time reduction number 0 (at high probability), during probability fluctuation (time) Command of up to a predetermined number of fluctuations). These are for transmitting a command related to the gaming state at that time, and are used for effect mode display, time-saving display, and the like.

  As a command at the time of the big hit start demonstration, there are a command of the design 1 big hit start demonstration, a design 2 big hit start demonstration, the launch position specification. The symbol 1 big hit start demonstration command and the symbol 2 big hit start demonstration command are for displaying a start demonstration based on the big hit symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The firing position designation command is for notifying the player of the firing position when the game balls are to be separately hit by so-called left strike or right strike.

  As a command at the time of big hit medium large winning a prize opening opening, there is a command of demonstration 1-16 during pattern 1 big hit, demonstration 1-16 during pattern 2 big hit. These are for displaying effects based on the jackpot symbols and the number of rounds of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  As a command at the time of big hit medium large winning a prize opening closing, there is large winning a prize opening closing production command. This is for displaying the special winning opening closing effect.

  As a command at the time of the big hit end demonstration, there is a command of the end demonstration per symbol, the command of the end demonstration per 2 symbols. These are for displaying a hit end demonstration effect based on the hit symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  The commands at the time of starting winning prize include a notice of winning notice (per notice production), a notice of symbol notice (per notice symbol production), a notice of fluctuation (pattern notice effect), a memory of symbol 1 and a memory of symbol 2. Each command of hit notice, symbol notice, and change notice is a command (pre-read command) related to the above-mentioned pre-reading effect by the pre-information notifying means 157. The hit notice command is for transmitting the random value range of the pass / fail random number, and includes information of the pass / fail according to the lottery probability. The symbol advance command is for transmitting a random value range of symbol random numbers, and includes information related to the type of hit. Furthermore, the fluctuation advance notice command is for transmitting a random number range of the fluctuation pattern, and can be used to specify the type of the fluctuation pattern group (no reach, normal reach, super reach, etc.). The command of the symbol 1 memory number and the symbol 2 memory number is for conveying the number of pending storages of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Then, in the present embodiment, as a result of the success or failure lottery, information such as presence / absence of pre-reading effect, period, etc. is transmitted to the sub main board 301 by each command of hit notice, symbol notice, and change notice.

  As a command at the time of power failure return, communication inspection 1, communication inspection 2, gaming state A to E for power failure return, number of times of presentation A to Z, effect selection state 0 to 2, pattern 1 character effect, pattern 2 character effect, There is a command of power failure return hit state, power failure return special symbol 1 state, power failure return special symbol 2 state, firing position designation, errors a to d, number of symbol 1 memory, number of symbol 2 memory.

  The commands of the communication inspection 1 and the communication inspection 2 are for confirming whether or not normal communication is performed. The commands of the game states A to E for power failure recovery are for transmitting different commands according to the game state at the time of power failure. The command of the number of effects A to Z indicates the number of times related to the effect according to the above-mentioned limited frequency table, and the command of the effect selection states 0 to 2 indicates the type of effect according to the limited frequency table is there. The symbol 1 character effect and the symbol 2 character effect command are for transmitting commands corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The power failure return state command is for transmitting a different command depending on whether or not it is hit. The command of special symbol 1 state at power off return and special symbol 2 state at power off return sends the command according to the first special symbol or the second special symbol according to the state such as waiting, fluctuation, hit etc. It is for. As described above, the launch position specification command is for designating an appropriate launch position according to the situation. Errors a to d are for transmitting the presence and type of an error. The command of the symbol 1 memory number and the symbol 2 memory number is for conveying the number of pending storages of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.
<Main control processing of main board>

  Next, main control processing in the main substrate 102 of the pachinko gaming machine 10 having the above-described configuration will be described based on FIGS. Prior to the description, the terms "special motorized part", "condition device", and "parts continuous actuation device" used in the following will be described. All of these represent conceptual devices in the control process of the pachinko gaming machine 10, and among these, "special electric role" will activate (open) the big winning opening of the big winning opening device 90 It is a thing. In addition, the "condition device" operates when a specific symbol combination is displayed as a special symbol as a stop display, and the "character continuous actuation device" operates the special electric role a plurality of times in succession. It is possible to

Also, the main control processing of the pachinko gaming machine 10 described here is processing at power on shown in FIG. 14 (also referred to as “control start processing” on the main board), initialization processing shown in FIG. The setting change process shown in FIG. 17, the game progress interrupt process shown in FIG. 17, the lottery judgment process shown in FIG. 18 and the power-off process shown in FIG.
<Power-on process>

  The power-on process schematically shown in FIG. 14 is a control process that is started after the security check using the manufacturing code of the CPU 501 is performed by the power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 10. In the power-on process, an initial setting process (S101) is performed as shown in the figure. In the initial setting process (S101), a process related to the setting value is executed, but the contents of the initial setting process (S101) will be described later.

  After the initial setting process (S101), it is determined whether the RWM clear button (RWM clear switch (544)) is operated (S102). In this S102, when the RWM clear button is operated (S102: YES), the RWM clear process (S103) is executed, and the RWM clear information is transmitted to the sub side (the side of the sub main board 301) (S4). Further, information indicating that the power-on has been performed normally (information on the power-on normal state) is stored in the RWM (S105), and the timer interrupt is permitted (S106). With this timer interrupt permission (S106), game progress interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing) can be performed in a predetermined cycle (4 ms in this case). Furthermore, various random numbers are updated each time loop processing (circulation processing) is repeated (S107).

  Here, as random numbers to be updated in the random number updating process (S107), mention various initial value random numbers such as an initial value random number per normal symbol, a symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and a software initial value random number per special symbol. Can. Further, in updating various random numbers, it is possible to use 2-byte soft random number update processing as a common control module. The random number updated in the random number update process (S107) is the above-described software random number, and depending on the type of random number, the software random number updated in the random number update process (S107) and the above-described hardware random number It is also possible to generate a random value by the operation of

  If the RWM clear button has not been operated in S102 (S102: NO), it is determined whether the information on power-off normality is stored in the RWM (S111). Then, if the information on power-off normal is stored in the RWM (S111: YES), the RWM check is performed (S112), and it is determined whether the data in the RWM (data in the predetermined range) is normal. It is performed (S113). If it is determined in S113 that the data in the RWM is not normal (S113: YES), the process proceeds to RWM clear processing (S103).

If the information on power-off normal is stored in the RWM at S111 (S111: NO), and if the data in the RWM is normal at S113 (S113: NO), the power-off from the RWM is made. Data of various information commands at the time of acquisition are acquired (S116). Furthermore, data of the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the side of the sub main substrate 301 (S117), the return setting of the solenoid is performed (S118), and the above-mentioned S105 (processing for storing information on power on normal in RWM) Transition to
<Initial setting process>

  Next, the above-mentioned initial setting process (S101 in FIG. 14) will be described based on FIG. In this initial setting process, the setting process of each port / register is executed (S121), and it is judged whether or not the setting key insertion operation has been performed (S122). When the setting key is inserted (S22: YES), a setting value change process (S126) is performed, and the setting value change process (S126) will be described later.

If the setting key is not inserted at S122 (S122: NO), reading (reading) of the setting value information is performed (S123), and it is determined whether the setting value is abnormal (S124) . If the set value is not abnormal (S124: NO), the initial setting process is ended, but if the set value is abnormal (S124: YES), notification of the set value abnormality is performed (S128). Then, the setting value abnormality information is transmitted to the side of the sub main board 301 (S129), and thereafter, the loop state is established.
<Setting value change process>

  Next, the above-described setting value change processing (S126 in FIG. 15) will be described based on FIG. In this setting value change process, the RWM of the setting value storage area is checked (S131), and it is determined whether the setting value information is abnormal (S132). If there is no abnormality in the set value information (S132: NO), it is judged whether or not there is an RWM clear switch input (S133). If there is an RWM clear switch input (S133: YES), the set value The set value corresponding to the information is displayed (S134).

  If there is an abnormality in the setting value information at S132 (S132: YES), the setting value is forcibly set, and a default value (here, "1") is set in the setting value information (S141). Then, after the setting value forced setting information is transmitted to the sub main board 301 (S142), the setting value is displayed (S133).

  After the above S134, it is determined whether or not the setting value changing operation has been performed (S135). If there is a changing operation (S135: YES), the setting value information at that time is incremented by 1 (S136). Furthermore, it is determined whether the set value information has reached the set upper limit ("6" in this case) (S137). If the upper limit has been reached (S137: YES), the set value information at that time is It is set to "1" (S138). Then, it is determined whether or not the setting change is completed (whether or not the setting key is pulled out) (S139), and if it is completed (S139: YES), the display of the setting value is stopped (the display is erased in S140) And end the setting value change processing.

  If there is no change setting in the above S135 (S135: NO), the process of adding the setting value information (S136) to the process of setting the setting lower limit (here, "1") (S138) is not performed. Then, the process proceeds to determination processing (S139) whether or not the setting change is completed. When the set value information does not reach the upper limit value in S137 (S137: NO), whether the setting change is completed without performing the set lower limit value setting process (S138) of S137. Is transferred to the determination process (S139). Furthermore, if the setting change has not been completed in S139 (S139: NO), the process returns to the process of displaying the set value in S134.

  If the RWM clear switch has not been input in S133 (S133: NO), the set value corresponding to the set value information is displayed as in S134 (S146). Furthermore, as in the above S139, it is determined whether or not the setting change has been completed (whether or not the setting key has been withdrawn) (S147), and if it has been completed (S147: YES), the process proceeds to S139, The display of the set value is stopped (the display is erased in S140), and the set value change process is ended. If the setting change has not been completed in S147 (S147: NO), the process returns to the process of displaying the set value in S136.

That is, when the RWM clear switch is input in S133 (S133: YES), the setting value is displayed (S134), and the process for changing the setting value (S135 to S138 etc.) is performed. It becomes possible. However, if there is no RWM clear switch input at S133 (S133: NO), the display of the set value (S146) is performed, but the process for changing the set value as at S135 to S138. In the state where it does not become possible, setting value display is performed (this state may be referred to as a setting display mode).
<Game progress interrupt processing>

  Next, the game progress interrupt process (FIG. 17) repeated every timer interrupt of a predetermined cycle will be described. Although this game progress interrupt process (also referred to as "timer interrupt process", etc.) is omitted in the above description, it has a predetermined cycle (here, 4 ms cycle) based on the cycle information set in the power-on process (FIG. 14). It is repeated. As shown in FIG. 17, in the game progress interrupt process, setting of the interrupt operation condition (S41, S42), recursion of the interrupt processing time monitoring means (S43), management of the gaming machine (S45 to S70), permission of interrupt ( S71) is sequentially performed to return to the processing before the occurrence of the game progress interrupt.

  Specifically, in the process of setting the interrupt operation condition (S41, S42), in order to clear the interrupt flag, the interrupt operation condition setting value is stored in the game progress interrupt control register (S41), and the interrupt operation condition setting is performed. The value is set in the control register corresponding to the predetermined input terminal (S42). Thereafter, the second recursion information is set (S43), and the second recursion information is set in the interrupt processing time monitoring means register (S44). The second recursive information, together with the previously set first recursive information, is a condition for causing the monitoring clock of the interrupt processing time monitoring means to recurse and restart, as described later.

  In the management of gaming machines (S45 to S70), in order to manage gaming machines, the following processing is sequentially executed. First, in order to monitor the input of a specific signal, an input process (S45) is performed. The targets of monitoring here are various switches attached to the game board, a tray full switch, an open signal, a magnetic detection signal, a radio wave detection signal, a glass non-detection signal, and a disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality detection signal It is.

  Subsequently, various random number updating processes (S46) are executed to update the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number. Furthermore, the initial value update type random number updating process (S47) is executed to update the random number per normal symbol, the symbol random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol. Next, an initial value random number update process (S48) is executed to update the initial value random number per symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the software initial value random number per special symbol. Also, in order to update the 2-byte timer, the timer subtraction process (S49) is executed, and in order to set the effective period of the second starting winning opening 63, the effective period setting process of the second starting opening (S50) is performed. .

  Further, the prize monitoring process (S51) is executed to store the number of times the prize balls are paid out, create an output request for the board external information, and send a command to be transmitted to the sub substrate 104. Subsequently, in order to control the payout control board 103, a winning ball control process (S52) is performed.

  Next, when the game ball passes the normal symbol operation gate (operation opening 68), the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S53) is executed to store the random number related to the normal symbol, and the normal symbol display device or the normal symbol In order to perform the processing relating to the motorized prize, the normal symbol control processing (S54) is executed. Furthermore, in order to monitor the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol, the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S55) is executed. Also, in order to monitor the winning of the first starting winning opening 62 and the second starting winning opening 63 of the gaming ball, the starting opening monitoring control process (S56) is executed, and the first special symbol display portion 70 or the second special symbol In order to perform processing concerning display 71, special symbol control processing (S57) is executed. Subsequently, in order to perform processing related to the special electric combination, the special electric combination control processing (S58) is performed, and in order to perform processing related to the effective period of the special winning opening, the special winning opening effective period setting processing (S59) Is executed, and the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S60) is executed to monitor the variation start of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Next, execute anomaly detection processing (S61) to monitor magnetism, disconnection / short circuit / power supply, radio waves, monitor the open / close state of the glass frame set / game board frame, and monitor the pair glass. In order to detect the entrance passage passing time abnormality, the entrance passage passing time abnormality detection processing (S62) is executed. In addition, the game state display process (S63) to request display of the number of times the special electric character works continuously, an error state, the number of operation suspension balls of the normal symbol display device, and the number of operation suspension balls of the special symbol display device To monitor the touch state (including the state of the operation amount) of the emission handle 20, the steering wheel state signal inspection process (S64) is performed. In addition, the display of special symbols, the display of normal symbols, the display of the number of operation suspension balls of special symbol display devices (70, 71), the display of the number of operation suspension balls of normal symbol display devices, the display of gaming state, the special electric role goods The LED output process (S65) is executed to display the number of times the camera is operated continuously and the error display.

  Subsequently, in order to output the signal of prohibition / permission of the launch of the game ball, launch control signal output processing (S66) is executed, and in order to create and output a signal to be output to the test apparatus, test signal output processing (S67) Run. Furthermore, in order to output the output data of the ordinary electric role product solenoid and the special winning opening (open) solenoid, the solenoid output process (S68) is executed and the effect control command is transmitted, so that the effect control command transmission process ( S69) is executed, and an external information output process (S70) is executed to output a signal to the external terminal (various external output terminals of the external relay terminal board 46 (see FIG. 2)).

After that, the interrupt permission (S71) is executed, and the control process returns to RET. Then, using the remaining time until the next game interruption is executed, the above-described circulation process (the circulation process repeated including the random number update process of S7) of the power-on process (FIG. 14) is performed .
<< handle state signal inspection processing >>

In the above-described steering wheel state signal inspection process (S64), the steering wheel state is inspected in order to monitor the touch state of the launch handle 20, and when the steering wheel state is determined to be changed as a result of the inspection, the steering wheel state monitoring timer Subtraction, updating of the handle state, setting of the handle state monitoring timer, and command transmission request of the handle state effect. If it is determined that the steering wheel state does not change as a result of the inspection, the steering wheel state monitoring timer is set. When it is determined that the steering wheel timer is under subtraction in the subtraction of the steering wheel state monitoring timer, the subsequent processing regarding the steering wheel state is not performed.
<Lottery determination process>

  Next, the process of the aforementioned lottery determination (also referred to as “lottery determination process”) will be described. This lottery determination process is a process of determining whether or not winning is performed using probability data (processing of performing a big hit lottery determination). Further, the lottery determination process can be performed, for example, in the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S60) in the aforementioned game progress interrupt process (FIG. 17).

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the lottery determination process according to the determination. In the lottery determination process, first, when the process proceeds to step S1022, the main CPU 501 sets 1 in a predetermined register (for example, a C register) as winning number data, and proceeds to the next step S1024. In step S1024, the main CPU 501 sets 2 as the repetition count data, and proceeds to the next step S1025. In the winning number data, "1" indicates a big hit and "2" indicates a small hit.

  In step S1025, the main CPU 501 acquires probability data from the lottery table. Specifically, the main CPU 501 designates the gaming state (probability fluctuation state or normal probability state) and the address of the probability data corresponding to the set value, and acquires the probability data corresponding to the designated address from the lottery table And store it in a register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1026.

  In step S1026, the main CPU 501 performs a pass / fail determination. Here, the main CPU 501 first stores the random number value for adequacy judgment acquired when winning in the starting opening in a comparison register (for example, DE register) for lottery, and then acquired in step S1025. The value stored in the probability data is subtracted from the value of the comparison register to obtain a new value of the comparison register. Thus, the value of the comparison register is updated.

  In the next step S1027, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not a win is made. Here, when the value of the DE register becomes smaller than “0” by subtracting the probability data from the value of the comparison register (for example, the DE register), “1” is added to the carry flag of the flag register. Is set. That is, the carry flag is set. Also, "carry occurs" means that the carry flag is set to "1". Then, in step S1027, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not the winning is achieved by determining whether or not the carry flag is set to "1".

  Here, when “1” is not set in the carry flag, the main CPU 501 determines that it has not won (No), and proceeds to the next step S1028. On the other hand, when the carry flag is set to "1", the main CPU 501 determines that it is won (Yes), skips steps S1028 to S1033, and ends the processing of this flowchart. Here, the winning number data set when “Yes” is determined in step S1027 indicates the winning number determined in the lottery determination (for example, a big hit for winning number 1 and a small hit for winning number 2). It will be.

  In the next step S1028, the main CPU 501 updates the winning number data. Specifically, the main CPU 501 adds “1” to the value of the winning number data (for example, the C register) to obtain the value of new winning number data (for example, the C register). That is, the value of the winning number data (for example, the C register) is updated. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1029.

  In step S1029, the main CPU 501 updates the repetition count data. Specifically, the main CPU 501 subtracts “1” from the value of the repeat count data (for example, the B register) to obtain a new repeat count data (for example, the B register). That is, the value of the repetition count data (for example, the B register) is updated. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1030.

  In step S1030, the main CPU 501 determines whether the number of repetitions has ended. Specifically, the main CPU 501 determines whether the value of the repetition count data (for example, the B register) is “0”. Here, when the value of the repeat count data (for example, B register) is “0”, it indicates that the repeat count has ended, and the repeat count data (for example, B register) is not “0” (“0”) When larger, it indicates that the number of repetitions has not ended. Then, in step S1030, the main CPU 501 determines whether the number of repetitions has ended by determining whether the value of the number-of-repetitions data (for example, the B register) is “0”.

  Here, when the value of the B register is “0”, the main CPU 501 determines that the number of repetitions has ended (Yes), and proceeds to the next step S1033. On the other hand, when the value of the B register is not “0”, the main CPU 501 determines that the number of repetitions has not ended (No), and returns to step S1025.

  If “No” in the step S1030, the determination of the success or failure of the step S1026 is performed again using the same probability data as the previous time. In the next step S1033, the main CPU 501 sets the value of the winning number data (for example, C register) to "00 (H)" which is non-winning data, and ends the processing according to this flowchart.

  By configuring as described above, as described in step S1028, the process of updating the winning number data is in the lottery determination process, and therefore it is not necessary to store the winning number data in the lottery table. Further, by determining the winning number using the number of repetitions and the same probability data, it is not necessary to repeatedly determine the same probability data in the lottery table, so it is possible to reduce the amount of ROM used by the lottery table.

In this example, one winning number corresponding to the small hit and the big hit is provided, and the type of big hit or small hit is determined by the symbol random number acquired separately at the time of hitting, but these types are determined by this processing Is also possible. In that case, the value of the repetition number data in step S 1024 is changed according to the number of types, and probability data (range value corresponding to each winning number) for each winning number is set, and the same determination routine is used. It is also possible.
<Power-off process>

  Next, the power-off process performed when the power is shut down will be described. As shown in FIG. 19, in the power-off process, the data of all the used registers is saved in the RWM (S81), and the state of interrupt permission / prohibition before the power-off is saved (S82). Furthermore, it is judged whether or not the information on power-on normality is stored in the RWM (S83), and if not stored (S83: NO), the information on power-off abnormality is stored in the RWM (S84), The processing moves to the processing of RWM access prohibition (S88). On the other hand, if it is stored (S83: YES), the value of the stack pointer is stored in the stack pointer buffer (S85), the information on power off normal is stored in RWM (S86), and the checksum of RWM is calculated. And save the checksum data (S87). Then, the access to the RWM is inhibited (S88), and control processing is looped while waiting for the reset of the CPU 501.

Further, in the power-off process, even if the setting of both the first recursive information and the second recursive information is not completed, the CPU 501 functions as a forced recursion means, and the first recursive information and the second recursion are performed. Information setting is performed, and the monitoring clock of the interrupt processing time monitoring means is forcibly initialized, and the clock is recursed. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the forced setting of the first recursive information and the second recursive information is performed immediately after the start of the power-off process and before the process of saving all used registers (S81). It is Then, when the power supply is resumed, the control process is started in a state where the monitoring timekeeping recurs. In other words, by forcing the monitoring clock to recurse when the power is cut off, it is possible to prevent the progress of the control processing without recursion of the monitoring clock in the control processing immediately after resuming the power supply. It has become.
<Other individual control processing modes>
<< Control mode related to command transmission timing >>

In this embodiment, the effect control command output from the main substrate 102 to the sub main substrate 301 is temporarily stored in the command buffer by the command request before transmission. The command buffer functions as a ring buffer of a plurality of buffers, and is performed once in the order stored in the command buffer in the control processing for command transmission (here, in the effect control command transmission processing (S69)). In the game progress interrupt process, one command (a pair of data of MODE and EVENT) is taken out from the command buffer and transmitted. It is also possible to adopt a method of transmitting a command whose priority is set high first. In addition, in various control processes, when a command that requires transmission is generated, it is also possible to perform command transmission as needed. When such a method is adopted, transmission of effect commands is collectively performed in one control processing module such as, for example, effect control command transmission processing (S69) during one game progress interrupt processing. Instead, command transmission is performed sequentially in each control processing module whenever the need for command transmission arises. Therefore, it is unlikely that the command transmission will be carried over to the next game progress interrupt processing. Then, for example, there is no delay in the command transmission at the start winning combination or the command transmission at the start of variation of the special symbol, and quick command processing becomes possible.
<< Control mode related to updating pending storage >>

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the configuration in which the second game is prioritized is adopted, and regularity is provided in the execution order of the first and second plurality of games, so updating of the hold storage is performed. Is played in order every second game or first game. Therefore, if only updating of the information stored on hold is performed for each second game or first game, the update on the information stored on hold is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of giving priority to the first game or giving priority to any game, the reserve memory is digested in the order in which the start winning combination occurs and is stored on hold (pricing order digest) It is also possible to adopt a configuration that Among them, when adopting a configuration in which the reserve storage is digested in the order of occurrence of the start winning, updating of the reserve storage information according to the digestion, updating of the total number of reservations for a plurality of games, and storage of the winning order are performed. As a whole, it is possible to update pending and stored information.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to inform the sub main board 301 that the pending storage has been updated, a request for the symbol storage number command (symbol 1 storage number command or symbol 2 storage number command) is made as described above. By including both the symbol 1 memory number command and the symbol 2 memory number command in one command, the required program and memory capacity can be reduced.
<< Control mode related to lottery of fluctuation pattern >>

  Then, the various aspects which concern on the lottery of a fluctuation pattern are demonstrated. In the aspect of the determination of the variation pattern described here, one of the pachinko gaming machines 10 may be selected and applied, or may be used in combination as appropriate. And when using a several aspect together, it is possible to use an aspect properly based on elements, such as a result of a pass / fail, for example.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the determination result of the fluctuation pattern is determined by the number of holding balls, the special symbol (which may be a symbol group), and the fluctuation pattern selection state (status information of the special symbol). Although used as an element, a fluctuation pattern table corresponding to a combination of these determinants is selected. Then, with the determination of the variation pattern table, the variation pattern random number is used to determine the variation time that is paired with the variation pattern. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, with regard to the determination of the variation pattern, the variation pattern table is made to differ depending on whether the result of the success or failure lottery is a big hit or a loss. That is, in the case of a big hit, the variation pattern table is selected from among those linked to status information on special symbols such as the number of balls held, special symbols (groups) and random numbers. On the other hand, in the case of losing, the variation pattern table is selected from among those tied to the gaming state, the special symbol, the number of holding balls, and the random number. Among them, in the case of a big hit, the fluctuation pattern to which the time of re-lottery on presentation is given is based on the state of presentation (presence or absence of specific effects etc.) and the special symbol group, The presence or absence is determined, and the determined result is transmitted from the main substrate 102 to the sub main substrate 301.

  In addition, when determining the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time, it is possible to determine fluctuation additional information according to the determined fluctuation pattern number, and to determine the subsequent fluctuation time by the fluctuation addition information. For example, when the selected fluctuation pattern corresponds to the limited frequency pattern rendition, it is conceivable to determine the extension of the fluctuation time according to that afterward.

  In addition, by setting the command of variation additional information as a command at the start of symbol variation of the special symbol as described above, the variation determined previously in relation to elements such as gaming state and hit symbol in the sub main board 301 An effect of adding an additional time later can be performed on time. And when determining the fluctuation time of a general production | presentation pattern in such an aspect, it is possible to create various fluctuation patterns, suppressing the number of fluctuation patterns provided beforehand beforehand as follows. It is. That is, in consideration of the case where the above-mentioned pseudo continuous advance notice (so-called "pseudo run") is performed, when the pseudo run variation patterns are simply set individually, the same number of variation patterns as the number of types of effects are provided in advance. You need to When the effect patterns such as the effect symbols on the sub main substrate 301 are prepared for the fluctuation patterns determined individually by the main substrate 102 in this manner, the total number of fluctuation patterns in the main substrate 102 is large. For example, it is possible to reach more than 256 numbers. For this reason, in order to provide an identifiable code to a large number of fluctuation patterns, it is necessary to increase the number of bits and the number of bytes for representing the code as compared with the conventional case.

  However, by using the fluctuation addition information (variation addition pattern), it is possible to connect fluctuation addition information, for example, selected by random numbers to a relatively small number of basic fluctuation patterns, and form a fluctuation pattern afterward. It is. And since a new fluctuation pattern can be formed by the combination of a fluctuation pattern by this, various fluctuation patterns can be created, without making the number of the fluctuation patterns beforehand provided excessive. In addition, it is possible to transmit the random number value according to the fluctuation additional information from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301 at the occurrence of the start winning as a command for pre-reading effect. In addition, it is also possible to set the appearance probability of the variation addition pattern so that the variation addition information is easily added when the limited frequency pattern effect is performed. In addition, if “777” which is a probability variation symbol is displayed from the beginning as a combination of rendering symbols 190, setting of variation additional information is not performed as a combination of rendering symbols 190, if an example using variation additional information is further mentioned. Once the non-deterministic symbol "666" is displayed, the effect of displaying whether the result is promoted to "777" or not (for example, the effect of the swing fluctuation or the development of the fluctuation mode There is a case where the effect to be expressed) is performed by setting the fluctuation additional information.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined with the number of holding balls as an element, and the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to differs depending on how many the holding balls are. The fluctuation pattern table is provided corresponding to the number 0 to 4 of holding balls. The reason that the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the hold 4 is provided as well as the four hold 0 to 3 is as follows. For example, consider a case where a new variable display is started from the situation where the number of balls held is four and the number of balls held is three. The state where the number of holding balls is 3 at the stage where the control process is not yet determined the fluctuation pattern which is the process during the later game progress interrupt process during the game progress interrupt process being executed at that time When a new start winning combination occurs, the number of holding balls is added to 4 when determining the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern table is provided corresponding to the number of holding balls 0 to 4 so that such a situation can also be a factor in determining the fluctuation pattern.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern table may be provided corresponding to the number 0 to 3 of holding balls. In this case, in terms of control processing, it is possible to have a configuration in which the starting winning combination from the state of the number of holding balls 3 to the determination of the fluctuation pattern is not added. In addition, it is applicable also to the pachinko game machine of the type in which the maximum number of reservations (for example, 8) other than four is set also about either aspect.

Moreover, it is possible to set it as the time of fluctuation pattern lottery as acquisition timing of a fluctuation pattern random number. That is, since the variation pattern random number is not a random number relating to the special product operation such as the special electric role, etc., for example, in aiming at a fair game as an element for playing a game properly The need for constraints is reduced. Therefore, it is conceivable that the fluctuation pattern random number is acquired and stored, for example, as a separately provided timing at the time of the fluctuation pattern lottery as the timing separately provided at the start winning combination. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the number of information to be stored at the start winning combination, and it is possible to reduce the capacity of the program and memory.
<< Control mode related to designation of design >>

In the lottery of symbols, determine the symbol determination table to be used based on the value of the upper byte of the symbol indicating the symbol random number, and then determine the symbol from the determined symbol determination table based on the value of the lower byte of the symbol random number Is also possible. In this embodiment, since the numerical value range of the symbol random number is set to "0 to 999", binary code codes of these numerical values can be used. And, by doing this, it is possible to reduce the memory and program capacity. In addition, distribution of the game state such as the number of rounds and the number of time reductions is performed on the winning symbol (which may be a symbol group), and the number of rounds thereafter or the number of time shortenings and the opening time of the special winning opening according to the winning symbol. Or, an open pattern or the like may be determined. By doing this, it is not necessary to store and control data specific to the gaming state, and the memory and program capacity can be reduced. Further, information (playing state designation information) for transmitting the gaming state to a command (for example, each command of the design 1 effect pattern and the design 2 effect pattern in the present embodiment) per hit from the main substrate 102 to the sub main substrate 301 It is also possible to add). This command is not sent to the sub main substrate 301 immediately after being created, but is created and temporarily stored, and sent to the sub main substrate 301 after waiting for a predetermined timing.
<< Relationship of special symbol and variation time of the production symbol >>

  As described above, the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) and the corresponding corresponding design symbol 190 are controlled to start and stop fluctuating in synchronization with each other, but the situation In some cases, the variation time of the rendering symbol 190 can be shortened to some extent with respect to the variation time of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol).

  That is, when the variation of the special symbol is determined and the variation pattern is determined, and the variation of the special symbol is started, the main substrate 102 transmits a variation start command (command at the start of variation) of the rendering symbol to the sub main substrate 301 However, the time required for transmission and reception of a predetermined command (for example, the first command of the command at the start of fluctuation) or waiting for being set in the command buffer (in the present embodiment, the ring buffer type is used) It is conceivable that the start of the fluctuation of the rendering pattern is delayed by the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol by the influence of the time until all the commands (first-in commands) are sent. Furthermore, at the time of the fluctuation stop of the special symbol, the fluctuation stop command (the command at the time of symbol decision of the special symbol) is transmitted to the sub main board 301, but the predetermined command (for example, the first command of the command at the start of fluctuation It is also conceivable that the fluctuation stop of the effect pattern is delayed depending on the time required for the transmission and reception of) and the degree of congestion of the command buffer (the degree of the number of commands waiting for transmission).

Thus, the variation time of the production symbol is set to a certain extent to the variation time of the special symbol based on the command transmitted at the start of the variation, and the special symbol starts the next variation by performing the swing variation. I try to avoid the situation that the last symbol is stopped and displayed later. Although the display during the swing fluctuation may cross the next fluctuation due to the delay of the process by the number of commands, the delay amount is because the command transmitted to the sub main board 301 is smaller than the time of the fluctuation start at the end of fluctuation. Is suppressed, and the effect pattern can be fixed almost certainly during the display fixed time of the special symbol.
<< pre-judgment of success / failure lottery results >>

  First, in the present embodiment, as described above (FIG. 9 (a), FIG. 12), the win or fail random number range in the first lottery and the second lottery is “0 to 65535”, As shown in FIG. 13A, “0 to 65535” is divided into a plurality of random number value ranges (here, A to N).

  And as shown to Fig.13 (a), "0-205" belongs to the classification of prefetch code A among the pass / fail random number value ranges "0-65535", and "206" is classification of prefetch code B Belongs to Furthermore, the success / failure random number values "207" to "210" belong to the classification of the pre-read codes C to F, respectively. Moreover, the pass / fail random number value “211 to 615” belongs to the classification of the prefetch code G, and the pass / fail random number values “616 to 618” belong to the classification of the prefetch code H.

  Subsequently, the pass / fail random number values “619 to 621”, “622 to 624”, “625 to 627”, and “628 to 630” belong to the classification of the pre-reading codes H to L, respectively. In addition, the pass / fail random number value “64874 to 65534” belongs to the classification of the prefetch code M. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the pass / fail random number values “631 to 64873” and “65534” belong to the classification of the prefetch code M.

  FIG. 13B shows the contents of each prefetch code. As shown in the figure, the pre-reading code A means that it will be hit (big hit) at all settings regardless of the set value. Subsequently, when the set value is “2” or more, the pre-reading code B means that it becomes a hit whether it is normal time or positive change time. That is, the pre-read code B indicates a hit if the setting value is “2” or more, regardless of whether it is the normal probability or the high probability, but the setting value of “1” indicates the deviation. Furthermore, if the set value is “3” or more to “6”, the pre-read codes C to F mean that the hit occurs at both the normal time and the high probability time regardless of the probability state.

  Subsequently, the pre-reading code G means that if it is a definite change, it will be hit regardless of which setting value. That is, the preread code G indicates a hit if it is a high probability time, but indicates a deviation when it is a normal probability. Furthermore, the pre-reading code H means that if it is in the process of change, it hits at the set value “2” or more. Further, the pre-read codes I to L mean that the set value “3” or more to “6” will be hit if it is in the middle of a definite change. Further, the pre-reading code M means being a small hit, and the pre-reading code N means being being out of place regardless of the set value or the probability state.

  Using the classified pre-read code thus classified, for example, the main board 102 determines the pre-read code to which the acquired random number belongs, and uses the information (command) corresponding to the judged pre-read code as the above-mentioned prior notification information It is possible to transmit to the sub main board 301. Then, on the side of the sub main substrate 301, it is possible to perform a hit announcement effect as a pre-reading effect in association with the result of the judgment of acceptance, without waiting for the end of the hold.

  In addition, in this embodiment, in the prior determination of the type of special symbol and the prior determination of the type of variation pattern related to the special symbol, the determination based on the random value range is the same as in the case of the result of the lottery It is supposed to be done. And, the kind of special symbol and the kind of fluctuation pattern concerning the special symbol are provided in a large number compared with the kind of the result of the success or failure lottery, and the number of pre-reading code (number of groups) is more than in the case of the success or failure lottery It has become. However, as the method of prior determination based on the random value range, although the random value range and the type of the lottery result to be grouped are different, it can be performed in the same manner as the prior determination related to the propriety determination as described above. . Therefore, the detailed description of the prior determination based on the random value range for the symbol notice effect and the pattern notice effect will be omitted here.

  By performing prior determination based on such a random value range, rounding of information is possible, and it is possible to create a command related to the prior determination with a small amount of information. That is, when the number of random number values exceeds 256, the number of bytes required to represent the random number values exceeds 1 byte. For this reason, if it is assumed that the information on the random number is sent as it is (as raw information) to the sub main board 301 for prior determination, the information for identifying which random number has been sent is sent in MODE and the random number is sent. There are cases where it is necessary to transmit 2-byte commands (MODE, EVENT) in two steps to transmit a random value in order to store and transmit in EVENT.

  However, as in the present embodiment, by converting the information indicating the range to which the acquired random number belongs and transmitting it to the sub main board 301, the amount of information to be transmitted can be reduced more than the number of random numbers. Even when the number of numerical values exceeds 256 (1 byte), the attribute of the acquired random value can be commanded with an information amount of 1 byte. In addition, as will be described later, a code indicating that (for example, indeterminate or not determined) is provided in preparation for a situation where it is not desirable to transmit prefetch information as described later. It is also possible to transmit a command indicating the code to the sub main board 301 side.

  Here, as the above-mentioned "a situation where we do not want to transmit pre-read information", for example, when the reserve on the preferential digest side (eg, special figure 2 side) in the normal game in the preferential digest type 1 + 1 type gaming machine occurs Can be illustrated. And, as described above, the "preferential digest type" in the above description gives priority to one of the second game and the first game (here, the second game) over the other (here, the first game). It means something like that. Furthermore, “1 + 1 type game machine” in the above description means a game machine having game characteristics in which a plurality of (here two) games corresponding to the conventional type 1 pachinko game machine are mixed as described above There is.

In addition, as other “conditions where you do not want to send pre-reading information”, the non-priority digest side (for example, special figure 1 side) in the specified game in the same priority digest type 1 + 1 type gaming machine A case of occurrence can be mentioned. In addition, when the reserve on the preferential digest side (for example, the special figure 2 side) occurs during the normal game in the preferential digest type 1 + 1 type gaming machine as described above, the prefetching effect relating to the reserve on the special figure 1 side is executed If it was in the middle, the pre-reading effect may be canceled (eg, the one in which the reserved image in special figure 1 has changed to red is returned to blue), or the like. If a non-priority digest side (for example: special figure 1 side) hold occurs during a specific game (in high base) in, even if the pre-reading effect relating to the special view 2 side hold is in progress, that pre-reading The presentation may not be stopped (eg, the image of the special image 2 whose reserve image has changed to red may be maintained as it is). In addition, with regard to touch effects to be described later, even when a change in effects relating to pre-reading effects is scheduled, it is also set so as not to be executed also for the touch effects when pre-reading effects are canceled. Become.
<Various measures for using touch detection>

  Next, an application measure of the touch detection according to the operation to the firing handle 20 applicable to the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. Here, “touch detection” largely means that a touch of a human hand is detected by the touch switch 310 (FIG. 4) described above. And this "touch detection" is an aspect concerning detection of the operation of the emission handle (20).

  In the present invention, regarding the relationship between touch detection and presentation output, various control elements (control content determination elements) are examined as described later, and an appropriate control element is adopted from among the examined ones. It is assumed to apply to Then, various control elements as described above are appropriately applied to the pachinko gaming machine 10, effects are executed based on the detection of the state of the gaming machine and the handle operation, and the operation detection of the launch handle can be effectively utilized. Is assumed.

  More specifically, in the present invention, the state of the pachinko gaming machine, from before and after the power is turned on, the game is performed through the standby state, and the variation display and the stop display of the special symbol according to the result of the lottery A game is a big hit after it becomes a big hit through the variable display and stop display (symbol game related to the production symbol) and the variable display and stop display of the production symbol (including those displayed in a reduced size) until the big hit game is over I consider it as a series of related conditions. Furthermore, in various states, assuming the presence or absence of touch detection related to the emission handle 20, the state and the situation are further subdivided, and the presence or absence of presentation output and the contents thereof are examined.

  And, depending on which game state of the plurality of types of game states, whether or not the effect is output triggered by the touch detection, and / or the effect that is output triggered by the touch detection is different It is configured to earn. Then, as described later, whether or not the effect is output triggered by the touch detection and / or the effect execution condition is determined such that the effect output triggered by the touch detection can be different, and this effect execution condition is set as The game operation state (a control button 22 which can be operated by the player, an operation lever before the timing of the touch detection is made at which timing or the touch detection is made in which gaming state among a plurality of types of gaming state Conditions such as whether or not a player operation input means (such as the cross key 96) has been operated are included.

  And what applied various examination matters to the pachinko gaming machine 10 is caught as each embodiment. Also, in the following examination, effects produced based on touch detection (triggered by touch detection) are referred to as "touch effects", but the term "touch effects" refers to lines related to touch detection in terms of control. It means something to be recognized, and it is a concept that includes things that can be easily understood as touch effects for those who have seen the effects and things that are difficult to understand. In addition to the touch detection, the “touch effect” may be performed as an effect (emission detection effect) to be executed in a situation where a change in the emission intensity volume is detected.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine 10, control elements and assumptions considered here can be made to coexist in control, and it is possible to appropriately select and adopt ones that can not coexist. In this manner, touch output detection and control processing related to this are examined starting from the combination of various states of the gaming machine and the presence or absence of touch detection, and appropriately selected and adopted in the pachinko gaming machine, touch detection It becomes possible to perform rendering output by making maximum use of the steering wheel operation including Y. It is possible to more effectively utilize the steering wheel operation.

As described above, as shown in FIG. 22, in order to determine the relationship between touch detection and effect output at the design stage, it is possible to consider an element when considering measures for utilizing touch detection. At the left end (front side) of the chart in FIG. 22 and FIG. 23, “structure”, “playing state of gaming machine”, “touch detection” as a classification (study item classification) of control elements related to the relationship between touch detection and presentation output. , “Other processing executed based on touch detection”, “production permission / restriction condition”, and “other 1”. Here, "the gaming state of the gaming machine" can also be called, for example, "a gaming state that can occur in a gaming machine", "a state that can occur in a gaming machine", or the like.
<Structure>

  Among these, the classification item of “structure” shown at the top of FIG. 22 is a classification based on the equipment configuration for touch detection and the equipment configuration that can be associated with touch detection in control. And as classification of "structure", it is possible to appropriately select and subdivide what is necessary for possible application measures, but here, as shown in the figure, "touch detection" and "effect button" I will list the item of ". In FIG. 22 and FIG. 23, each item is indicated by an alphabet or a symbol by combination of an alphabet and a numeral. And in the example of FIG. 22, the symbol "A" is attached to the "structure" of the front head, and the "touch detection" and "effect button" shown below are respectively "A1" and "A2". The symbol is attached.

Among these, “touch detection” of the symbol “A1” means a configuration required to detect a touch of a hand of a player or the like. The item “A1: touch detection” can include the configuration of the touch switch 310 and the like described above. The item "A2: effect button" may include the configuration of the operation button 22 or the cross key 96 described above.
<The gaming state of the gaming machine>

Subsequently, as the items of the "playing state of the gaming machine" of the next stage described above, "B: normal state" and "C: special state" can be largely mentioned. And in these “B: normal state” and “C: special state”, “B: in the state before the touch change” which means the state before the touch detection is made here, “B: It means "normal state" and "C: special state".
<< B: Normal condition (condition before touch change) >>

  Furthermore, "B: normal state" can be divided into "B1: game standby state" and "B2: game in progress". Among these, "B1: game standby state" means a state in which a special symbol, which is the main game of the pachinko machine in this embodiment, is changed, and a game such as a special game performed according to the result is not performed. doing. In other words, even when the opening operation of the electric chew based on the fluctuation of the normal symbol or the winning of the normal symbol described above is performed, it is defined as the "game standby state" for the sake of convenience. In addition, “B1: game standby state” includes a state in which a customer waiting demo display is being performed after a predetermined time has passed without touch detection, but “customer waiting demo” is described above, as described above. It can be called "standby demo" or the like. In addition, as the "waiting customer demo", it is conceivable to provide a basic "normal demo" and a special "non-normal demo" as compared to the "normal demo".

  In addition, "B1: game standby state" is, as shown in the figure, "B11: game standby A (normal demonstration display)", "B12: game standby B (during symbol stop)", "B13: game standby C It can be divided into items of (setting screen for effect, voice etc.) and “B14: game standby (during power saving)”. Among these, "B11: game standby A (normal demonstration display)" means a standby state which becomes the basic of the game standby state, and the above-mentioned "normal demonstration" display is performed.

  In addition, it is also possible to handle the game standby state in which the variation of the normal symbol mentioned above is executed separately from other game standby states, in which case, "B11: game standby A (normal demo display in this embodiment) )] ~ "B14: game standby (during power saving)" further divided into standby state (for example, B111: game standby A state and normal symbol and electric chew are inactive, B112: game standby A state and normal symbol fluctuation Medium, B113: A game waiting A state, and electric chow being operated ...) may be defined.

  FIG. 33A shows an example of the effect output displayed on the effect display device (60) in the state of “B11: game standby A (normal demonstration display)” among them. In FIG. 33 (a), the company name display of the gaming machine manufacturer (SAMMY) in most areas in the screen, and the message flow display (scroll display) in the lower message display area 364 appearing in the lower part of the screen. Has been done. As the message display, it is possible to illustrate one having a content such as "change standby screen by handle touch, transition to customization screen by effect button ON". Hereinafter, the standby screen display in the state of "B11: game standby A (normal demonstration display)" may be referred to as "standby screen A". The "standby screen A" is displayed when the data in the RWM is not normal (S113: YES) at S113 when the power is restored (when the power is turned on in FIG. 14) and the process shifts to RWM clear processing (S103). Is also displayed. In addition, as a game standby screen at this time, it may be changed to the character display of "energized" in FIG. 35 (a) and character display such as "initialized" may be written together, and the situation A dedicated standby screen may be provided in accordance with.

  Then, when there is touch detection in a situation like the example of FIG. 33A, for example, the touch effect as shown in FIG. 34A is performed, and the change of the effect based on the touch detection (touch change) It is conceivable to cause it. In the example of FIG. 34 (a), although there is no change in the image display on the effect display device 60, as shown by appending the speaker mark 376 and the lamp mark 377 on the right side in the drawing, sound output and light are shown. Output is being done.

  Here, the speaker mark 376 and the lamp mark 377 shown in the figure do not indicate that these marks 376 and 377 are displayed on the effect display device 60, but with the image display performed by the effect display device 60 Besides, it is intended to schematically show that sound output from the speaker (21) and light output (lamp output) by a predetermined LED are performed. And the speaker mark 376 shown in the upper part of the figure represents that there is an audio output by the design image in which the note comes out from the speaker, and the lamp mark 377 in the middle part in the figure lights up the light bulb. It shows that light output is performed by the design picture of

  Further, a lamp mark 377 shown in parentheses at the lower part of the drawing shows a display mode when the lamp output is not performed. The lower lamp mark 377 (in parentheses) can be used in place of the middle lamp mark 377 (without parentheses) when light output as a touch effect (lamp effect) is not performed. Also for the speaker mark 366, a mark in the case of not outputting may be used. As a speaker mark when there is no sound output, for example, it is possible to use a design image of a speaker to which no note is added.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b), it is also possible to indicate that the reach effect is being executed by the ramp mark 378 in the drawing. In this case, the characters "reach effect" and "touch notification LED" are shown in the figure, one lamp mark 378 indicates the presence or absence of reach effect, and the other lamp mark 377 indicates the presence or absence of touch effect. Can be shown to be distinguishable.

  In addition, the speaker mark 376 and the lamp marks 377 and 378 described here can be used to explain the effect combination according to the presence or absence of the sound output or the light output even in various game states described later. It is a thing. In the following description, the speaker mark 376 and the lamp marks 377 and 378 are added to the drawings of all the screen display examples, and the presence or absence of the sound output or the light output is not additionally described. A speaker mark 376 and lamp marks 377 and 378 are added to indicate a combination of effects (effect combination).

  Then, the above-mentioned "B12: game standby B (during symbol stop)", the display concerning the special symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) and the effect becomes the stop state (here the decision stop state), the next fluctuation Standby state in a state in which no action is taken (no hold in special view 1 or special view 2), or when a predetermined condition is satisfied (details will be described later; It means the standby state after the lapse of time. And when this "B12: game standby B (during symbol stop)" elapses for a predetermined period, it is possible to control such an aspect as it shifts to the above-mentioned "B11: game standby A (normal demo display)" .

  FIG. 33B shows an example of the effect output displayed on the effect display device (60) in the state of "B12: game standby B (during symbol stop)". In the example of FIG. 33 (b), the numeral symbols of "3", "3" and "1" are displayed as the above-mentioned symbol element effect symbols, and the symbol of the heart is each number symbol as the above-mentioned non-symbol element effect symbols. In combination with each other, rendering symbols 190a to 190c are configured. Hereinafter, the standby screen display in the state of "B12: game standby B (during symbol stop)" may be referred to as "standby screen B".

  In this "standby screen B", a pattern (here, a heart) is displayed for the decorative symbol (effect symbol), but the numbers (here, 1 and 3) may be hidden. In addition, numbers may also be displayed as fluctuation start condition satisfaction (= from the standby screen B to start-up winning).

  Further, in the lower right of the display area 194, the display corresponding to the display of the rendering symbols 190a to 190c can be reduced inconspicuously and simplified to be performed together with the display of the rendering symbols 190a to 190c. A reduced effect symbol display area 361 appears. Furthermore, in the first hold count display unit 196 and the second hold count display unit 197, a hold display of the star design is performed. Then, when there is touch detection in the situation as in the example of FIG. 33B, for example, the touch effect area 362 on which the character display of “Welcome” shown in FIG. It is possible. Then, with touch detection as a trigger, it is possible to change the effect output.

  In the above-described effect symbols 190a to 190c (decorative symbols), the reduction effect symbol display area 361, and the number-of-holds display portion (196, 197), display priorities are provided. Here, the display priority order is, from the high order, the reduced effect symbol display area 361, the number-of-holds display portion (196, 197), and the effect symbols 190a to 190c. However, the priority of the display may be varied according to the gaming state of the gaming machine. For example, in the case of variation (in game), the display priority is high in the order of the reduced effect symbol display area 361, the number-of-holds display portion (196, 197), and the effect symbols 190a to 190c In some cases, the display priority order may be configured to be high in the order of the reduction effect symbol display area 361, the effect symbols 190a to 190c, and the number-of-holds display portion (196, 197). In addition, when performing a touch effect that causes the touch effect area 362 to appear during symbol fluctuation, at least one display priority of at least one of the effect pattern 190a to 190c and the reduced effect pattern display area 361 is higher than the touch effect. Is also set to be high.

  In the standby screen B, the second hold count display unit 197 is not displayed among the first hold count display unit 196 and the second hold count display unit 197, and only the first hold count display unit 196 may be displayed. It is possible. In this case, it is also possible to move the first hold number display unit 196 to, for example, the left and right center portions in the lower part of the screen. However, in this case, the standby screen B can be shifted only in the normal probability (low probability) state, and in the specific gaming state such as in the middle of a definite change or during the power support, the start winning is detected for a predetermined time It is desirable not to migrate even without it.

  The standby screen B, which is the "variation standby screen", is not limited to that shown in FIG. 33 (b), and various modes can be adopted. In addition, various types of touch effects can be adopted. For example, it is possible to display such as the lower message display area 364 illustrated in the standby screen A of FIG.

  Further, as another example related to the touch effect of the standby screen B, for example, an effect (RTC related effect) performed based on real time using an RTC (real time clock) can be illustrated. And as this RTC-related effect, for example, an effect to be performed by determining a date or a season, an effect to be performed by determining a time zone of a day, an effect to be performed simultaneously by a plurality of pachinko gaming machines, etc. are illustrated. can do. Furthermore, an effect etc. which show that the time slot | zone at that time is in a specific effect mode by the scroll display of a character message can also be illustrated. Moreover, it is also possible to output a predetermined BGM as an effect related to the RTC for standby.

  Moreover, as another example related to the touch effect of the standby screen B, one using the above-described movable effect member can be mentioned. Specifically, in the game standby state in which the standby screen B is displayed, the movable effect member is displaced from the initial position and reaches the post-drive position. Further, in the movable effect member, the overlapping portion with the display area (194) of the effect display device (60) is relatively small at the initial position, and the overlapping portion with the display area (194) is relatively large at the post-driving position. Shall be Then, the movable effect member is in the post-drive position, and by detecting a change in touch detection there, the combination may return to the initial position. Further, even if the symbol variation starts during the return to the initial position at that time, the return operation of the accessory may be configured not to be interrupted.

  In the above-mentioned "B13: game standby C (setting screen for effect / voice etc.)", for example, the standby state in which the player performs setting (environment setting) such as effect mode, volume, light amount etc. before starting the game I mean. At this time, the environment setting menu (customization menu) is displayed, and it is possible to shift to a selected environment setting screen (environment setting display).

  FIG. 33 (c) shows an example of effect output displayed on the effect display device (60) in the state of "B13: game standby C (setting screen for effect / voice etc)". In the example of FIG. 33 (c), the display shows that the environment setting has been enabled and the customization mode has been entered (here, the display in the region at the upper left corner). Further, from the top, menus of power saving mode on / off, RTC (real time clock) effect on / off, volume adjustment, light amount adjustment, effect frequency adjustment, and customization mode end are arranged in order.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 33 (c), the volume adjustment is performed by using a volume adjustment meter constituted by a plurality of (here, nine) rectangular marks arranged between the characters "small" and "large", It is possible for the player to do while watching. Then, the volume is represented by the number of reversely displayed ones of the rectangular marks in the volume adjustment meter.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 33C, the light amount adjustment (which may be the brightness adjustment) is performed by using a plurality of (five in this case) arranged rectangular marks between the characters “low” and “high”. The player can perform the configured light amount adjustment meter while watching it. Furthermore, the effect frequency adjustment can also be performed while the player looks at the effect frequency adjustment meter configured by a plurality of (here, nine) arranged rectangular marks between the characters "low" and "high". It has become. The light amount and the presentation frequency are represented by the number of the reversely displayed ones of the rectangular marks in each adjustment meter.

  Furthermore, an operation guidance display area 363 appears that indicates that the cursor movement by the cross key (96) and the determination operation by the operation button (22) are possible. In the lower message display area 364, a message display of “Move cursor to“ end of customization mode ”(to exit)” is displayed.

  Here, the transition to such an environment-settable state is performed, for example, when the effect button (the operation button 22 or the like) is operated in the state of the standby screen A shown in FIG. Can. In the following, the screen display in the state of "B13: game standby C (setting screen such as effects and voice)" is displayed as "display screen C", "effect setting screen C", "environment setting screen", "customization screen", etc. It may be called. In the present embodiment, the state in which the “display screen C” is displayed is an aspect of a plurality of game standby states.

  As the touch effect in the state of the “display screen C”, for example, no change appears on the screen display, and it is conceivable to perform audio output such as “do your best”. As described above, by performing the touch effect by the voice output which is another effect element without changing the screen display, it is possible to minimize the influence of the touch effect on the environment setting, and the touch effect on the environment setting. It is possible to prevent such an obstacle. As a result, it is possible for the player to set the environment quickly and accurately while diversifying the touch effect. In addition, it is also conceivable to perform a combination of touch effects by a predetermined light output.

  Although it is possible to perform touch effect by screen display, a display mode (small, thin, etc.) suppressed so as to prevent the player from giving an unexpected impression by combination with the environment setting. It is considered desirable to perform a touch effect by image display in a display mode such as inconspicuous, etc.).

  The aforementioned “B14: game standby (during power saving)” means a standby state while the process for power saving is being performed. As processing for power saving, in the example of “display screen C” in FIG. 33C, it is possible to shift to a state where power saving mode is turned on. In this "B14: game standby (during power saving)", for example, it is possible to illustrate the effect output of an aspect such as displaying the characters of "power saving" flowing on a black background.

  As touch effects in the state of "B14: game standby (during power saving)", for example, the state control during power saving is canceled, and other states from the effect of "B14: game standby (during power saving)" ("standby screen" It can be considered that the transition to the effect relating to the state of B) etc. is made. Furthermore, it is conceivable that touch effect is further executed in the state after transition (in the state of “standby screen B” in this case).

  It is conceivable that the above-mentioned "B2: game in progress state" includes items of "B21: symbol variation state" and "B22: hit in state". Among these, "B21: symbol variation state" can be a state in which the display related to the special symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) or the effect is being varied. As an example of the effect output according to this "B21: symbol variation state", as shown in FIG. 8 (a), all the effect symbols 190a-190b are in a state of change or shown in FIGS. 37 (a) and 37 (b). As such, there can be mentioned such a case that some of the rendering symbols (190a, 190c) are in a stop (temporary stop) state, and the other rendering symbols 190b are in a fluctuating state.

  Here, FIG. 37 (a) shows a state in which normal reach has occurred, and FIG. 37 (b) shows a state in which SP (super or special) reach has occurred. Further, on the screen of SP reach shown in FIG. 37 (b), the left and right effect patterns 190a and 190c are moved to the upper left and upper right portions of the screen and reduced, and a predetermined character appears, and the reduced effect design is displayed. At the top of the area 361, a notice image with the sun mark 381 appears at the bottom of the right end of the screen. The sun mark 381 in the example of FIG. 37 (b) is displayed as the image object of the fluctuation information display 198 in FIG. 37 (a) is moved to change the form.

  As the touch effect in the normal reach shown in FIG. 37A, for example, the one shown in the order of FIGS. 40A and 40B can be exemplified. That is, before touch detection, as shown by a speaker mark 376 emitting a note in FIG. 40A and a lighted lamp mark 378, reach effect by image display and reach sound output are performed.

  Then, when there is touch detection, as shown by the speaker mark 376 in FIG. 40 (b), in addition to the reach sound, an audio output (output of touch sound) meaning that the touch is turned on is performed as an audio output. . As the touch sound, it is possible to exemplify an audio output of a content such as “I can not expect to be able to expect it”, which indicates the hit reliability of the reach fluctuation during execution. Furthermore, as shown in a mode in which the lamp mark 377 related to the touch notification LED is lighted, light output for touch effect is performed.

  Subsequently, as a touch effect during the SP reach shown in FIG. 37B, for example, the player releases his hand from the launch handle (20), and the state change from the state with touch detection to the state without touch (touch detection “ It can be exemplified that the character emits a predetermined line (line) when the state change from “present” to “absent” is detected. In the example of FIG. 37 (b), the balloon area 382 appears, and the character display of "HOT!" Is performed. Furthermore, this touch effect is executed as a highly reliable effect which suggests that the degree of expectation for development of the big hit and the reach is relatively high, and it is easy to appear in the case of the big hit.

  Also, during SP reach, when the player once releases the hand from the release handle 20 and then grips the release handle 20 again, a touch such as the character display of “HOT!” Shown in FIG. It is also possible to execute an effect. In this case, it can be said that the touch effect is performed when the state change from the touch detection “absent” to “present” is detected.

  Further, in "B22: Hit-in-progress state", a hit such as a big hit occurs, and a state can be made while a game relating to the hit is being executed. More specifically, "B22: hit state", for example, after the display of the big hit start demonstration for notifying that the big hit game is started, after the game with the big winning opening open, It is possible to do so until the end of the big hit end demonstration.

  As an example of the effect output according to this "B22: hit and hit state", those shown in FIG. 37 (c) to FIG. 39 can be illustrated. For example, FIG. 38A shows a screen display example at the time of a big hit start demonstration. In this big hit start demonstration, the character "BONUS" indicating the occurrence of big hit and a predetermined character are displayed at the center of the screen, and the symbol combination relating to the big hit generated in the reduction effect symbol display area 361 (here, "333 ") Is displayed. Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 38 (a), the number-of-retentions display area 367 is shown, which distinguishes and shows the number of reservations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 38 (a), as described above, the right-turn guidance display area 383 is displayed as an effect to urge the player to hit the right. The message is displayed.

  Here, with respect to the above-described reduced effect symbol display area 361, during the change of the decorative symbols (effect symbols 190a to 190c), the variable display by the reduced decorative symbol (code omitted) is also performed within the reduced effect symbol display area 361. However, it is possible to prevent the reduced decorative symbol (mini symbol) in the reduced effect symbol display area 361 from reaching the reach state even if the decorative symbol (the effect symbols 190a to 190c) is in the reach state. Furthermore, in this case, all the three reduced decorative symbols in the reduced effect symbol display area 361 can be displayed only in one of the display modes, either all fluctuating or all stopped. It is.

  Furthermore, the reduced decorative symbol in the reduced effect symbol display area 361 is also displayed during a big hit (here, a period including all from a big hit start demonstration to a big hit end demonstration) or during a normal demo display (during standby screen A) Is possible. Then, when the reduced decorative symbol is displayed during the big hit, it is possible to display the reduced decorative symbol (for example, in the same combination) corresponding to the decorative symbol that triggered the big hit. In addition, when the reduced decorative symbol is displayed during the normal demonstration display, the reduced decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol (the effect symbols 190a to 190c) which has been stopped when shifting to the normal demonstration display is displayed. It is possible.

  FIG. 38 (b) shows an example of the in-round screen displayed during the big hit game. In the example of FIG. 38 (b), as described above, the story development in which a predetermined character appears is displayed at the center of the screen, and in the lower part of the screen, in addition to the reduced effect symbol display area 361 and the number-of-holds display area 367 , A round number display area 368 and a count number display area 369 are displayed.

  In (c) and (a) to (c) of FIG. 38, as described above, the hit specific effect screens A to D which are the specific effect outputs of the hit are illustrated. Among these, the hit specific effect screen A shown in FIG. 38 (c) is the effect to be executed in the seventh round of the big hit game, and the entire image of the big hit that occurred from the seventh round to the eighth round An effect of suggesting or notifying (such as whether or not a probability fluctuation game is given after a big hit) is executed.

  In the hit specific effect screen A, images of answer sheets in the test of two characters "Kannazuki Rui" and "Mizuna Haruka" are displayed. Furthermore, although the character "65" is displayed as the score for the test for "Kannazuki Rui" that is one character, the test score is still displayed for "Han Minazuki Haruka" that is the other character. It has not been done. As described above, in the state in which the score of "Mizuna Haruka" is not displayed yet, the player is still notified of the entire image of the generated big hit (for example, whether or not the probability fluctuation game is awarded after the big hit). It is unclear whether or not the player can play the game in a relatively advantageous state.

  And if there is touch detection during this round (7 rounds here), in the example of FIG. 39A, "100" is displayed as the score of the test of "Mizuna Haruka" triggered by touch detection (A hit in a specific effect screen B). As shown in FIG. 39 (a), in the state where "100" is displayed as the score for the test of "Mizuna Haruka", a state in which the player has an expectation for playing a game in a relatively advantageous state and It has become. That is, in the example of FIG. 39 (a), by performing touch effect (effect that “100” score notation appears) accompanying touch detection, an effect is obtained that the player is expected to have an expectation for a gaming state which is advantageous It is done.

  If no numerical value exceeding the score of “Kannazuki” (here “65”) is displayed as the score for the “Minamizuki Haruka” test for this production, the resurrection production etc. are performed thereafter Unless there is no game, the player is notified that the game can not be played in a relatively advantageous state. Moreover, when there is no change in touch detection, the score of the test of "Mizuna Haruka" is not displayed in the said round. It should be noted that it is also possible to perform the expression of the score of "Mizuna Haruka" when the player temporarily releases the shooting handle (20) and changes the touch detection from "present" to "not present". In addition, after changing from touch detection "present" to "none", the user further grasps the firing handle (20) and returns it to the touch detection "present" state, and the score of "minazuki haruka" is exposed. It is also possible to make it

  Subsequently, when the jackpot game of the seventh round is finished, the display of the hit specific effect screen C shown in FIG. 39B is performed, and an effect indicating transition to the eighth round is executed. In the example of FIG. 39 (b), the next round hit of the big hit game is notified by the display of “Round 8” in the effect indicating the story development. These effects are, as described above, “effects that give the expectation of the player to play a game in a relatively advantageous state”, but as this relatively advantageous state and the disadvantageous state, the jackpot As the gaming state transitioning after the end of the game, "advantage state: probability change state / convenient state: non-confirmation state" and "advantage state: power support state / adverse state: non power support state" can be mentioned.

  Also, in addition to the role of suggesting such an advantageous state, it may be a role of suggesting the number of scheduled prize balls that can be acquired in the current jackpot game. That is, if the score is "100", the big hit round may be 10 rounds, and if the score is "65" or less, the big hit round may be 8 rounds.

  Furthermore, it may be considered as a role indicating whether or not a hold list will be made (= whether a big hit hold exists in the pending held during the big hit). In other words, if the score notation is "100", it indicates that the pending Uranso is to be performed, and if the score notation is "65" or less, it indicates that the pending Uranso is not to be performed. As well.

  FIG. 39C shows an example of effect display in the eighth round. In the example shown in FIG. 39 (c), the score of “Kannazuki” is “65”, and the score of “Mizuna Haruka” is “100”. This display mode indicates that the player can play in a relatively advantageous state. It should be noted that in the eighth round, unlike the seventh round, regardless of the presence of a change in touch detection, it suggests the whole image of the big hit (for example, whether or not the probability fluctuation game is given after the big hit, etc.) The display mode will be shown. Thus, by changing the touch detection in the seventh round, it suggests in advance the big picture of the big hit (for example, whether or not the probability fluctuation game is given after the big hit, etc.) than in the case where the touch detection is not changed. Thus, it is possible to provide new playability during a big hit that the game information can be known quickly by the player's handle operation (the presence or absence of touch detection).

Then, when the big hit game of the number of rounds according to the type of big hit is finished, the big hit end demonstration screen as shown in FIG. 37 (c) is displayed. Then, when shifting from the state of the big hit game to the state of the subsequent game, the display of the big hit end demonstration screen ends, and it shifts to the effect display in a mode according to the subsequent game state.
<< C: Special state (state before touch change) >>

  As the above-mentioned "C: special state", "C1: power failure state", "C2: power failure recovery state", "C3: setting change (probability change) in progress", "C4: setting display (1 to 6 ) Can be divided into Among these, “C1: power-off state” means a state in which the power supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 10 (here, particularly the main substrate 102) is lowered and the power-off has occurred.

  Furthermore, items of “C1B1: game standby state (normal demonstration display)” and “C1B12: game in progress state” can be provided in the “C1: power-off state”. Among these, "C1B1: game standby state (normal demonstration display)" can be considered as the same as "B1: game standby state" described above.

  Specifically, even for "C1B1: game standby state (normal demonstration display)", "B11: game standby A (normal demonstration display)" of "B1: game standby state", "B12: game standby B (symbol stop) Medium), “B13: game standby C (setting screen for effect / voice etc.)”, “B14: game standby (during power saving)” can be divided into items. Here, in order to prevent the diagrams from being complicated, illustration of items subdivided for "C1B1: game standby state (normal demonstration display)" is omitted.

  The aforementioned "C1B12: game in progress state" can be considered as the same as the "B2: game in progress state" described above. Specifically, even for "C1B12: game in progress", it is possible to perform item division such as "B21: symbol change state" or "B22: hit in progress" of "B2: game in progress". . Here, in order to prevent the diagram from being complicated, the illustration of the items subdivided for "C1B12: game playing state" is omitted. Then, in various states related to the “C: special state” described here, until the touch detection is performed, or until the predetermined condition (e.g., time elapsed) is satisfied after the touch detection, the various states are performed. The touch effect is not to be executed.

  The above-mentioned "C2: power failure return state" means a state in which the power supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 10 (here, particularly the main substrate 102) is recovered and the power failure has been eliminated. Also in this "C2: power failure return state", items of "C2B1: game standby state (normal demonstration display)" and "C2B2: game in progress state" similar to the above "C1: power failure state" may be provided. it can.

  FIG. 35A shows an example of effect output relating to the state of “C2B1: game standby state (normal demonstration display)”. In FIG. 35 (a), the power failure recovery notification area 365 appears in the upper right corner of the display content (standby screen A) in the above-mentioned "B11: game standby A (normal demonstration display)" and "energized" The character display of "is performed.

  FIG. 35 (b) shows a display example according to the state of "C2B2: game in progress state". In the example of FIG. 35 (b), a central message display area 371 appears in the center of the image where the display areas of the rendering symbols (190a to 190c) appear, and "I'm energized. The game can be displayed. ”Is displayed in three stages. That is, in the example of FIG. 35 (b), the power is cut off during the symbol change, and then the power is restored without the RWM clear operation being performed (there is a power failure return), and the effect pattern (190a to 190c) In the state where the display area is displayed, the screen display shows a state where the message display related to energization is added and resumed.

  As the effect output mode after this, it is possible to resume from the fluctuation display of the effect symbols (190a to 190c) according to the information contents transmitted by the command at the time of the power failure return as described above, with a predetermined stop symbol It is possible to adopt various modes such as resuming from the stop display of the effect symbols (190a to 190c).

  Here, even when there is touch detection, the touch effect in a state related to such a power failure recovery is not performed until the initialization notification performed at the time of power on is finished. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the touch effect from functioning as a device that causes misunderstanding of the game arcade clerk or the player, for example, in response to the initialization notification. In addition, as the initialization notification at the time of power on, it can be exemplified to display the characters “power on. Please wait for a while”.

  The aforementioned “C3: setting change (probability change) in progress” means that the setting is being changed with respect to the setting change described above. Moreover, the above-mentioned "C4: setting display (1 to 6) middle state" means a state where the numerical value of the setting value changed by the operation of the setting change is being displayed. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the setting value changes in the range of 1 to 6, and the setting display 701 displays numerical values corresponding to the setting value.

  As an example of the effect output according to this "C3: setting change (probability change) in progress", as shown in FIG. 36 (b), (c), the characters of "setting being changed" and "setting being displayed" It can illustrate something like a display. In the example of the effect output in FIG. 36 (b), the message “The setting is being changed in the lower message display area 364. After the setting change is completed, the transition to the normal game is made by closing the frame door.” . In the example of the effect output in FIG. 36 (c), the lower central message display area 370 appears at the lower center of the screen, and “in the middle of setting change in progress. The message is displayed.

  "Setting change in progress" means that the current setting value is displayed and the setting can be changed, and "setting in display" indicates the current setting value. However, it means that the setting can not be changed. More specifically, in “displaying setting”, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder (809), and the setting value at that time is displayed on the setting display (807). It is in the state where the processing for can not be performed. This corresponds to the process when it is determined that the RWM clear switch has not been input (S133: NO) in the setting change process shown in FIG.

Note that the touch effect by the image is not performed in any state of “setting change” and “setting display”. Moreover, although the image which shows a state in the said state is displayed in a present Example, you may make it not display an image at all.
<Effect Performed Based on Touch Detection>

Subsequently, as the items of the above-described “effect to be executed based on touch detection”, “D: content of touch effect” and “E: selection criterion of touch effect” can be largely mentioned. Among these items, “D: Content of touch effect” is provided with an item indicating how to perform an effect (touch effect) related to a touch operation through what device. Further, the item "E: selection criterion of touch effect" is provided with an item indicating an item such as what to select a plurality of various touch effects.
<< D: Content of touch effects >>

  The above-mentioned "D: content of touch effect" can be divided into, for example, "D1: output destination of effect", "D2: effect data", and "D3: only change the state". Furthermore, among these, "D11: speaker", "D12: lamp", and "D13: image display device" can be mentioned as "D1: output destination of effect". And "D11: speaker" can be what used the above-mentioned speaker 21, and "D12: lamp" can be what used various LED for presentation. Although the output destinations of the touch effect are listed here, a point as to which combination of output destinations is used in each state of the gaming machine will be described later.

  In addition, “D13: image display device” can use the effect display device 60 (including the case of using a plurality of display bodies). Further, as for "D13: image display device", items of "D131: same as decorative symbol display device" and "D132: different from decorative symbol display device" can be provided.

  Among them, “D131: The same as the decorative symbol display device” is a touch effect by an image using the same display device as the effect display device 60 that displays the above-described effect pattern 190 (FIGS. 8A and 8B). It means to do. As shown in FIG. 34 (b) etc., it can be said that the effect output accompanying the touch detection belongs to the classification of "D131: the same as the decorative symbol display device". In addition, “D132: separate from the decorative symbol display device” is a display device provided separately from the effect display device 60 (for example, a second liquid crystal display device such as one provided in a frame or an LED display device (shown It means that the touch effect is performed using the abbreviation) and the like.

  As for the aforementioned "D2: effect data", items of "D21: shared with other things" and "D22: dedicated" can be provided. Among these, “D21: Shared with other things” means that effect data for touch effect is shared with effect data for effects other than touch effect. Further, “D22: dedicated” means that effect data for touch effect is dedicated and is not shared with effect data for effects other than touch effect.

  Here, “shared with effect data” may include an aspect in which part of effect data is shared and other effect data is not shared. Furthermore, a part of the effect data for touch effect is shared with effect data for another effect, and other effect data for touch effect is exclusively used, and the effect data configuration and effect aspect are also adopted. Is possible.

  For example, the character display of “Welcome” in the touch effect area 362 illustrated in FIG. 34B can be considered to be one using the effect data dedicated to touch effect. Further, for example, in the case where image data used also during symbol variation is used as a touch effect, it can be considered that the effect data is shared.

In the above-mentioned "D3: Perform only state change", for example, when there is touch detection, only the effect mode is changed, and an effect mode in which no dedicated effect is performed as a touch effect, or appearance frequency as a touch effect It is possible to illustrate an effect aspect that does not make few so-called rare characters or scenes appear. And it can also be said that such "D3: perform only a state change" is an example of the production | presentation aspect which made "D2: shared with other things" into "D2: production data."
<< E: Selection criteria for touch effects >>

  Subsequently, the above-mentioned “E: selection criterion of touch effect” will be described. The “E: selection criterion of touch effect” is, in other words, a criterion for selecting what kind of touch effect is to be performed, and in a broad sense includes whether or not to execute the touch effect. And about such "E: selection standard of touch production", it may be divided into "E1: gaming state (at touch timing)", "E2: number of operations", and "E3: customization setting" it can. Among these, "E1: gaming state (at touch timing)" means an effect aspect such that the touch effect to be selected or selected is different according to the gaming state when there is touch detection. There is.

  In addition, as the “E1: gaming state (at touch timing)”, “E11: gaming state associated with popping out” and “E12: gaming state not associated with popping out” can be mentioned. Furthermore, as "E12: gaming state not related to withdrawal", "E121: RTC", "E122: type of demonstration (type of B1)", "E123: abnormal / error state", "E124: effect button" Operation etc. can be illustrated.

  Here, it can be said that the above-mentioned "E11: game state associated with payout" is one of the states into which the above-mentioned "B2: game-in-progress state" (FIG. 22) is subdivided. Specifically, as described above, "B2: playing state" includes items of "B21: symbol fluctuation state" and "B22: hitting state", but in these states, a big hit state, high As the probability state, the power support state, etc., there is included a gaming state in which the number of balls is more than that in the normal state.

  "E121: RTC" related to the above-mentioned "E12: gaming state not related to withdrawal balls" is to select the presence / absence of touch effect execution and the execution content of touch effect based on the RTC (real time clock) which measures real time. For example, when it is determined that touch detection has changed at a timing when the clocking result of the RTC is in a predetermined time zone, this means an effect mode in which a touch effect corresponding to the clocking result is determined. ing. In addition, “E122: type of demonstration (type of B1)” is a type of demonstration performed among various types of demonstration (B11 to B14) in “B1: game standby state” described above Means an effect mode in which the touch effect is determined.

  Furthermore, the above-mentioned "E123: Abnormality / Error State" is what kind of state when abnormality or error is detected when a state that is usually difficult to consider occurs or when touch detection occurs. This means that a touch effect is selected according to whether an error or an error has occurred. Furthermore, it is difficult to consider normally as "E123: abnormal / error state", "E1231: in the touch state from the time of power on" or "E1232: in the non-touch state", for example, winning Unpredictable states can be defined as parameters of the selection criteria. Then, as “a state in which winning is not possible”, touch detection is performed from the starting point to the entrance timing from the starting point to the starting point from the predetermined time after power on and the predetermined time at standby screen display. Can be illustrated.

  Furthermore, when considering maintenance of the gaming machine, etc., when the game arcade clerk opens the glass door (15) and manually operates the start winning opening (62 or 63) directly without operating the launch handle (20). There is. Even in such a case, command transmission from the main board (102) to the sub main board (301) is performed, and effects are executed as in the case where a normal game is performed. Then, when there is touch detection during the variable display of the symbol, the output of the effect corresponding to the state is performed. It can be said that such a state is also included in the above-mentioned "a state in which winning is not possible".

  The above-mentioned “E1231: In the case of a touch state from the time of power on” means a situation where the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is turned on while touching the touch sensor (touch switch 310). And in such a situation, even if there is a touch on the firing handle (20) before the power is turned on, the touch detection is not continued by the power off before the power is turned on, so a special effect output Can be avoided. Alternatively, since such a situation can be considered to be an abnormal power supply startup condition, it is also possible to perform presentation output for notifying that the abnormal power supply startup is made.

  Also, in the case of "E1232: when entering a ball in a non-touch state", entering a ball into any of the ball entrances (winning openings) is detected in a situation where a touch on a touch sensor (touch switch 310) is not detected. It means a situation like that. For example, as such a situation, it can be considered that there is a fraud involving power on. And in such a situation, it is possible to perform presentation output for notifying that it is a power supply start which is not normal.

  The above-mentioned "E124: Operation of production button" means a situation where the operation button 22 is operated and touch detection is performed. For example, the type of touch effect (effect to be executed based on touch detection) depending on whether or not the effect button (operation button 22 or the like) is operated before the touch effect is executed (within a predetermined period of time) It is possible to exemplify a control mode in which the presence or absence of execution is determined.

  More specifically, when the effect button (the operation button 22 or the like) is not operated within a predetermined period (several seconds before) before the touch detection, the touch effect by the image or the voice is performed, and the effect button (the operation button 22 and the like) are operated, it is possible to exemplify a case in which a touch effect is performed only by voice and a case in which a touch effect is not performed.

  The aforementioned “E2: number of operations” means an effect mode in which a touch effect is selected based on an operation when the touch operation is repeated a plurality of times within a predetermined period. Furthermore, “E3: customization setting” means an effect mode in which a touch effect is selected based on the contents of customization performed by the above-described environment setting.

With regard to "effects executed based on touch detection" as described above, when performing various processing based on touch detection, the payout of the winning balls and the symbol game (in the stop result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol) It is also considered preferable to prevent the progress of the game that provides benefits based on the game itself.
<Other processing executed based on touch detection>

Subsequently, as the items of the above-mentioned “other processing executed based on touch detection”, “F: change of effect state”, “G: change of effect”, “H: trigger parameter of touch effect” "Related things" can be mentioned.
<< E: Selection criteria for touch effects >>

Among them, “F: Change in production state” can be determined based on touch detection as “F1: Change in production state” or “F2: No change in production state”. And as an effect mode of "F1: accompanied by change of effect state", an aspect of "F11: complete transition" or "F12: return after a predetermined period of time ※ remain for a predetermined period of time after the operation effect" can be illustrated.

  The above-mentioned “F11: Complete transition” means an effect mode that does not return to the original effect state unless a change lottery for the effect state is made or not after changing the effect state. In addition, the above-mentioned "F12: return after a certain period ※ stays for a certain period after the operation effect" remains in the effect state after the change for a predetermined time after changing the effect state, and when the predetermined time passes It means an effect aspect that returns to the original effect state.

As the above-mentioned "F2: not accompanied by a change in the rendering state", it is possible to exemplify a rendering mode such as "F21: not accompanied by a change in the rendering state in a specific situation" besides the one not accompanied by any change in the rendering state . As this "F21: under a specific situation does not accompany the change of the presentation state", the effect mode is a change of the presentation state even if there is touch detection under a predetermined situation (or selected by lottery). Can be mentioned as such a presentation mode.
<< G: Change of production >>

  The above-mentioned "G: Change in effect" indicates what change in effect is performed based on touch detection, and "G1: Change in effect that does not affect balls" or "G2: It can be divided into "changes in the effects that affect the withdrawal balls". The term "influenced in the withdrawal balls" as used herein refers to, for example, a change in the execution control state of the notification effect which is advantageous to the player, such as the break-in notification, etc. The variation time occupied in a fixed time is different depending on the variation time, and the indirect one is included as in the case where the variation efficiency changes.

  In other words, if the fluctuation time is short on average, the number of fluctuations within a fixed time (for example, one hour) can be relatively increased, and the amount of balls including the time of a general prize or a big hit etc. is theoretically It is thought that it will increase. On the contrary, if the fluctuation time is long on average, it is considered that the number of fluctuations in a fixed time relatively decreases, and the amount of dispensed balls theoretically decreases. The above-mentioned "G1: Change in effect that does not affect ball withdrawal" and "G2: Change in effect that affects ball withdrawal" are determined based on such an idea.

  And "G1: Change in effect not affecting ball out" may be a change that does not change the fluctuation time on the side of sub main substrate 301, but this "G1: Change in effect not affecting ball out" "G11: Change of notice system", "G12: Change of background, characters etc.", "G13: Change of decoration pattern (including those attached to the pattern)" , “G14: Change of hold display” or the like can be considered.

  As the above-mentioned "G11: Change of notice system", change related to "G111: Advance notice", change related to "G112: Change forecast concerned", "G113: Change of selection ratio", "G114: Change of selection content" ※ We can think about things that are not only frequency. Then, the change relating to “G111: preview advance notice” means that the effect of the notice in the change after the change at that time (the change) is selected based on the touch detection. In addition, the change relating to “G112: the change advance notice” means that the effect of the advance notice in the change at that time (the change) is selected based on the touch detection.

  FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b) show examples of effects related to "G112: notice of the change" of "G11: change of notice system". FIG. 41 (a) shows an example of effect display before a notice (touch advance notice) relating to touch effect is executed, and FIG. 41 (b) shows an example of effect display when a touch advance is given. ing. Among them, in FIG. 41 (a), a cat character 384 with a fish during normal reach is made to appear in the central part of the screen as an expectation degree suggestive effect that suggests a possibility of a big hit due to a change during execution. The expectation is different depending on the color and type of the fish that the cat character 384 appeared, and the color and type of the fish according to the progress of the pattern such as the screen switching timing after reaching and the passage of time ( The expectation of the advance notice) is configured to change stepwise.

  In this state, if there is no change in touch detection, the character 384 of the cat remains along the content determined at the time of determination of the advance notice content while moving in the left direction of the screen according to the progression of the above-mentioned symbol Perform expectation degree suggestive rendering to change (or not change) the color of the fish. On the other hand, if there is a change in touch detection after the appearance of the cat character 384, the cat character 384 changes to a monster character 385 (touch change) as shown in FIG. 41 (b), and the changed monster character Change 385 to an effect of moving the screen left direction. At this time, the character is changed to a monster character 385 having a degree of expectation corresponding to the color of the fish with which the cat character 384 is scared (for example, if the color of the fish is blue, the body color is blue beast).

  In addition, according to the progress of the subsequent symbol, if it is planned to change the expectation of the notice (the color of the fish is changed from blue to red, and the reliability for each color will be described later), as a benefit by the change in touch detection When changing the character, it is possible to use a monster character 385 of a color (for example, yellow or red) within the range of the expected degree of change after the change. Further, it is possible to provide a plurality of different types of characters as the cat character 384 and the monster character 385 as the expectation of the advance notice so that the expectation of the jackpot and the reach development may be different.

  For example, as a fish with a cat character 384 covered, a coloring material such as red, yellow, blue, white, etc. is provided, and the above-mentioned expectation degree is sequentially increased from white to red. The monsters are colored in red, yellow, blue, white, etc., and the above-mentioned expectations are increased in order from white to red. In addition to this, the size, type, and fish of cats and monsters It is conceivable that the degree of expectation is represented by a combination of the accompanying item etc. and the like and the color.

  Furthermore, with the touch detection, the color of the fish added by the cat character 384 changes to that of high expectation, or the color of the monster character 385 appeared by the touch detection changes in color after the second touch detection. It is possible to perform presentation control so as to cause It is also possible to adopt an effect control mode in which the color of the monster character 385 changes sequentially by repeating the second and subsequent touch detections. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform the above-described effect control by causing the character 385 of the monster to appear from the beginning without making the character 384 of the cat appear as a preliminary effect.

  In addition, it is also preferable to output characters and sounds that teach that there is a possibility that the character may change or the reliability notification may change when there is a change in touch detection. It is possible to promote experiencing a new game effect by operation. Also, as "G11: Change in notice system", after the notice in progress is changed due to a change in touch detection, after a change in touch detection, a predetermined condition (for example, touch again during reach after the next change) If there is a change in detection, if a big hit is made, or if a transition to a predetermined game stand-by demonstration is made, etc., the effect using the cat character 384 is the effect using the monster character 385 Is changed to In addition, although the thing which has changed the contents from the notice in progress was illustrated based on the change of touch detection, the notice or the suggestion such as "the notice character is changed from the next change" at the time of the change of touch detection It is also possible to configure so as to change the corresponding advance announcement character etc. from the next change.

  Furthermore, the above-mentioned "G113: change of selection ratio" means that effect extraction is performed so as to change the selection frequency of various effects. In addition to the selection frequency (selection ratio) of various effects, “G114: Change in selection content not only frequency” is an effect such as a background or character used for effect on the side of the sub main board 301 It means that the content (the effect component) is changed based on the touch detection in the range in which the change time does not change. This is, in other words, a change that maintains the change time to "the change in advance notice (specific notice) due to the details of the effect" determined by the sub control when executing the same change pattern It can also be said.

  (A) to (d) of FIG. 42 schematically show an example of a selection table related to the notice effect before and after the touch change. Among these, FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b) show a selection table according to the notice effect (the change notice effect) for the change result (the result of the lottery). (D) has shown the selection table which concerns on prior notice production (pre-reading advance notice production) about the fluctuation result (the result of a success or failure lottery) after the next time. Also, FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b) show a selection table for a predetermined notice group (here, notice group α), and FIGS. 42 (c) and 42 (d) show other predetermined tables. The selection table for the notice group (in this case, notice group β) is shown.

  Further, FIG. 42 (a) shows an example of a selection table for notice effect in each variation before touch detection, and FIG. 42 (b) shows a selection table for notice effect in each variation after touch detection. An example is shown. Similarly, FIG. 42 (c) shows an example of a selection table related to pre-reading notice effect before touch detection, and FIG. 42 (d) shows an example of a selection table concerning pre-reading notice effect after touch detection .

  Here, in order not to make the explanation complicated, each notice in FIGS. 42 (a) to (d) is any one of notices A to D, and these notices may not be made. It is assumed. Furthermore, the symbols “A” to “D” of notices A to D do not indicate the difference between the contents of notices, and in order to distinguish the types of notices in the respective selection tables of FIGS. 42 (a) to (d). belongs to.

  For example, the use image and presentation mode of notice A shown in FIG. 42 (a) are defined not to be the same as the use image and presentation mode of notice A shown in FIGS. 42 (b) to (d) in principle. It is done. The same applies to the notices C to D. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the same use image or effect mode may be adopted between notices in which the symbols (A to D) are the same in each selection table.

  Further, taking the chart of FIG. 42A as an example, columns (rows) of 0 to 5, 10 to 30, 31 or more are provided as fluctuation pattern numbers. And about notice A, the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation pattern numbers 0 to 5 is selected 40%, the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation pattern numbers 10 to 30 is 40%, and the fluctuation patterns of fluctuation pattern number 31 or more are selected at a ratio of 20% It is supposed to be.

  Also, for notice B, the variation pattern of variation pattern numbers 0 to 5 is selected at a rate of 14%, the variation pattern of variation pattern numbers 10 to 30 is 35%, and the variation patterns of variation pattern number 31 or more are 35%. It is supposed to be. Furthermore, for notice C, the variation patterns of variation pattern numbers 0 to 5 are selected at a rate of 1%, the variation patterns of variation pattern numbers 10 to 30 at 10%, and the variation patterns of variation pattern number 31 or more at 44%. It is supposed to be.

  Further, for notice D, the selection ratio is 0% for all of the fluctuation patterns of fluctuation pattern numbers 0 to 5, fluctuation patterns of 10 to 30 and fluctuation patterns of 31 or more. It is supposed not to be Furthermore, as for the ratio at which no advance notice is given, the variation pattern of variation pattern numbers 0 to 5 is 45%, the variation pattern of variation pattern numbers 10 to 30 is 15%, and the variation patterns of variation pattern number 31 or more are 1%. There is.

  The relationship between the fluctuation pattern, the advance notice, and the selection ratio as described above is determined as follows. That is, here, 100 fluctuation patterns in which the fluctuation pattern number is 0 to 99 are provided. The above-described fluctuation pattern numbers 0 to 5, 10 to 30, 31 or more are included in the fluctuation patterns of the 0th to 99th.

  Here, the fluctuation patterns of fluctuation pattern numbers 0 to 5 are non-reach fluctuation which is a fluctuation that does not become reach (for example, the fluctuation pattern random number in FIG. 11A is 15000 to 49999 of 5000 to 49999). The variation patterns of variation pattern numbers 6 to 9 are related to special non-reach variation in which the above-mentioned notice group α is not suitable although the non-reach variation is the same (for example, the variation pattern random number in FIG. It is 12500-14999 of -49999). Furthermore, the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 10 to 30 are those related to reach fluctuation (here, referred to as “weak SP reach”) which is a relatively low hit reliability (for example, in FIG. 11A). The fluctuation pattern random number is 5000 to 12499) out of 5000 to 49999, and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern number 31 to 49 is an off-leach reach fluctuation with a relatively large hit reliability (here, "strong SP reach" 11 (for example, the fluctuation pattern random number in FIG. 11A is 0 to 4999).

  In addition, the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern numbers 50 to 99 correspond to the hitting fluctuation. And, the variation pattern numbers 50 to 99 are the ones for reach variation that can not be distinguished from the variation pattern numbers 10 to 49 and the middle stages, and the specials of hitting determination different from the variation pattern numbers 10 to 49. It includes fluctuations and Here, notice A is a "weak notice" with relatively low expectation of big hit, notice B is a "medium notice" with high expectation of big hit, and notice C is a big hit so that the explanation will not be complicated. It assumes that it is "weak notice" with a relatively high degree of expectation.

  Based on these facts, the selection ratio of the notice group α according to the selection table shown in FIG. 42 (a) will be described. According to the example shown in FIG. 42 (a), before the change processing of the notice group selection ratio by touch detection, the fluctuation (the corresponding fluctuation) at that time is a symbol based on the fluctuation pattern 5 (the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation pattern number 5) In the case of fluctuation (non-reach symbol fluctuation), the selection ratio of the notice group α is such that the probability of executing notice A is 40%, the probability of executing notice B is 14%, and the probability of executing notice C is 1% The probability of not executing the notice of the notice group α is 45%.

  Similarly, when the variation is a symbol variation of weak SP reach based on the variation pattern 30 (the variation pattern number is 30), the selection ratio of the notice group α has a 40% probability of executing notice A, notice The probability of executing B is 35%, the probability of executing notice C is 10%, and the probability of not performing notice of notice group α is 15%.

  Similarly, when the change is a pattern change (per change) based on the change pattern 31 (strong SP reach) or the change pattern 50, the selection ratio of the notice group α has a probability of executing notice A 20%, notice B Is 35%, the probability of executing the notice C is 44%, and the probability of not performing the notice of the notice group α is 1%.

  In the example of FIG. 42 (a), since the selection ratio of the variation pattern is determined in this manner, the notice A of the notice group α is the case where the variation pattern of non-reach out of bounds having the highest selectivity is selected. Even if it is likely to be implemented (40% when out of reach). For this reason, it can be said that the notice A of the notice group α is a notice whose expectation is extremely low although the degree of expectation of the hit is higher than that in the case of no notice.

  On the other hand, for example, the notice C of the notice group α is extremely unlikely to be executed with the most selective non-reaching out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (1% at the time of non-reaching out), and in strong SP reach or hit. Because the notice is easy to be executed, it can be said that it is a notice with high expectation of hitting.

  The variation patterns with variation pattern numbers 0 to 49 have different selection rates at the time of disconnection. For example, the rate at which one of the variation patterns 0 to 5 is selected is 80% at the time of removal, and the rate at which one of the variation patterns 6 to 9 is selected is 10 at the time of removal %. Furthermore, the rate at which one of the variation patterns 10 to 30 is selected is 9% at the time of disconnection, and the rate at which one of the variation patterns 31 to 49 is selected is 1% at the time of disconnection is there. Moreover, it is only a hit time that one of the variation patterns 50 to 99 is selected.

  Therefore, assuming that the probability of hitting is 1/100 for the convenience of description here, the possibility that notice A appears at the time of losing is 80% of the selected ratio for fluctuation patterns 0 to 5 The product of 40% based on the table of FIG. 42 (a) results in 32% (= 80% × 40%). In addition, for the variation patterns 10 to 30, the product of 9% of the selected ratio and 40% based on the table of FIG. 42 (a) results in 3.6% (9% × 40%). Furthermore, for variation patterns 31 to 49, the product of 1% of the selected ratio and 20% based on the table in FIG. 42 (a) results in 0.2% (= 1% × 20%). .

  On the other hand, the probability that notice A will appear when hit is 0.2% (the product of 1% of the ratio selected for fluctuation patterns 50 to 99 and 20% based on the table of FIG. 1% × 20%). From these facts, the rate at which notice A is executed for one change is 36% (= 32% + 3.6% + 0.2% + 0.2%).

  Thus, since the rate at which the notice A is selected at the time of hitting is only 0.2%, the reliability at the time when the notice A appears (the point at which it will be hit or missed) is 0 .4% (= 0.2% + 0.2%) or so.

  On the other hand, after touch detection, the selection table shown in FIG. 42 (b) is used. In this selection table, for notice A, the fluctuation patterns of fluctuation pattern numbers 0 to 5 are 40%, the fluctuation patterns of fluctuation pattern numbers 10 to 30 are 0%, and the fluctuation patterns of fluctuation pattern numbers 31 or more are 20%. It is to be selected.

  Also, for notice B, the variation pattern of variation pattern numbers 0 to 5 is selected at a rate of 0%, the variation pattern of variation pattern numbers 10 to 30 at 70%, and the variation pattern of variation pattern number 31 or more at a rate of 9%. It is supposed to be. Furthermore, with regard to notice C, the selection ratio is 0% for all of the fluctuation patterns of fluctuation pattern numbers 0 to 5, fluctuation patterns 10 to 30, and fluctuation patterns 31 or more, and thus selection is not performed. It has become.

  In addition, for notice D, the variation patterns of variation pattern numbers 0 to 5 are selected at a rate of 0%, the variation patterns of variation pattern numbers 10 to 30 at 29%, and the variation patterns of variation pattern number 31 or more at 70%. It is supposed to be. Furthermore, as for the ratio at which no advance notice is given, the fluctuation patterns of fluctuation pattern numbers 0 to 5 are 59%, the fluctuation patterns of fluctuation pattern numbers 10 to 30 are 1%, and the fluctuation patterns of fluctuation pattern numbers 31 or more are 1%. There is.

  Then, for example, when the notice B appears in the fluctuation pattern No. 10 or more, the benefit over the reach is determined for the player, and the reliability is higher than that of the notice B (strong SP reach or proportion selected at hit) The notice D is newly selectable as an effect. For this reason, after touch detection, it is possible to change the content and reliability of various types of notices selected in the notice group α compared to before touch detection.

  In the pre-read notice group β, as in the notice group α shown in FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), the selection ratio can be made different before and after touch detection (FIG. 42 (c), (D)). Further, in the case of the below-described pre-reading notice shown in FIGS. 42C and 42D, the sub main board is based on the pre-reading command (having pre-reading code information) serving as advance notification information from the main board (102). The fluctuation pattern number is specified by the CPU 521 of 301.

  The selection ratio described here is designed by the designer in an optimal balance based on the concept of how to set the reliability of various types of advance notices, and is limited to the exemplified values and balances. It is not a thing. For example, although the numerical values described here are changed, it is also possible to make the magnitude relationship of the numerical values the same as those described here.

  The aforementioned “G12: Change of background, character, etc.” means that the background, character, etc. is changed based on touch detection with respect to effects other than those of the notice system. In addition, the above-mentioned "G13: modification of the decoration pattern (including those attached to the pattern)" means that the effect pattern 190 is made different from those of designs and classifications different from those based on touch detection. Do. Furthermore, the “part attached to the symbol” may include a portion other than the element symbol that is the symbol element rendering symbol described above (element symbol that is the non-symbol element rendering symbol) or the like.

  The above-mentioned "G14: Change of hold display" refers to the hold display in the first hold number display portion 196 and the second hold number display portion 197 shown in FIGS. 8A, 8B, 33B, etc. , Which means to change based on touch detection. It is conceivable to change various display modes such as design and arrangement as the change of the hold display (for example, from the round design in FIG. 8A to the star design in FIG. 33). In addition, changing the arrangement of the first holding number display unit 196 and the second holding number display unit 197 is also conceivable.

  Examples of the above-mentioned "G2: Change in effects that affect ball withdrawal" include "G21: Change in fluctuation pattern (variation time)" and "G22: Execution of notification (function of AT system)" . Among these, as "G21: change of variation pattern (variation time)", "G211: change of selection ratio" or "G212: change of selection content * not only frequency" can be considered.

  The above-mentioned “G211: Change of selection ratio” means that fluctuation pattern extraction that changes the selection frequency is performed for various fluctuation patterns that define fluctuation time. In addition, “G212: Change not only in the selection contents * frequency,” changes not only the selection frequency of various fluctuation patterns but also the fluctuation time itself to be selected, and as described above, the selection frequency of various effects (selection In addition to the ratio), on the side of the sub main substrate 301, it is possible to change the contents of the presentation (representation component) such as the background and characters used for the presentation based on touch detection to change the fluctuation time. I mean. This is, in other words, a change that changes the fluctuation time to “a change in notice (specific notice) caused by the details of presentation” determined by the sub control when executing the same change pattern. It can also be said that there is.

  The above-mentioned "G22: Execution of notification (function of AT system)" means that a predetermined notification is performed based on touch detection, and for example, an AT that is often adopted in a reel-type game machine It is conceivable to use touch detection in combination with game characteristics similar to (assist time).

More specifically, for example, an operation timing of the touch sensor (touch switch 310) is presented in the effect display device 60, and a touch generation is performed at the timing to illustrate the development of the effect. Furthermore, the notification of the launch direction (such as right or left strike) advantageous to the player, the notification of the launch timing (such as “hit!” Or “stop!”) Advantageous to the player, or a combination thereof or It is possible to exemplify a system that informs the combination of these and temporal elements (such as “right-handed start!” After 秒 seconds).
<< H: Regarding trigger parameters for touch effects >>

  Among the processes executed based on touch detection, the aforementioned “H: processing related to trigger parameters for touch effect” includes “H1: processing of clock timer (addition, subtraction, clearing, etc.)”, “H2: touch detection The processing of the number (addition, subtraction, clearing), "H3: other", etc. can be considered. The “trigger parameter” referred to here means a parameter (element of a predetermined variable) which is calculated or set in response to touch detection and is associated with the execution of the touch effect.

  More specifically, the above-mentioned "H1: processing of time counting timer (addition, subtraction, clearing, etc.)" is a time counting timer used to determine whether or not to enable touch effect execution or effect trigger (touch effect Means the process of clocking time related to the time of day, and specifically, it is the timer value that determines whether or not to consider the next touch detection as an effective execution trigger of the effect triggered by the touch detection. It means something like addition, subtraction, or clearing. For example, as an example corresponding to the "specific condition" shown in "Proper performance execution" described later (Fig. 24 (a), (b)), the operation of the production button (operation button 22 etc.) In this case, the processing related to the time after the operation of the effect button (the operation button 22 etc.) corresponds to the “H1: processing of the clock timer (addition, subtraction, clearing, etc.)”. It becomes a thing.

  The above-mentioned “H2: Process of touch detection number (addition, subtraction, clearing)” performs processing relating to the number of touch detection in a predetermined period, and performs addition, subtraction, clearing, etc. It means something. Also, the above “H3: Other” is a trigger parameter other than “H1: Processing of clock timer (addition, subtraction, clearing etc.)” and “H2: Processing of touch detection number (addition, subtraction, clearing)”. It means what can be

  For example, in the case of changing the effect state or the effect / variation pattern in “F: change in effect state” or “G: change in effect”, the CPU 521 of the sub main board 301 performs the effect at that time. The process of recognizing and grasping the selected state and updating the information related to the effect is executed, but the process necessary for grasping and updating these is exemplified as corresponding to “H3: Other”. Can.

  More specifically, for example, as the control mode included in the above-mentioned "F21: does not change the rendering state under a specific situation", it is assumed that the touch rendering is not performed in the four variations after the big hit end. And in such a thing, processing which checks the number of changes after the big hit end can be illustrated as what corresponds to "H3: others".

  In addition, in the gaming machine of the control aspect which does not execute touch production during the design fluctuation and the specified production period, when touch detection is done, the situation where it is possible to execute touch production (the situation which limits execution) It is also possible to illustrate the process of confirming whether it is.

In addition, with regard to the "specific conditions" shown in "Proper performance execution" described later (FIGS. 24A and 24B), the rendering is executed when the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent". In addition, when "specific conditions" is "under the situation that is hit", the process to determine whether or not the currently running symbol variation is hit is referred to here as "H3: Other It corresponds to ".
<Permit permission / regulatory condition>
<< J: Setting of permission timing >>

  Then, the above-mentioned "effect permission / control conditions" are demonstrated. First of all, even if a change in touch detection is made under each gaming situation, the "permission of permission / restriction condition" not only immediately executes the effect based on the touch detection but also an effect based on the touch detection Means the conditions used to decide whether or not to allow That is, it is defined that the touch effect is to be executed as the gaming state, and the effect is to be executed when there is a change in touch detection in a state where the main effect permission / restriction condition is satisfied. It has become. And as an item of "reproduction permission / regulatory condition", "J: setting of permission timing" can be mentioned, and this "J: setting of permission timing" is a predetermined effect or game state triggered by touch detection. It means such things as the permission conditions and the restriction conditions are lifted. Furthermore, this "J: setting of permission timing" can be classified into "J1: internal timer" and "J2: compound with other elements".

  Among these, as "J1: internal timer", one having "J11: characteristic in time (compared to variable / one variation)" can be illustrated. For example, it is possible to provide a management timer for managing the executability (permission) of the touch effect, and to call this management timer an "internal timer". This management timer (internal timer) can be considered to be included in the clock timer in the aforementioned “H1: Processing of clock timer (addition, subtraction, clear, etc.)”. Then, using this management timer (internal timer), manage whether to execute the touch effect (also referred to as “permitted or not” or “presence”) or to regulate the touch effect (also referred to as “constraint”). Is possible.

  Further, regarding this internal timer (management timer), in addition to the one that performs management for a fixed time, a "variable" one can be considered. As this "variable" one, for example, one that changes the time set for performing the touch effect according to some condition can be considered. And as "something conditions", the time which permits execution of touch production differs at the time of the 1st detection, and the time of the 2nd detection, etc. can be illustrated.

  In addition, assuming that there is “comparison with 1 fluctuation”, it is possible to be selected in the gaming machine as a timer (time) for allowing touch effects, or the fluctuation time that can be selected at that time is longer than the fluctuation pattern having the longest Also, it can be exemplified that a long time is set. And it can be said that determination of the presentation output aspect based on these touch detections makes touch detection the control element of the permission and control which concern on the output of a presentation.

  In this case, it is possible to optimize the opportunity of the touch effect execution. That is, in the recent symbol game, symbol variation (pattern variation with a high degree of expectation such as "Super 1" as shown in FIG. 11) having a duration of, for example, 180 seconds is generally performed as the longest variation time. On the other hand, if there is no time longer than this time for which the execution of the touch effect is permitted, there is a risk that the opportunity to execute the provided touch effect will be lost. Therefore, based on the relationship with the time of one change, by allowing execution of the touch effect after a lapse of time shorter than the above long time (such as 180 seconds), the opportunity to perform the touch effect is appropriately set. It is possible to make effective use of touch effects.

  The aforementioned "J2: Composite with other elements" is "J21: Presence of operation of presentation button", "J22: Presence of twist operation of handle", "J23: Command from main board", "J24: Game It can be divided into items of "machine status (condition)", and it means that touch effects are permitted or restricted in combination with one or more of these elements. Among these, “J21: Presence / absence of operation of effect button” determines conditions for permitting or restricting predetermined effects of combining the operation of the operation button (effect button) 22 and the touch operation. It means something like that to be an element to do.

  The above-mentioned "J22: presence or absence of twist operation of the handle" sets the combination of the twist operation of the launch handle 20 and the touch operation as a condition for permission and restriction of the effect, "J23: command from main board" is the main It means that the reception of a predetermined command from the substrate 102 to the sub main substrate 301 and the combination of the touch operation are conditions.

  As the above-mentioned "J24: status (status) of gaming machine", "J241: special status such as abnormality", "J242: gaming standby status", "J243: specific effect status (divided into subdivisions)" be able to. Among them, “J241: Special condition such as abnormality” is a state where an error has been detected or that there is touch detection in a special situation in which a situation that is difficult to occur in a normal game has occurred. It means something like the condition.

  The above-mentioned "J242: game standby state" means, for example, that there is touch detection in each state in the above-mentioned "B1: game standby state" as a condition for permission or restriction of effect . In addition, the above-mentioned "J243: specific effect state (divided)" means that there is touch detection during various effect states as a condition for permission or restriction of effect. ing.

  For example, in the case of "B1: standby state (normal demonstration display)", effects are produced according to the presentation state of "B11: game standby A (normal demonstration display)" to "B14: game standby (during power saving)" Exemplifies what permits or restricts In addition, in the case of "B2: in-game state", depending on the production state (point in which production mode is staying with "B21: symbol fluctuation state"), it is possible to perform or permit the production It can be illustrated. Furthermore, in the case of "B22: Hit", according to the hit state (representation pattern), permission or restriction of the effect is performed, or depending on the probability variation or the number of normal hits or the number of consecutive stays. It is possible to exemplify what permits or restricts the effect.

  In addition, "permission" and "restriction" which were demonstrated here are not restricted to permissing (all permission) or restricting (all restriction) about all the elements on presentation. For example, depending on the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 10, one of a plurality of types of effects that may be executed as a touch effect is permitted (partially permitted) or regulated (partially regulated) It is also possible to

  It is also possible to combine this "J2: composite with other elements" with, for example, the aforementioned "J1: internal timer". In this case, before the predetermined elapsed time reaches a predetermined time (for example, about 20 seconds) in the game standby state ("B11: game standby A (normal demonstration display)", etc.) effects such as the operation button (22) Even when the operation unit is operated, if the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time (such as 20 seconds), the output of effects (such as the standby screen B) triggered by the subsequent touch detection is permitted. it can. Here, if the time required to execute the corresponding touch effect is, for example, 6 seconds, the above-mentioned "predetermined time" executes the touch effect for 6 seconds a predetermined number of times (for example, a plurality of times such as 3 times) It is conceivable to set a possible period (about 20 seconds here).

Furthermore, the internal timer is activated regardless of whether it returns by a normal return operation (return in the case of NO in S111 or S113) or return by a specific return operation (return operation in the case of YES in S113) It is also possible to set the time-counting time to a predetermined value (such as 20 seconds which is the above-mentioned "predetermined time").
<Other 1>
<< K: Change in touch state >>

  Subsequently, as the item of “other 1” described above, “K: change in touch state”, “L: method of touch detection”, and “M: transmission method to sub” may be mentioned. Among these, "K: change in touch state" means that the presence or absence of a touch on the touch sensor (touch switch 310) is utilized for game control. Then, for "K: change in touch state", "K1: non-touch タ ッ チ touch" and "K2: touch タ ッ チ non-touch" can be considered.

Among these, “K1: non-touch → touch” means changing from the non-touch state where the touch sensor (310) is not touched to the touch state where the touch sensor (310) is touched. Further, “K2: touch タ ッ チ non-touch” means changing from the state of touch touching the touch sensor (310) to the state of non-touch not touching the touch sensor (310).
<< L: Touch detection method >>

The above-mentioned “L: method of touch detection” means that the difference in what kind of manner of touch detection is used is utilized for game control. And about "L: method of touch detection", "L1: only touch" and "L2: including handle operation" can be considered. Among these, “L1: touch only” means that game control is performed on the condition that only the operation to the touch sensor (310) is performed. Further, “L2: handle operation is included” means that game control is performed on condition of both the operation to the touch sensor (310) and the rotation operation of the launch handle 20. When “L1: touch only” is adopted for the pachinko gaming machine 10 among them, the touch detection process can be easily performed. In addition, when “L2: Handle operation is included” is adopted, for example, it is possible to prevent the touch effect from being performed when the player accidentally touches the launch handle (20), which is more accurate. In addition, it is possible to take advantage of the player's intention to start playing the game and use it for subsequent processing.
<< M: How to send to sub >>

  The above-mentioned “M: transmission method to sub” means a matter such as when the touch signal detected by the main substrate 102 is to be transmitted to the sub main substrate 301. And about "M: transmission method to sub", "M1: principle always transmission (main サ ブ sub)" and "M2: grasp the situation and transmit (main サ ブ sub)" can be considered.

Among them, “M1: principle always transmit (main サ ブ sub)” applies the touch signal (including the signal representing the content of the touch signal) from the main substrate 102 as long as there is no special circumstances such as communication abnormality. This means that transmission to the substrate 301 is always performed. Also, “M2: grasp the situation and transmit (main サ ブ sub)”, the main substrate 102 determines the situation at that time, and after grasping the situation, a touch signal (predetermined case) This means that the main substrate 102 transmits a signal representing the content of the touch signal to the sub main substrate 301.
<Utilization form concerning change of touch state>
<< Come on the production run >>

  Next, the result of having examined the specific form for utilizing the change of a touch state for presentation control is demonstrated. FIGS. 24A and 24B show, as a list, the pros and cons of the effect execution in the case where a change in the touch state is detected in various gaming states. Here, "approval of production" can be paraphrased as, for example, "presence or absence of production" or "presence or absence of production".

  For example, FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b) show “changed state”, “number of changes, etc.”, “target”, and “state of gaming machine” from the left of the chart. Of these, the upper row in the "changed state" represents the case where the touch detection changed from the "non-existent" state to the "present" state, and the lower row represents the touch detection from the "available" state to the "non-existent" It shows the case of changing to the state.

  The above-mentioned "number of changes etc." represents an item about the number of state changes of the touch signal. And "the first time" represents the first change of the touch signal, and "the predetermined time or later" represents the second and subsequent state change. Furthermore, "specific conditions" represents specific conditions other than the number of changes, and it is indicated that the operation of the operation button 22 or the like has been performed as an example.

  Here, as the “state change” or the “change”, for example, the change of the touch signal from the on state (or off state) to the off state (or on state) can be exemplified. In addition, the intensity (for example, the height of the voltage) of the touch signal may be changed stepwise, and may be referred to as “state change” or “change” including the step change. In addition, each item such as “first time” in “the number of changes etc.” is changed when the touch detection changes from the “no” state to the “presence” state, and the touch detection is “non” from the “presence” state The same applies to all cases where the state changes to "."

  As the above-mentioned "object", "image", "voice" and "lamp" can be considered. The contents of these items can be the same as “D13: Image display device”, “D11: Speaker”, and “D12: Lamp” of “D1: Output destination of effect” shown in FIG. . Furthermore, the items of “image”, “voice”, and “lamp” are commonly determined for each item such as “first time” in “number of changes, etc.”.

  As described above, in the change in touch detection, the change in the state in which the player holds the launch handle 20 is released and the state in which the player holds the launch handle 20 from the state in which the launch handle 20 is not held There are two cases of changes, and, for example, the operation may be performed multiple times during a fixed period such as during the same gaming state. Furthermore, as in the situation where the production button (operation button 22 etc.) is operated, the specific condition is satisfied at a timing that can not be predicted completely, and the touch detection is performed before or after the occurrence of the condition where the specific condition is satisfied. May change. For this reason, in the following, depending on each state of the gaming machine, the change mode of the touch detection, whether or not under the specific conditions, etc., the touch effect is determined about the presence or absence of execution and the contents of execution, see FIG. While explaining.

  FIG. 24 shows that in each state of the gaming machine (shown as “state of gaming machine”), the touch detection changes under a predetermined condition under normal conditions (non-specific conditions) and under the specific conditions. Is a diagram of the concept of touch effect to be executed when As the above-mentioned "state of gaming machine", "setting change relation", "during game waiting", "during symbol variation" shown in FIG. 24 (a), "hit" shown in FIG. In the case of positive change (power support). Among these, “setting change in progress” and “setting in display” related to the setting change described above are defined in the “setting change relationship”. The above-mentioned “setting change in progress” represents a state in which the setting change is started and the setting is changed, and “in setting display” represents a state in which the setting value is displayed.

Here, in the examples shown in FIGS. 24A and 24B, the symbols “o”, “Δ”, and “x” are used. Among these, the symbol "o" represents "to perform" the effect by the device listed as "object". Furthermore, the symbol “△” “makes the effect of the device of“ object ”to be performed (includes the concept of performing under a certain condition, performing only with a part of the device, etc.)” The symbol “x” represents “do not execute”. Here, the “constant condition” associated with the symbol “Δ” represents, for example, limitation to the case of winning according to a lottery with a predetermined probability. Then, as a lottery with a predetermined probability, in addition to a lottery winning with a common probability regardless of the set value, a lottery with a different winning ratio for each set value (FIG. 12) can be illustrated.
<<< Setting change relation >>>

  Then, as shown in FIG. 24 (a), when the state of the gaming machine is in the “setting change relationship” (either in the “setting change” or in the “setting display” state), the touch detection is “for the first time” When it changed from "no" to "presence" or "presence" to "no" (in the case of "first time"), a part of LED ("lamp") provided on the gaming machine frame or game board was used The touch effect is executed (indicated by “Δ”), and the touch effect by the liquid crystal display (“image”) and the speaker (“voice”) is controlled not to be performed. On the other hand, after the change of the touch state is detected for the first time, if the change of the touch state is detected again (in the case of showing as "predetermined number of times"), the touch effect by "image" and "voice" only Also, the touch effect using a part of the "lamp" is configured not to be executed (indicated by "x"). Furthermore, under "specific conditions", such as during setting change or after operation of a rendering button (such as operation button 22), touch rendering is performed even when a change in the touch state is detected for the first time. Control not to be performed (indicated by "x"). That is, in the setting change state, regardless of the change mode of the detection state of the touch detection means and / or the detection mode of the rotational operation detection means, the output of the effect based on the detection by the touch detection means is not performed It is possible.

As described above, in the example of FIG. 24A, in the case of a state regarding setting change such as “during setting change” or “during setting display”, whether the touch effect is not executed even if the touch detection is performed Even if it is performed, only the effect of notifying touch detection is performed. By doing this, the touch effect does not interfere with the setting confirmation or the setting change operation, and it is possible to confirm whether the touch detection is properly performed even during the setting change operation or the like.
<<< game waiting>>

  Among the above-mentioned "states of gaming machines", "during game standby" includes "demo screen", "adjustment screen", "variation standby screen", "initialization notification (medium)", and "error notification (medium)" Can be mentioned. Among them, the "demo screen" is the display state of the aforementioned "B11: game standby A (normal demo display)", and the "adjustment screen" is the "B13: game standby C (effect The display state of "setting screen such as voice etc." and the "variation standby screen" correspond to the display state of "B12: game standby B (during symbol stop)".

  In addition, "initialization notification" in the above-mentioned game standby means that it is in the period of the initialization notification, and the above-mentioned "C2B1: power failure return state and game standby state" and subsequent initialization The notification corresponds to the state during the execution period.

  Further, the above-mentioned "abnormal notification" in the game standby state is called an error ("restorable error", etc.) that can return the control state of the gaming machine to the normal state without performing the power supply restart if the error is released. It means that the notification about “possible” is being made, and corresponds to the above-mentioned “B1: game standby state” and the state during the execution period of the notification of the returnable error.

  As shown in FIG. 24 (a), in the game standby mode displaying the "demo screen", when the touch detection changes from "none" to "presence" for the first time, "image", "voice", Control is performed to execute touch effect using “lamp” (indicated by “o”). In addition, after the touch detection changes from "none" to "presence" for the first time, when a change in the touch state is detected again (in the case of a predetermined number of times or more), constant conditions (for example, for each setting value) Control is performed to execute touch effect by "voice" (indicated by ".DELTA.") Based on a lottery result or the like based on the provided winning ratio. Furthermore, under "specific conditions", such as after operation of the production button is performed during game standby displaying the "demo screen", the touch detection changes from "none" to "presence" for the first time. Even in the normal case, the touch effect using "image" and "lamp" is not performed, and control is performed so as to execute only the touch effect by voice (indicated by ".DELTA.").

  On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent", control is performed so as not to execute the touch effect even when the change is "first time" (indicated by "x") . In addition, under specific conditions such as when touch detection changes from "present" to "absent" more than a predetermined number of times (for example, two or more times) or after an operation of a presentation button is performed during game standby In the same way as when the touch detection changes from "none" to "presence", the effects of "image", "voice" and "lamp" are controlled not to be executed (indicated by "x") .

  As described above, in the example of FIG. 24A, when the demonstration screen is displayed, the touch effect is executed when the touch detection that occurs when the game is ended changes from "present" to "absent" On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from "none" to "presence", the touch effect is configured to be performed, and an unauthorized device or the like for forcibly enabling the touch detection (for example, the handle and the game island When the devices connecting the ground wires to each other so as to be electrically connected to the metal of the device are removed, it is possible to preferably prevent the touch effect from being performed. Furthermore, only when touch detection changes from "none" to "presence" under predetermined conditions, by performing touch effect different from normal, it is configured to be able to further improve the game entertainment. Further, in particular, in the case of using touch effects as effects at the start of the game, when the player indicates the intention of the game by operating the effect button or the like, the need for the player is eliminated by omitting the touch effects. It is possible to suppress the execution of non-following effects.

  Although details will be described later, in the example of FIG. 24A, the demonstration screen display is executed when a predetermined time has passed after symbol stop, in other words, when a predetermined time has passed since the game was stopped. Since this is a display screen (such as “standby screen A” in FIG. 33A), the situation where touch detection changes from “present” to “absent” is extremely limited. For this reason, the meaning of the original touch effect such as indicating that the player is in the state of starting the game is never removed by not executing the touch effect in the situation.

  Furthermore, on the “adjustment screen” in the “playing standby” state, when the touch detection changes from “no” to “on” for the first time, the touch effect using the “image” is not performed, but the “voice” Control to execute a touch effect using "" and a touch effect using a part of "lamp". In addition, after the touch detection changes from "none" to "presence" for the first time, if a change in the touch state is detected again (in the case of a predetermined number of times or more), if only the touch effect using the "image" Also, control is performed not to execute touch effects using "voice" and "lamp". In addition, during the display of the “adjustment screen” under specific conditions such as after the production button is operated, “voice” which is usually performed even when touch detection changes from “no” to “presence” for the first time Control to not execute all touch effects including touch effects using “lamp”. On the other hand, on the "adjustment screen" in the "playing standby" state, when the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent", whether or not the change is the first time, or the change is under the specific condition Control is performed so as not to perform touch effects regardless of presence or absence.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the adjustment screen is displayed, the touch effect is generated when the touch detection that occurs when ending the game is changed from "present" to "absent" as in the demonstration display. If the touch detection changes from "none" to "presence", the touch effect of "image", which is likely to hinder the adjustment operation, is not performed, and it is relatively difficult to affect the adjustment operation. The touch effect by "voice" and "lamp" is configured to be performed, and is configured to be able to appropriately execute both the adjustment operation and the touch effect. Also, unlike "during demo display", even if multiple times of touch detection are performed, multiple times of touch effects are not performed in the adjustment screen, so voices pertaining to multiple times (long time) of touch effects during the adjustment operation The output or lamp output is not executed, and it is configured not to disturb the most important adjustment operation while the adjustment screen is displayed. Furthermore, when the operation of the effect button is used for the adjustment operation, when the adjustment operation is started, the touch effect is not performed after that, so the most important adjustment operation is displayed while the adjustment screen is displayed. I have not.

  Subsequently, on the "variation standby screen" in the "playing standby" state, when the touch detection changes from "none" to "presence" for the first time, the touch effect and "lamp" using the "voice" A touch effect using a part is executed, and control is performed so as to execute a touch effect using an “image” under predetermined conditions (described later in detail, but in the case of a variation standby screen when transitioning from a demo screen). In addition, after the touch detection changes from "none" to "presence" for the first time, a change in the touch state is detected again (in the case of a predetermined number of times or later), and specification such as after the effect button is operated While displaying the "variation standby screen" under the conditions, the touch effect using the "image" and the "lamp" is not performed, and the effect of the "voice" is performed under certain conditions (for example, the lottery with a predetermined probability) Control to run in).

  On the other hand, when touch detection changes from "present" to "absent" for the first time, touch effect using "image" is not executed, but under certain conditions (for example, winning of a predetermined probability lottery) Control is performed to execute touch effects using "voice" and (parts of) a "lamp". In addition, after the touch detection changes from "none" to "presence" for the first time, even when a change in the touch state is detected again (in the case of a predetermined number of times or more), the touch detection Control is performed so as to execute touch effects using (voice) and (parts of) the “lamp” (winning of a lottery with a lower probability) than when it is performed. On the other hand, during the display of the "variation standby screen" under specific conditions such as after the production button is operated, the touch production using the "image" and the "lamp" is not performed, but the production of the "voice" is performed. , Control not to execute the touch effect.

  As described above, while the "variation standby screen" is displayed, even when the touch detection changes from "none" to "presence" unlike displaying the "demo screen", a part of the "image" effect or the like under a predetermined condition In this screen, it is easy to stay while the game is being interrupted for a short time after the game is stopped, such as when the player lights up a cigarette or takes a drink, for example. The effect of the touch effect is reduced compared to the normal demonstration screen to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable when resuming the game. On the other hand, since the transition standby screen often shifts immediately after the end of the game, if the player interrupts the steering wheel operation, the player is urged to continue the game without promoting the "sticking" too much. It is preferable to execute the presentation. For this reason, in the present embodiment, in the situation, "does not promote enthusiasm" and "continue the game" by executing the effects by the "voice" and the "lamp" without performing the touch effect by the "image". The presentation is performed taking into account the balance of both of "I want to let you". In addition, it is also possible to implement about an "image", and in that case, it is suitable to perform the presentation of the effect including the content which suppresses "inlaying".

Furthermore, in the "initialization notification" in the "playing standby" state, when the touch detection changes from "no" to "presence" and when the touch detection changes from "present" to "no" In any case, regardless of the status of "the number of changes etc." (regardless of "first time" or second time or later), control is performed so as not to execute any of "image", "voice" and "lamp" Do. In addition, regardless of whether or not it is in the state of the specific condition which relates to the production button and the like, it controls so as not to execute any production of “image”, “voice” and “lamp”.

  As described above, during the "initialization notification" in the "game standby" state, the touch effect is executed when the touch detection changes from "none" to "present" or "present" to "absent". There is usually no meaning, or an extremely meaningless effect under the circumstances where the player does not perform the handle operation, that is, the initialization notification (in a broad sense, power on notification) period after power on. By not performing the above, it is possible to reduce the power consumption at the time of initialization, suppress the noise of the game arcade, and reduce the discomfort to the worker. Even in this state, for example, a minute effect processing such as a part of the "lamp" or the like that allows a change in the touch detection state to be confirmed, in other words, a minimum effect within a range where the above effect can be obtained May be

  In the "abnormal notification" of the "playing standby" state, when the touch detection changes from "no" to "presence" for the first time, control is performed so as not to perform the touch effect, but a predetermined number of times (for example, If it is determined that the touch detection has changed from “absent” to “presence” for about 10 times or more, then “image” “voice” every predetermined number of times (for example, every two times thereafter) Using the “lamp”, it can be understood that touch detection is normally performed, and control is performed to execute touch effect to the effect that the notification is normal according to the specification. On the other hand, during the "abnormal notification" under specific conditions such as after the production button has been operated, if the touch detection changes from "none" to "presence", regardless of the status of "number of changes, etc." It controls so that touch production is not performed (whether first time or second time or later).

  On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent", whether or not the specific conditions such as after operation of the presentation button is performed regardless of the status of "number of changes etc." Control is performed so as not to execute the touch effect regardless of whether or not.

  As described above, during the "abnormal notification" in the "game standby" state, even if the touch detection changes from "none" to "presence", the touch effect is not performed unless the operation is performed a plurality of times. Is configured. And, under the situation where the player normally does not perform the handle operation or the situation where the player is forced to play the continuous game, that there is an abnormality occurring, there is a fear that the sense of discomfort or increased discomfort may be caused. There is a way to avoid performing the production. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the discomfort to the player at the abnormal time. Even in this state, a minute (suppressed) effect of notifying that the steering wheel has been touched at the time of confirmation of the abnormal state, or an effect / complex notification trigger for confirmation of the abnormal state is set. In the case where it is determined, the effect such as notifying the information, or in other words, the minimum (minimum) effect within the range where the above-mentioned effect can be obtained may be executed. In addition, it is also preferable to execute a special touch effect that apologizes for the occurrence of an abnormality when the touch effect execution is triggered after the return screen after notification of an abnormality.

It should be noted that, in the case of an error abnormality (which can be called “a return impossible error” or the like) that does not return unless the power is turned on again with respect to the aforementioned returnable error, in this embodiment, the game is In order to make it easy to understand that it is an abnormality that can not be performed, control is generally performed to stop (prohibit) the rendering processing itself including touch rendering, but when giving priority to simplification of processing. It is also possible to execute the same processing as in the case of the non-returnable error without prohibiting the touch effect even in the case of the returnable error.
<<< symbol change in progress >>>

  Among the above-mentioned "states of gaming machines", "during symbol variation" can include "during symbol stop", "during reach", "during specific effects", and "abnormal display screen". Among them, “at symbol stop” indicates, for example, a period from the swing fluctuation (provisional stop) state immediately before the change stop to the definite stop, when the effect pattern (190) is the stop state immediately before the start of the change. In addition, it seems that the situation that became a low speed state that is not classified as a state during symbol fluctuation, or a part of a plurality of rendering symbols is temporarily stopped, and only the remaining part is in fluctuation (such as during low speed fluctuation) Situations can also be included in "at symbol stop".

  The above-mentioned "at the time of reach" means at the time of reach production. As this "at the time of reach", for example, a state in which a normal reach effect as illustrated in FIG. 37 (a) is performed, and an effect in an SP reach as illustrated in FIG. 37 (b) are performed. A state can be mentioned, The reach production can be made the timing when the decoration design corresponding to the finalized design (special symbol form scheduled to be stopped) is temporarily stopped.

  The above-mentioned "during specific effect" means a situation in which a predetermined specific effect is being performed. Although this illustration is omitted as this "during specific effect", it is in a state in which the reach effect is not being performed, and the degree of expectation for development to reach is high, and the degree of expectation for hitting is relatively high. The effect or button operation that is performed during the above-mentioned reach, and promotes the operation of the effect button, during the execution of the effect including the notice showing that etc., the execution of the effect such as notifying the hit of the normal symbol Such as special effects performed in parallel with reach effects such as effects performed by the player, cut-in effects, blackout effects (effects to make the screen black only), etc. And the like) can be illustrated.

  The above-mentioned "abnormal display screen" means that the display of the predetermined image is being performed when the predetermined abnormality occurs. Although this illustration is omitted as this "abnormal display screen", for example, while continuing the symbol variation, a message notifying the occurrence of an error such as out of winning balls, bottom full door, door opening, movable part operation abnormality, etc. It is possible to exemplify what displays a symbol or the like.

Of these, when "when symbol stops", when touch detection changes from "none" to "presence" for the first time, "image" under the condition that there is no influence on other effects performed when "when symbol stops". And “voice” are controlled to be performed, while the “lamp” is not controlled to be performed. In addition, after the touch detection is changed from "none" to "present" and the touch effect is performed, control is performed so that the touch effect is not performed even if the touch detection changes again from "absent" to "present". Furthermore, under "design stop time" under specific conditions such as after operation of the effect button, control is performed so as not to execute any of the effects of "image", "voice" and "lamp".

  On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from “present” to “absent”, control is performed so as not to execute the touch effect even if the change is the first time. In addition, under specific conditions such as when touch detection changes from "present" to "absent" more than a predetermined number of times (for example, two or more times) or after an operation of a presentation button is performed during game standby As in the case where the touch detection changes from "none" to "presence", the effects of "image", "voice" and "lamp" are controlled not to be performed.

  In this manner, during "pattern stop" during symbol change, the effect at the time of symbol stop is not impeded only when the touch detection that occurs when the game is resumed changes from "none" to "present". The touch effect of the degree is configured to be executed, and for example, at the time of symbol stop when reach is off, voice display such as "Next try hard!" And game resumption The player's psychology at the time of resuming the game by executing the effect image which is favorably received by the size and area of the extent not to disturb the visibility of the display state of the symbol stop, or in the case of such timing. Can be expected to be effective. There are also players who repeatedly hit the operation unit regardless of whether the effect button is effective or not, in order to expect re-variation when the symbol is stopped. Therefore, under specific conditions such as when the effect button is operated while the symbol is stopped, or when there is vibration detection to such an extent that the game is not stopped, the touch effect is not performed, Thus, it can be expected to prevent unnecessary vibration from being applied to the gaming machine when the symbol is stopped, and it is also possible to suppress such player from performing unnecessary effects and giving negative psychology. In addition, at the time of symbol stop, the lamp display indicating the symbol stop is often performed, so by not performing the touch effect overlapping with this display, the player is in the symbol stop by the light emission mode of the lamp. It does not inhibit recognition.

  In the above-mentioned "at the time of reach", when touch detection changes from "none" to "presence" for the first time, none of the touch effects using "image", "voice" and "lamp" are executed. In addition, after the touch detection changes from "none" to "presence" for the first time, a change in the touch state is detected again (in the case of a predetermined number of times or later), and specification such as after the effect button is operated Even in the "reach time" of the condition, none of the touch effects using "image", "voice" and "lamp" are executed.

  On the other hand, when touch detection changes from "present" to "absent" for the first time, the effects of "image", "voice" and "lamp" are performed on the condition that other effects performed during reach are not affected. Control to do both. Furthermore, after the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent" for the first time, if a change in the touch state is detected again (in the case of a predetermined number of times or more), "image" "voice" "lamp" In "at reach" under specific conditions, such as after not using any of the used touch effects but after operation of the effect button, "image" under the condition that other effects performed during the reach are not affected. Control to execute any of the effects of “voice” and “lamp”.

  As described above, in the "reach time", when the touch detection changes from "none" to "presence", the touch effect is not performed, so that the "reach time" during symbol variation is Generally, it is possible to perform an appropriate touch effect corresponding to the situation where the player is firing (the situation where the touch detection is “presence”). On the other hand, when the reach occurs, the result of the reach is the player's greatest interest, so it is conceivable that the player releases the handle. For this reason, when the operation is performed, in response to the operation, an effect relating to the reliability is performed, or an effect indicating that it is not disadvantageous for the player to continue firing is performed. By configuring in, it can be expected to add a new gaming essence to the handle operation (touch) at the time of reach. Of course, simply performing the effect to continue the launch can be expected to have the effect of improving the operation of the gaming machine, and it is configured to reflect the result of the reach to determine whether the effect can be performed or not By doing this, the gameplay can be further enhanced.

In the above-mentioned "during specific effects", as in the case of "reach" above, when touch detection changes from "no" to "presence" for the first time, touch detection changes from "no" to "presence" for the first time After that, again, when the change of the touch state is detected (in the case of a predetermined number of times or later), and in the case of “during specific effect” under specific conditions such as after the operation of the effect button is performed, None of the touch effects using "image", "voice" and "lamp" are executed.

  On the other hand, when touch detection changes from "present" to "absent" for the first time, similar to "reach time" described above, there is no influence on other effects performed during "specified effect". Control is performed so that the effects of "image", "voice" and "lamp" are all performed as the condition. Furthermore, after the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent" for the first time, if a change in the touch state is detected again (in the case of a predetermined number of times or more), "image" "voice" "lamp" In "specified effect" under specific conditions such as after performing the touch effect used and not performing any of the effect buttons, there is no effect on other effects performed in "specified effect" It controls to execute any effect of "image", "voice" and "lamp" as the condition.

  In this manner, as in the case of "reaching" as well as "during specific effects", when the touch detection changes from "none" to "presence", the design is made not to execute the touch effect. In the "specified effect time" during the fluctuation, it is generally possible to perform an appropriate touch effect corresponding to the situation where the player is firing (the situation where the touch detection is "presence"). On the other hand, in "specified effect", it is conceivable that the player releases his hand from the handle, since the result of the symbol variation is the greatest interest of the player. For this reason, when the operation is performed, it is disadvantageous that, for example, the effect relating to the reliability is executed or the player continues to fire in response to the operation (corresponding to the change in touch detection). It is expected that a new gaming essence can be added to the steering wheel operation (touch) at the time of the specific effect by configuring the effect to indicate that it does not become or the like. Of course, simply performing the effect to continue the launch can be expected to have the effect of improving the operation of the gaming machine, and also reflect the result of the change to decide whether or not to perform the effect. By configuring, it is possible to further enhance the gameplay.

  Furthermore, in the aforementioned "abnormal display screen", when touch detection changes from "no" to "presence" for the first time, and touch detection changes from "no" to "presence", and then touch detection is "no" again. When it changes from "to", it controls so that "voice" is produced on condition that other production performed at the time of "abnormal display screen" is not affected, while "image" and "lamp" Control not to execute the effect of In addition, in "design stop time" under specific conditions such as after operation of the effect button is performed, control is performed so as not to execute any of "image", "voice" and "lamp".

  On the other hand, when touch detection changes from "present" to "absent" for the first time, "voice" is produced on the condition that other effects performed at the time of "abnormal display screen" are not affected. While controlling the touch effect of “image” and “lamp” not to be executed. Furthermore, when the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent" and then the touch detection changes again from "present" to "absent" a predetermined number of times or more (for example, twice or more), and the effect button is operated In the case of the "abnormal display screen" under specific conditions such as after the image forming process, control is performed so that none of the touch effects of "image", "voice" and "lamp" are performed.

Thus, in the "abnormality display screen", when touch detection changes from "absent" to "presence", there is no situation in which the player is disadvantaged when the firing is stopped during the abnormality. By configuring the touch effect to notify that the steering wheel operation is not performed because of the abnormality, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued inadvertently in the abnormal state. Moreover, in the present embodiment, in consideration of the priorities of the abnormality notification and the touch effect, the touch effect is performed only for the voice output. In the case of a situation where the player is disadvantaged when the firing is stopped during the abnormality, when the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent", notification that the launch is maintained is notified. By configuring so as to execute a touch effect by “voice”, if the game state is such that stopping the launch is disadvantageous to the player, the effect prevents the game from being stopped carelessly be able to.
<<< Hits in the middle>>>

  Among the above-mentioned "states of the gaming machine", "at the start demonstration", "at the round", "between rounds", "at the specified effect", "at the end demonstration" can be mentioned . Among them, "at the start demonstration" means a situation where the start demonstration of the big hit game is being executed, and "in the round" is a unit game for opening the big prize port of the big prize port device 90 in the big hit game. It means that the situation is to be done.

  In addition, "between rounds" means that it is a situation between "in round" and "in round", and "in specific effect" is a specific predetermined in "per hit". It means the situation where the production is being performed. Furthermore, "end demonstration time" means the situation where the end demonstration of the big hit game is being executed.

  Among them, in "Start demo", when touch detection changes from "None" to "Yes" for the first time, "voice" on the condition that it does not affect other effects performed in "Start demo". Control of “image” and “lamp” is not performed. In addition, when the touch detection changes from "none" to "presence" and then the touch detection changes from "no" to "presence" again, and "start" under specific conditions such as after the effect button is operated. In the case of "at the time of demonstration", control is performed so as not to execute any effects of "image", "voice" and "lamp".

  On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent" for the first time, and when the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent", the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent" again. If the number has changed more than the number of times (for example, two or more times), control is performed such that none of the touch effects of “image”, “voice”, and “lamp” is performed. Furthermore, in the case of "at the start demonstration" under specific conditions such as after the production button is operated, the touch production of "image" is not executed, and the touch production of "voice" and "lamp" under predetermined conditions Control to do

  In this manner, during "start demonstration", when touch detection changes from "none" to "present", for example, according to the fluctuation content that has become the big hit, the number of symbol variations to the big hit, etc. By making it possible to perform an effect blessing a big hit by "voice" such as "Congratulations!", An effect that associates the game process with the resumption of emission can be executed. In addition, when the start timing of the big hit game with substance is approaching like round game such as the late stage in "start demo", when the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent", "launch It is suggested that a touch effect by "voice" and "lamp" is suggested to suggest a launch position such as "Please hit right!" By doing this, when the user releases the launch handle at an inappropriate timing, it is possible to notify that the launch operation is to be performed as a touch effect as necessary.

  In the above-mentioned "in a round", when touch detection changes from "none" to "presence" for the first time, none of the touch effects using "image", "voice" and "lamp" are performed. In addition, after the touch detection changes from "none" to "presence" for the first time, a change in the touch state is detected again (in the case of a predetermined number of times or later), and specification such as after the effect button is operated Even in the "under the round" of the conditions, none of the touch effects using "image", "voice" and "lamp" are executed.

  On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent" for the first time, and when the change in the touch state is detected again after the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent" for the first time (In the case of a predetermined number of times or later), none of the touch effects using "image", "voice" and "lamp" are performed. Furthermore, "in the round" under specific conditions such as after operation of the production button has been made, "image" "voice" "lamp" on the condition that other production performed in "in the round" is not affected. Control to perform all the effects of.

  In this way, "in the round" is a game that is disadvantageous only if the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent" under specific conditions, for example, immediately after the start of the round, etc. Inappropriate by configuring to perform a touch effect by “voice” or “lamp” that suggests a “state” or suggest a launch position such as “Please hit right!” When the release handle is released at the timing, it is possible to notify that the release operation is to be performed as the touch effect as necessary.

  In the above-mentioned "between rounds", when touch detection changes from "none" to "presence" for the first time similarly to the above-mentioned "at the start demonstration", it affects other renditions to be performed between "rounds". On the condition that there is no 演出, control is performed so as to produce an effect of “audio”, while control is performed so as not to perform effects of “image” and “lamp”. In addition, when the touch detection changes from "none" to "presence" and then the touch detection changes from "no" to "presence" again, and "round" under specific conditions such as after the effect button is operated. In the case of "between", control is performed so as not to execute any effects of "image", "voice", and "lamp".

  On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent" for the first time, and when the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent", the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent" again. If the number has changed more than the number of times (for example, two or more times), control is performed such that none of the touch effects of "image", "voice" and "lamp" is executed as in the above-mentioned "start demonstration". Furthermore, in the case of "between rounds" under specific conditions such as after operation of the production button is performed, touch production of "image" is not performed, and control is performed to perform touch production of "voice" and "lamp". Do.

  As described above, when the touch detection changes from "none" to "presence" at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing immediately before the start of the next round), the touch effect by "voice" is performed between "rounds". For example, when the touch detection changes from "none" to "presence" at the relevant timing, the effect of a blessing such as "nice!" Is executed by the "voice". On the other hand, "voice" when touch detection changes from "present" to "absent" at a specific timing in a specific "between rounds" (eg, a time between rounds longer than the start of the next round). "Lamp" is configured to perform touch effect, and for example, when touch detection changes from "present" to "absent" at an early timing when the round interval is long, "nice" by "voice". The production of such a blessing is performed. In this way, providing an opportunity to improve the player's skill by executing the effect (according to the skill) related to the game according to the situation such as the period between rounds and the change state of the touch detection. Can.

  In the above-mentioned "during specific effect", when touch detection changes from "none" to "presence" for the first time, as in the above-mentioned "during inter-round", for other effects performed in "during specific effect" Control is performed so as to produce "voice" on condition that there is no influence, while control is performed so as not to perform "image" and "lamp". In addition, "specification" under specific conditions, such as when touch detection changes from "none" to "presence" and then touch detection changes from "none" to "presence" again, and after the effect button is operated, etc. In the case of "in effect", control is performed so as not to execute any of "image", "voice" and "lamp".

  On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent" for the first time, and when the change in the touch state is detected again after the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent" for the first time (In the case of the predetermined number of times or later), similarly to the above-mentioned "during round", none of the touch effects using "image", "voice" and "lamp" are performed. Furthermore, that "in specific effect" under specific conditions such as after operation of the effect button is made has no influence on other effects performed in "in specific effect" (for example, touch detection in a specific effect period) It is controlled to perform any of the effects of "image", "voice" and "lamp" on condition that it is within the reception period) or the winning of the effect execution lottery.

  In this manner, when the touch detection changes from "none" to "presence" at a predetermined timing of "specific effect in progress" (for example, timing after notification of result in promotion effect or continuous alert notification effect), "by voice" The touch effect is configured to be executed. For example, when the touch detection changes from "none" to "present" at the corresponding timing, "lucky!" Or "sorry!" According to the notification result by "voice". The presentation like is performed. On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent" at a predetermined timing of "specific effect in progress" (for example, the timing of waiting for input in the promotion effect or the continuous effect notification effect), the "effect button" In view of the operation, it is configured to notify the result of the specific effect by "effect", "voice" and "lamp". For example, during the promotion effect, "press a button!" When the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent", an effect corresponding to the result of the specific effect is executed. As described above, it is preferable to execute a touch effect according to the result of the specific effect, or to use an execution trigger as an alternative to another input during the specific effect, thereby changing the touch operation during the specific effect in the hit game. Can be used to

  In the above-mentioned "end demonstration", when touch detection changes from "none" to "presence" for the first time, as in the above-mentioned "during specific effect", another effect performed in "end demonstration" On the condition that there is no influence on the control, control is performed so as to produce the "voice", while control is performed not to perform the "image" and the "lamp". In addition, when the touch detection changes from "no" to "present" and then the touch detection changes from "non" to "present" again, and "end" under specific conditions such as after the effect button is operated. In the case of "at the time of demonstration", control is performed so as not to execute any effects of "image", "voice" and "lamp".

  On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent" for the first time, and when the change in the touch state is detected again after the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent" for the first time (In the case of the predetermined number of times or later), similarly to the above-mentioned "during round", none of the touch effects using "image", "voice" and "lamp" are performed. Furthermore, in the "end demonstration" under specific conditions such as after the production button has been operated, "image", "voice" and "image" on the condition that there is no influence on the other presentation performed at the "end demonstration". It is controlled to perform all effects of "lamp".

As described above, when the touch detection changes from "none" to "presence" at a predetermined timing of "during end demonstration" (for example, timing immediately before the end of the end demonstration), the touch effect by "voice" is executed Is configured, for example, when touch detection changes from "none" to "presence" at the relevant timing, an effect such as "Please do your best next time" is executed according to the notification result by "voice" Ru. On the other hand, when the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent" at a predetermined timing of "during demo" (for example, timing immediately after the start of the demo), "effect", "voice" and "lamp" It is configured to execute a touch effect, and for example, when the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent" at the corresponding timing, "I got a lot of balls this time too!" Perform effects related to the "image""voice""lamp". As described above, by executing the touch effect according to the timing in the end demonstration, it is possible to preferably cooperate the hit game and the change in the touch operation in the end demonstration.
<<< probability change (in charge support) >>>

  Among the above-mentioned "states of gaming machines", "during symbol (in power)" includes "during symbol stop", "during reach", "during specific effects", and "abnormal display screen". These situations may have the same meaning as the situations assumed in the above-mentioned "in symbol variation" situation. Then, in the example of FIG. 24B, when the touch detection changes from "absent" to "present" and when "touched" changes to "absent", the "number of changes etc." is "first time" The effects of "image", "voice", and "lamp" are shown in FIG. 24 (a) in the state of "symbol fluctuation" in any of "predetermined times and after" and "specific conditions". It is defined (with the same contents) as the production.

  In addition, in order to avoid complicated explanations here, the condition of the gaming machine was determined in the same manner as the above-mentioned "during symbol variation" related to "during change (power support)" during normal times (during non power support). There is a difference between the symbols during "permanent change (power support)" (the description is omitted in Fig. 24) and the "during symbol change" during normal times, "game stop" from "pattern stop" status It can be mentioned that the state does not shift to the middle state. In addition, it is also possible to set a game state different from "in symbol change" related to the normal time according to factors such as the contents of effects to be implemented and the difference in control mode without being limited to this.

<< Production type >>
As described above, although the state of the gaming machine, the change method of touch detection, and the execution state of the effect by "image", "voice" and "lamp" have been described according to the change frequency, etc. Although the concept of "perform effects" is common to them, in terms of "what kind of effects are to be performed", it is possible to adopt various aspects such as the ones described above and the ones not explained. It is possible. Therefore, in the following, the effect type suitable as the effect to be executed in the above-described situation will be described in more detail with some examples.

FIG. 25 and FIG. 26 show, as a list, more specific types of effects when a change in touch state is detected in various game states.

  FIG. 25 shows, from the left of the chart, “type of effect to be executed at the time of detection state change”, “setting change relation”, “in game standby” and “in symbol change”. Further, FIG. 26 shows “type of effect to be executed at the time of detection state change”, “hit”, and “probable change (power support)” from the left of the chart. In FIG. 25 and FIG. 26, “setting change relation”, “in game standby”, “in symbol change”, “in hit”, and “incorrect change (power support)” indicate the state of the gaming machine, as described above. It means the same classification as that shown as “state of gaming machine” in FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b).

  Among the items shown in FIG. 25 and FIG. 26, “type of effect to be executed at the time of detection state change” is when touch detection changes from “no” to “presence” and from “presence” to “no”. It is a list of types of effects that can be performed in the case of Then, as shown in FIG. 25, as types of effects belonging to “type of effects to be executed at the time of detection state change”, “transition to another mode (effect)”, “effect related to character”, “playing a game” "Promotion to promote," "Retention to end the game," "RTC related rendition," "Damage prevention related rendition", "Card recollection prevention related rendition", "Game explanation such as game explanation", "Game result Notification effects regarding "" and "touch notification" can be mentioned.

  These types of effects are classified and illustrated comprehensively based on functions and attributes. The type of effect is not limited to the classifications listed here, and other classifications can be adopted. Also, types other than the types listed here can be provided. Furthermore, the types are not necessarily clearly separated and considered, and for example, a certain effect may be considered to be redundantly classified into a plurality of types.

  Among the various types described above, “transition to another mode (rendering)” can also be referred to as “rendering in another mode”, for example. Then, in the “transition to another mode (render)”, when the touch detection state changes from “no” to “presence” (or “presence” to “no”), the presentation mode changes to a different presentation mode It means something. Further, the “reproduction mode” is, for example, a (representation) format / mode that depends on determining the display content of the announcement such as the advance notice effect or the reach effect, and in terms of control, these effect forms (representation form) It can be said that it is identified by the difference in data code. And as an example of the kind of production mode, stage A-Z at the time of normal, stage ag at the time of a definite change (power support), etc. can be mentioned.

  In the above-mentioned "effect related to the character", when the touch detection state changes from "none" to "present" (or "present" to "absent"), the effect using the character is started or the character is used. It means something that changes the content of the rendition. In addition, the above-mentioned “promotion to promote the game” is such as advancing the story on the stage, developing the contents of the stage, or executing the button stage according to the state change of the touch detection. I mean. Here, as described above, it is also possible to classify the effect using the character into both “effect related to the character” and “effect promoting the game”.

  Further, as a specific example of the “representation related to a character”, there can be mentioned a thing in which an element of a rendition relating to a motif of rendition appears or changes based on touch detection. More specifically, for example, "Martian" or "Stone" or "Spacecraft" when the gaming machine has the motif of space, or "battery" or "Dr." when the robot has the motif Alternatively, it can be considered that “weapons” or “armor” or the like in the battle effect appear in the story based on touch detection, or an existing effect element changes to these elements.

  The above-mentioned "effect to keep the end of the game" means something that can be expected to cause a player to stop playing the game and try to leave the gaming machine based on the change in the state of touch detection. doing. For example, the effect (limited frequency pattern effect) to be executed using the above-described limited frequency pattern table can be considered as being included in the “effect of retaining the end of the game”. Furthermore, the effect of developing the middle of a series of stories can be considered as being included in this "effect of retaining the end of the game".

  As this "direction to keep the end of the game", the display of a message for the purpose of holding such as "Please keep a little more!", "Don't stop ~!" It is possible to illustrate the effect such as. In addition, when using the limited frequency pattern table as described above, a predetermined limited frequency pattern table is selected in response to touch detection, and in the subsequent few games, unique and unusual effects are frequently generated Or, it is conceivable to make it easy for the effect whose appearance frequency is low to appear easily if it is normal.

  The above-mentioned "RTC-related effect" means something that is performed based on real time using an RTC (Real Time Clock). For example, the effect performed as the above-mentioned "E121: RTC" can be considered to correspond to this "RTC related effect". Also, for example, effects to be performed by determining the date and season, effects to be performed by determining the time zone of one day, effects to be simultaneously performed by a plurality of pachinko gaming machines, and the like which are performed using an RTC are also included. It can be illustrated as "RTC related performance".

  The above-mentioned "inscription related to prevention of depression" means that the content is such that the player is prevented from concentrating excessively on the game. For example, it is possible to think of a player performing an "image" or a "voice" accompanied by a message such as "Pachinko is a modestly enjoyable play" or "Let's pay attention to getting stuck".

  The above-mentioned "reproduction for preventing card removal" means that the player does not forget to remove various cards from the above-mentioned card unit. For example, it can be considered to provide an "image" or a "voice" accompanied by a message such as "Be careful to forget the card" or "Please do not forget to take the card".

  The above-mentioned "reproduction such as game explanation" means the one for performing the explanation of the game nature of the pachinko gaming machine 10, the explanation of the environment setting such as the volume, and the like. For example, it can be considered to display the type of big hit and the degree of expectation (big hit probability), the type of effect mode, the characters appearing, and the display of the environment setting menu as the effect of "image".

  The above-mentioned "notification effect about game result" means the notification effect of the game result such as the type of the judgment of success or the big hit. For example, it is possible to illustrate the informing effect of the result concerning the fluctuation at that time (the fluctuation). And, in this case, as will be described later, it is conceivable not to perform the "notification effect regarding the game result" in the "game standby" of FIG. In addition, as "notification effect about game result", the transition of the outfall on that day of the pachinko game machine 10, the number of big hits, etc., the number of big hits in the definite change or in the power support, etc. It is also possible to display.

  The “touch notification” described above means that notification of the touch operation has been performed. Here, as the “touch notification”, in a broad sense, it may be considered that the predetermined effects are started when there is touch detection, the effects are changed such as the effects are changed, and so on. Although it can be performed, “touch notification” shown in FIG. 25 means that notification of the presence of a touch operation (touch detection) is performed, and “touch notification” may be, for example, “along with an image of a handle”. A character display such as “touch operation has been performed” or an audio display may be performed, or a predetermined lamp (LED) may be lighted.

  Then, as effects other than the “touch notification”, effects to be executed regardless of the presence or absence of touch detection can be mentioned. Then, as effects other than the “touch notification”, for example, a notice during symbol variation, an effect during a big hit, an effect used during a demonstration, and the like can be mentioned.

In the example of FIG. 25, the types of “dedicated” and “shared” are further provided for each of the “display related to the character” to the “touch notification” described above. Among these, "dedicated" is provided as dedicated to each of "representation related to the character" to "touch notification", and as a representation other than "representation related to the character" to "touch notification" based on touch detection Means that the effect is not used. In addition, “shared” means effects used as effects other than “informing related to a character” based on touch detection as well as effects other than “touch notification”.
<<< Setting change relation >>>

  Among the states of various gaming machines shown in FIG. 25, the states of “setting change in progress” and “setting in display” are determined in the “setting change relationship” described above, as in the example of FIG. There is. Here, the conditions represented by “during setting change” and “during setting display” are the same as those in the example of FIG. 24 (a). Also in the examples shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the symbols “o”, “Δ”, and “x” are used, and the meanings of these symbols are also the same as in the example of FIG. Indicates that "execution is preferable", "Δ" indicates that "performing under certain conditions is preferable or possible", and "x" indicates that "execution is undesirable or difficult".

  Among these, “Δ” is conditionally shown to be effective, but it is possible to adopt a control mode that is executed for any of the effects. Furthermore, although "x" is not preferable or difficult to implement, it is also possible to adopt a control mode that is executed intentionally. Moreover, in the example shown to FIG. 25, FIG. 26, the symbol of "-" is used and this symbol of "-" represents not making it the object of assignment of presentation right or wrong here.

  Then, in the state of “setting change relation” shown in FIG. 25, since “setting changing” and “setting displaying”, the touch detection shown at the left end in the drawing changes from “absent” to “presence”. In the case, “transition to another mode (rendering)” is not executed (×). Furthermore, from "representation relating to a character" to "notification effect relating to a game result" are "-" described above for both "dedicated" and "shared".

  The effect of "dedicated" related to the "touch notification" described above is considered to be suitable or possible ()) to be executed under certain conditions in either "setting change" or "setting displayed". The effect of "shared" is regarded as undesirable or difficult to execute (x) in any of "setting change" and "setting displayed".

  With regard to this "setting change relation" state, even when touch detection changes from "present" to "absent", the aforementioned touch detection from "absent" with respect to "representation related to a character" to "touch notification" As with the case of "Yes", arrangements relating to the type of effect are being made.

  In addition, as indicated by “Δ” in “setting change relation” in “state of gaming machine” in FIG. 24A, in the state of “setting change relation”, only effects by “lamp” can be executed There is sex. Then, in FIG. 25, the effect of “touch notification” executed in the state of “setting change relation” is indicated by “Δ” that it is a dedicated effect of notifying touch detection using a lamp. . On the other hand, since various effects such as "effect related to a character", "effect for promoting a game", or "effect for retaining a game end" can not be performed because they are effects using a lamp, in FIG. "-" Which is not the object of the regulation here is shown.

Then, in accordance with these arrangements, the item “△” (here, the “direct notification” effect of “dedicated”) should not be disturbed by the display in the “setting change” or “setting display” state, etc. It is possible to perform the rendition in a suppressed manner. Further, the item "x" (here, "touch notification" of "shared") is not performed. Here, as an effect of the "dedicated""touchnotification", it can be exemplified that the character display of "during setting change" and "during setting display" is performed at the lower part of the screen.
<<< game waiting>>

  Subsequently, examples of the above-mentioned "playing-standby" state include a "demo screen", an "adjustment screen", a "variation standby screen", an "initialization notification", and an "error notification". These states are the same as those described in the example of FIG. On (during display of) the "demo screen" in this "game standby", it is preferable to execute "transition to another mode (effect)" when touch detection changes from "none" to "presence" It is regarded as a thing (○). Furthermore, “representation relating to a character” and “representation promoting a game” are considered to be preferable (○) for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

  In addition, with regard to the case where touch detection changes from "none" to "presence", "effect to keep the end of the game" is undesirable or difficult to execute for either "dedicated" or "shared" (x) It is assumed. Furthermore, “RTC-related effects” and “Demonstration-related effects” are considered to be preferable (○) for both “dedicated” and “shared”, and “card removal prevention related The effect of “for exclusive use” and “for shared use” is considered to be suitable or possible (Δ) under certain conditions.

  Among the above, “△” for “reproduction for preventing forgetting to take out a card” is based on the following idea. That is, since it is desirable that "reproduction for preventing card removal" is performed when there is a high possibility of leaving, such as at the end of the game, when the touch detection changes from "none" to "presence" The effect of the production is considered to be small. On the other hand, for example, under specific conditions such as, although the execution of the touch effect is permitted after the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent", a predetermined time or more does not elapse (in the case of leaving for a short time) In any case, it is considered that performing related effects such as “Don't you take the card?” Etc. when the game starts as a certain effect. May be Therefore, with regard to the "representation related to preventing card removal", it is preferable or possible (Δ) to execute under certain conditions.

  In addition, "reproduction such as game explanation" is "○" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "notice effect related to game result" is "dedicated" because the corresponding notification is not performed. It is considered as "-" which has not made the arrangement especially about "shared". Furthermore, “touch notification” is “o” for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

  Further, in the “demo screen”, “transition to another mode (effect)” is “X” with respect to the case where the touch detection changes from “present” to “absent”. Also, when the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent", the corresponding notification is not performed as described above (see FIG. 24 if necessary), and the arrangement is made for both "dedicated" and "shared". "-" Is not a target of

  Subsequently, in the “adjustment screen” (in display of) “during game standby”, “transition to another mode (effect)” to “game” regarding the case where the touch detection changes from “none” to “presence” "Promotion to promote" is considered as "Δ". Furthermore, "representation to keep the end of the game" is "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "RTC related rendition" is for "dedicated" and "shared". 」”

  Here, “RT” relating to “RTC related effects” is conditional on “Δ”, and “touch notification” is “o” meaning that execution is preferable, for the following reasons. That is, as shown in FIG. 24 (a), for the "adjustment screen" of "game standby", the effect of "image" is not executed, but the effect of "voice" (condition with "effect of" lamp " It is supposed to be used together. As described above, with regard to the "adjustment screen" in "game standby", since the effects are limited to "lamps" and "audio" other than "image", "touch notification" is prioritized and "RTC related" is given. The priority of the effect is lower than that of the touch notification.

  In addition, from "representation related to stagnation prevention" to "reproduction such as game explanation" is "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "notification related to the game result" is applicable. Since no notification is given, both "dedicated" and "shared" are "-". Furthermore, “touch notification” is “o” for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

  Further, as the “adjustment screen”, “transition to another mode (effect)” is set to “x” in the case where the touch detection changes from “present” to “absent”. Furthermore, since "notification" is not performed as described above (see Fig. 24 if necessary) from "other effects related to the character" to "touch notification", "for exclusive use" or "shared" is "for" "-". As described above, in the "adjustment screen" in the "game standby", the effect that indicates the touch notification to the extent that the adjustment work is not affected, and the game promotion only when the touch detection changes from "none" to "presence" It is decided to execute the effects pertaining to in a limited manner.

  Subsequently, in the "variation standby screen" (during display) in "gaming standby", "transition to another mode (effect)" is "×" when the touch detection changes from "none" to "presence". It is said that. Furthermore, "representation related to the character" and "representation promoting the game" are "○" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "representation to keep the end of the game" is "dedicated" , And "shared" are both "x".

  In addition, “RTC-related effects” and “Demonstration-related effects” are considered as “O” for “Dedicated” and “Shared”, and “Damage-preventing-related effects” are Both “dedicated” and “shared” are “Δ”. Furthermore, "reproduction such as game explanation" is "○" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "notification related to the game result" does not lead to derivation of the game result. Both "dedicated" and "shared" are "-". In addition, “touch notification” is “o” for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

  Among these, “the effect of forgetting to prevent card removal” is considered to be suitable or possible to execute under certain conditions (Δ) This is the same as in the case of “1”, and the situation where it is considered that the effect of producing effects is large is the case where there is a limitation such as leaving for a short time.

  Subsequently, as the "variation standby screen" in the "variation standby" state, "transition to another mode (render)" is set to "Δ" for the case where the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent" There is. Furthermore, from the “representation related to the character” to “the effect of retaining the end of the game” are “o” for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

  Here, with regard to the case where the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent", the reason that "transition to another mode (rendering)" is set to "Δ" is, for example, the variation standby while the player is fired If you release your hand from the handlebar (20) and try to leave the room, you can not expect to improve the game's preference even if you switch to another effect mode, but the player is again required to use the pachinko game machine 10 again. It is because it is thought that there is a case where it may be possible to have the intention to return to the seat. In addition, it is possible to perform control such as returning to the default effect mode (for example, the initial setting mode at power on, or the effect mode when the player is not selected for environment setting, etc.) when leaving the seat. It is.

  In addition, “RTC-related effects” are considered as “Δ” for both “dedicated” and “shared”, and “demonstration-related effects” are for “dedicated” and “shared”. It is considered as "x". Furthermore, "representation related to preventing card removal" is "○" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "representation such as game explanation" is either "dedicated" or "shared" Is also considered as "x".

  Here, “RTC-related effects” are “dedicated” and “shared” and “△” means that the effect of touch effects differs depending on what kind of effect is used as an RTC extension. It is because it is considered that there are cases.

  In addition, “notification effect regarding the game result” is not given in the “variation standby screen” as described above (refer to FIG. 24 if necessary), so that “indication” or “shared” is not given. "-" Is set, and "touch notification" is set to "o" for both "dedicated" and "shared".

  Subsequently, in the “initialization notification” (middle) in “playing standby”, when the touch detection changes from “no” to “presence”, the touch detection changes from “present” to “non”. In any case, "transition to another mode (effect)" is "X". Further, as described above (see FIG. 24 if necessary), no touch effect is provided. This is because there is a high possibility that the player does not exist during the initialization notification immediately after the power is turned on, and the execution of the effect by the change of the touch detection is meaningless.

  Subsequently, in the “abnormal notification” (during display of) “during game standby”, “transition to another mode (effect)” is “×” when the touch detection changes from “none” to “presence”. It is said that. Furthermore, from "representation related to the character" to "representation such as game explanation" are "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared". On the other hand, "informing effect about game result" and "touch informing" are taken as ".DELTA." Which is executed under specific conditions for both "dedicated" and "shared".

Furthermore, in the “abnormal notification” (during display thereof), when the touch detection changes from “present” to “absent”, “transition to another mode (effect)” is “x”. Further, as described above (see FIG. 24 if necessary), no touch effect is provided. As described above, in the "abnormal notification" (during display of) "in game standby", only when the touch detection changes from "none" to "presence", the touch notification is indicated to an extent that the adjustment operation is not affected. It is supposed that the presentation and the notification presentation on the game result are limitedly executed.
<<< symbol change in progress >>>

  Then, as a state of the above-mentioned "during symbol variation", "during symbol stop", "during reach", "during specific effect", and "abnormal display screen" can be mentioned. These states are the same as those described in the example of FIG. In “when symbol stopped” in “during symbol variation”, “transition to another mode (effect)” is “x” with respect to the case where touch detection changes from “absent” to “presence”. Furthermore, “representation related to the character” is “Δ” for “dedicated” and “x” for “shared”.

  In this way, with regard to "representation related to the character", it is distinguished whether the effect of "shared" is "x" if it is the effect by touch detection when executing shared effects at symbol stop or the effect relating to symbol variation It is because it becomes impossible and the production effect of a touch production fades. Such circumstances also apply to “at reach”, “during specific effect”, and “abnormal display screen” described below. For this reason, it is desirable to adopt a control mode that is executed only under special conditions, in many cases (for example, during symbol variation etc.) of "representation related to a character" in "symbol variation" it is conceivable that.

  In addition, "representation promoting the game" is "fair" for both "dedicated" and "shared", from "representation to keep the end of the game" to "representation related to forgetting to take out cards" Both “dedicated” and “shared” are “x”. Furthermore, “representation of game explanation etc.” is “Δ” for “dedicated” and “x” for “shared”. In addition, "notification effect concerning the game result" is considered as "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "touch notification" is "Δ" for both "dedicated" and "shared". It is assumed.

  More specifically, if the touch detection changes from "none" to "presence", the player is considered to have the intention to start (resume) the game in principle, so that the game is continued. While the effect such as prompting is suitable, the "effect of retaining the end of game", "the effect of preventing card removal", etc., which are related to the end of the game, are not suitable as effects in the state of "pattern stopped". It can be said. For this reason, as described above, "description to promote the game" is "dedicated" for "dedicated" and "shared" and "description to keep the end of the game" from "description related to card removal prevention" is Both "dedicated" and "shared" are marked "x".

  And, as "direction to promote the game" here, to display the character or item for the expectation of the story in the direction to go forward, or to display the character of "progress?" Can be illustrated.

  Subsequently, in "during symbol stopping" in "during symbol changing", "transition to another mode (effect)" is made "x" with respect to the case where touch detection changes from "present" to "absent" There is. Furthermore, “representation related to the character” is “Δ” for “dedicated” and “x” for “shared”.

  In addition, "representation promoting game" is "X" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "representation to keep the end of the game" is "dedicated" or "shared" It is considered as "○". Furthermore, "RTC related rendition" is "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "representation related to prevention of stagnation" to "representation such as game explanation" is "dedicated" And "shared" are both "Δ".

In addition, "notification effect concerning the game result" is considered as "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "touch notification" is "Δ" for both "dedicated" and "shared". It is assumed.
In this manner, when "in symbol stop" in "in symbol change", when touch detection changes from "none" to "presence", the effect or game showing touch notification under certain conditions is promoted When the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent", the effect of mainly retaining the end of the game is executed. In this way, it can be said that an influence on a player who uses symbol stop as the standard of game termination can be expected.

  In addition, in "at reach" in "in symbol change" and "during specific effect", "transition to other mode (effect)" is "when the touch detection changes from" none "to" presence " × is said. Further, of the "notification effects relating to the game result", "shared" is "Δ", and for other effects, "special" and "shared" are both "X".

  Furthermore, regarding the case where the touch detection changes from “present” to “absent”, “transition to another mode (rendering)” is “x”. In addition, “representation related to the character” is “Δ” for “dedicated” and “x” for “shared”. In addition, from "representation promoting game" to "representation such as game explanation" are "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared".

  Furthermore, "informing effect about game result" is "Δ" for "dedicated" and "X" for "shared". In addition, “touch notification” is “x” for “dedicated” and “Δ” for “shared”.

  As described above, in "at reach" or "during specific effects" in "in symbol change", certain conditions are satisfied when touch detection changes from "none" to "present" or "present" to "absent". In addition to the effects during symbol fluctuation, the notification effects regarding game effects that are difficult to confuse with symbol fluctuation are added by the change in touch detection, with notification effects regarding game results dedicated to touch effects being executable under can do.

  Furthermore, in the “abnormal display screen” (during display) in “during symbol variation”, when touch detection changes from “absent” to “presence”, when touch detection changes from “presence” to “absent” For any of the above, "transition to another mode (representation)" is "X". Also, when touch detection changes from "none" to "presence", effects of "dedicated" and "shared" of touch notification may be executed under certain conditions, as described above (if necessary 24) With regard to other effects, neither “dedicated” nor “shared” is “−” because no corresponding notification is given.

As described above, on (during display of) the "abnormal display screen" of "during symbol variation", when touch detection changes from "none" to "presence", only touch notification under a certain condition Can be performed, but no other rendition is performed. Thus, when an abnormality occurs, it can be said that it is possible to prevent curiosity from being performed without inadvertently performing effects such as game promotion.
<<< Hits in the middle>>>

  Subsequently, as the above-mentioned "hit" state, "start demonstration", "round", "between rounds", "specific effect", and "end demonstration" can be mentioned. These states are the same as those described in the example of FIG. In the case of "at the start demonstration" (during the display of the start demonstration) in this "hit", when the touch detection changes from "no" to "present", the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent" In any of the above, "transition to another mode (representation)" is "X". Furthermore, “representation relating to a character” and “representation promoting a game” are “o” for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

  In addition, "representation to keep the end of the game" is "X" for both "dedicated" and "shared", "RTC related performance" is "for both dedicated" and "shared" 」” Furthermore, "representation related to prevention of entanglement" is "X" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "representation related to forgetting to take out cards" is "dedicated" and "shared" Both are considered "と".

  Furthermore, "representation such as game explanation", "notification effect about the game result" is made "x" for "only" and "shared", "touch notification" is "only", "shared For any of the above, it is considered as "Δ".

  As described above, "at the start demonstration" (during the display of the start demonstration) in "the hit" (during the display of the start demonstration) is not confused with the effect at the time of the symbol change, so promoting the game regardless of sharing or exclusive use, By executing the rendition related to the character, it is possible to expect an effect of enhancing the time of bliss for the player of the big hit. In addition, in such a situation, in connection with the end of the game where there is no possibility that the player can select, the effect of holding the end of the game is executed to inhibit the water from being drawn to the player's interest It can be said that it is possible.

  Furthermore, in "in round" in "performing", when touch detection changes from "no" to "present", "other" in any case where touch detection changes from "present" to "absent" Transition to the mode (representation) of is made "x". In addition, “representation such as game explanation and the like” from “representation related to character” is “x” for both “dedicated” and “shared”. On the other hand, "informing effect on game result" and "touch informing" are both "dedicated" and "common".

  As described above, in the "round" in the "round", since the firing is continuously performed (the state of the "touch detection is maintained" is maintained), the minimum necessary touch detection notification, during the round, In the notification effect screen, it is possible to execute effects limited to the function as an alternative when the hand not holding the handle can not be used, etc. It can be said that it is possible to realize an appropriate touch effect setting during the production at the same time.

  Furthermore, in "between rounds" in "performing", each effect type when touch detection changes from "no" to "presence" and when touch detection changes from "present" to "no" The implementation modes of are all defined (with the same contents) as in the above-mentioned "during a round".

  Also, as "specified effect in" "in hitting", when the touch detection changes from "no" to "present", the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent" in both cases. The transition to the other mode (effect) is "x". In addition, “representation such as game explanation and the like” from “representation related to character” is “x” for both “dedicated” and “shared”. Furthermore, "informing effect about game results" is "○" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "touch notification" is "Δ" for both "dedicated" and "shared". It is assumed.

  As described above, in the case of "in specific effect" in "in hitting", as in "in round" and the like, the emission is continued continuously (the state of "presence of touch detection is maintained"). In the notification effect screen, it is possible to execute effects limited to the function as an alternative such as when the hand not holding the handle can not be used, etc., and does not disturb the firing that is performed during the hit which is the essence of the game It can be said that it is possible to realize an appropriate touch effect setting while staying within the range effect.

  Furthermore, in the case of "end demonstration" (during the display of the end demonstration) in "hit", the "transition to another mode (representation)" is "on" when the touch detection changes from "none" to "presence". × is said. In addition, from "representation related to character" to "representation related to RTC" are considered as "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "prediction related to soaking up", "forgetting to remove card" The "prevention-related effect" is "fair" for both "dedicated" and "shared".

  Furthermore, "reproduction such as game explanation" is "X" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "informing effect about game result" is for both "dedicated" and "shared" It is considered as "○". In addition, “touch notification” is “Δ” for both “dedicated” and “shared”.

  Furthermore, regarding the case where the touch detection changes from “present” to “absent”, “transition to another mode (rendering)” is “x”. In addition, from "representation related to character" to "representation related to RTC" is "x" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "representation related to stagnation prevention" is "dedicated" And "shared" are both "Δ".

  Furthermore, "representation related to preventing card removal" is "○" for both "dedicated" and "shared", and "representation such as game explanation" is either "dedicated" or "shared" Is also considered as "△". In addition, "notification effect about the game result" is "○" for both "dedicated" and "shared", "touch notification" is "△" for both "dedicated" and "shared" It is assumed.

As described above, in the case of "end demonstration" (during the display of the end demonstration) in "hit", in consideration of the possibility of leaving the seat at the end of the big hit or stopping the game, the touch detection is "no When it becomes “,” it is preferable to execute an effect or the like for preventing forgetting of the game result (for example, information on the gaming state after the big hit end) and the card. In addition, when the game content after the big hit is complicated, when touch detection becomes “absent”, providing an opportunity to grasp the game content by displaying an explanation about the game content after that. It can be said that it is suitable.
<<< probability change (in charge support) >>>

  Then, as a state of the above-mentioned "probability change (power support)", "at symbol stop", "at reach", "during specific effect", "abnormal display screen" can be mentioned. These states are the same as those described in the example of FIG. Then, when the touch detection changes from "absent" to "present" and when the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent", the execution mode of each effect type is the above-described "symbol variation". The same as (in the same content) as “Medium” (FIG. 25).

  Here, the following can be said about a specific gaming state such as in the middle of a definite change or during power support. For example, it may be desirable to prevent the transition to the demonstration state (here, the normal demonstration state in which the standby screen A is displayed) during definite conversion or power support. In this way, the transition to the game standby state (normal demo state) can be premised on a low probability and low base state (non-probable change and non-power support state), and the touch effect is It is easy to specialize in the production from the viewpoint of "game start". That is, it is possible to produce touch effect as highlighting the content indicating “game start” from the low probability and low base state.

  In addition, it can be said that it is preferable not to execute the shot detection effect (touch effect) in the constant change state or in the no change state (can be said to be the standby state in the specific gaming state) in the power support. However, volume adjustment and light amount adjustment are possible. In the example described above, the adjustment screen (FIG. 33C) is displayed by operating the effect button (the operation button 22 etc.) in the demonstration screen (here, in the normal demonstration state where the standby screen A is displayed). It shifts, and it is made to perform volume adjustment, luminance (light quantity) adjustment, etc. in the state. Then, even in a situation where the screen is not normally shifted to the adjustment screen, as in a situation other than in the demo screen, the screen may be shifted to the adjustment screen by operating the effect button if it is in the predetermined state. . As the "predetermined state" mentioned here, there can be mentioned, for example, a gaming state in which use of the effect button used for adjustment is not scheduled. More specifically, for example, during display of the standby screen B, during symbol variation, or during a big hit game, etc. can be illustrated. Further, with regard to the "predetermined state", during the fluctuation, it may be in any state as to whether or not it is a positive change state or whether it is a power support state.

  Further, the above-mentioned adjustment meter is also displayed on the adjustment screen (FIG. 33 (c)) displayed under such conditions. Moreover, the display priority (priority of display) of the adjustment screen in the said situation is from the area (the 1st number-of-holds display part 196 and the 2nd number-of-holds display part 197) of a decorative symbol (drawal symbols 190a-190c) and a suspension display. It may be high or low. In addition, on the adjustment screen displayed satisfying the above-described “predetermined state” condition, the display of the adjustment meter as described above is, for example, an image object of a design simplified as compared with the example of FIG. It is conceivable to use a simple image). This is because it is suitable when the need for other displays is high. In addition, the display of the above-mentioned simple image is, for example, a display of a normal adjustment screen such as displaying only a volume adjustment meter or a light amount adjustment meter relatively small on the screen or displaying semitransparent. It is desirable that the visibility be lower than in the case.

In addition, even on the adjustment screen displayed under such conditions, the use of the cross key (96) makes it possible to adjust the volume, the light amount, and the like. In order to display the adjustment screen (including the simple image), for example, the operation button (22) is changed during the change other than the control mode in which the adjustment button (22) is pressed during the change to display the adjustment screen (simple image). It is possible to adopt a control mode in which the cross key (96) is directly operated without pressing the key. As a specific example, when the cross key (96) is operated during fluctuation when the adjustment screen (simple image) is not displayed, the adjustment screen (simple image) is displayed, and the cross key ( By performing the additional operation of 96), adjustment of the volume and the amount of light can be made. Other than that, when the cross key (96) is operated during fluctuation when the adjustment screen (simple image) is not displayed, the adjustment screen (simple image) is displayed and both the volume and the light amount are adjusted The display of the adjustment screen and the adjustment of the volume or the light amount may be performed together by one cross key operation. In addition, even when touch detection and these operations are performed simultaneously, each processing may be performed simultaneously, and in that case, it is changed to a touch effect that does not affect the recognition of the adjustment result by the player. May be output.
<Second and subsequent regulations>

  FIGS. 27 (a) and 27 (b) relate to the “pros and cons of the effect” shown in FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b) described above. FIGS. 27A and 27B relate to the “predetermined number of times after the change number etc.” related to touch detection, and the “change state” is the second time for effects that can be executed at the first time. It shows whether or not the effect is restricted in the case where it is later.

  Specifically, in FIGS. 27 (a) and 27 (b), “the setting change relationship”, “during game standby”, “during symbol variation”, and “peri” Provisions for the presentation of each state of “medium” and “probable change (power support)” are shown. Furthermore, with respect to these states, the presence or absence of execution relating to the “effect change function based on the effect button operation” and “the effect by touch detection” is defined. That is, with respect to the second and subsequent detection state changes relating to the effect button (the operation button 22 and the like) and the second and subsequent detection state changes relating to the touch detection to the launch handle 20, presence or absence of effect restrictions in each state of the gaming machine Is defined.

  Further, in FIGS. 27A and 27B, "with restriction" is indicated by a symbol of "o", and "no restriction" is indicated by a symbol of "x". Furthermore, the symbol “Δ” indicates that further subdivision according to the situation (“by case”).

  For example, when the state of the gaming machine is "during setting change" of "setting change relationship" and when "during setting display", "effect change function based on effect button operation" and "by touch detection" The production restrictions in this case for the production etc. are all "x".

  Further, when the state of the gaming machine is "playing standby", the "demo screen", "adjustment screen", "variation standby screen", "initialization notification", "error notification" as described above. Is provided. And all the production | presentation restrictions in this case about "a production | presentation change function based on production button operation" are "x". Also, for “effects by touch detection”, “Demo screen” is “O”, “Adjustment screen” is “Δ”, “Moving standby screen” is “O”, “Reset notification” is “Δ” , "Abnormal notification" is "x".

  Subsequently, when the state of the gaming machine is "in symbol change", "at symbol stop", "at reach", "during specific effect", and "abnormal display screen" are provided as described above. ing. And all the production | presentation restrictions in this case about "a production | presentation change function based on production button operation" are "x". In addition, for "effects due to touch detection", "when symbol stopped" is "△", "at reach" is "○", "during specific effect" is "○", "abnormal display screen" is "X It is ".

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), when the state of the gaming machine is "under hit", "start demonstration", "in round", "between rounds", "in the same manner as described above. "During special effects" and "End demonstration" are provided. And all the production | presentation restrictions in this case about "a production | presentation change function based on production button operation" are "x". In addition, both of the presentation restrictions in this case for "the presentation and the like by touch detection" are "o".

Furthermore, when the state of the gaming machine is "in a definite change (power support)", "at symbol stop", "at reach", "during specific effect", and "abnormal display screen" as described above. It is provided. And all the production | presentation restrictions in this case about "a production | presentation change function based on production button operation" are "x". In addition, both of the presentation restrictions in this case for "the presentation and the like by touch detection" are "o".
<Specific example of effect output timing in each state of gaming machine>
<< Example of effect output timing in the state after setting change >>

  Next, a specific example of the effect output in each state of the gaming machine will be described with reference to the above-mentioned "Proper of presentation" (FIGS. 24A and 24B). First, the timing chart of FIG. 28 shows an example of the effect output at the time of setting change. More specifically, FIG. 28 shows an example of effect output in a period from when the setting change is started with power on to when the setting change is ended and the standby state is entered. Furthermore, in relation to the gaming state shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, after "C3: setting change (probability change) in progress state" of "C: special state", "B11: in game standby state" It corresponds to the situation of transitioning from the game standby A (normal demonstration display) to the "B12; game standby state B (during symbol stop)".

  The “control state” shown at the top of FIG. 28 indicates the state of the gaming machine, and this “control state” becomes “under initial setting” in which the above-mentioned initial setting process (FIG. 15) is performed when the power is turned on. It is shifted to the “setting change mode” in which the above-mentioned setting change processing (FIG. 16) is performed by the setting key operation. Further, the setting change is completed, the mode is shifted to the "normal mode", and the mode is shifted to the standby state (game standby state) as described above. Under such premise, when there is an effect button or a touch detection, the influence on the state-corresponding output and the touch effect performed at that time are shown in the subsequent steps.

  After the power is turned on and the initial setting is completed, when transitioning to the setting change mode based on the setting key being inserted, the "image display" corresponding to during the setting change as shown in "status corresponding output" , "Audio output" and "lamp output" are performed. In this state, when the operation button 22 or the like is operated, the state-based output does not change, and the output of “image”, “voice”, and “lamp” corresponding to the setting change is continued. On the other hand, when touch detection changes from "none" to "presence" during setting change, there is no change in the output corresponding to the state, but there is a change in touch detection as in the case where the effect button is operated. The lamp effect indicating that is to be performed only for a fixed time. Further, after that, when the touch detection changes from “present” to “absent”, the touch effect is not performed, and the state corresponding output does not change.

  Here, as an output relating to “image display” during setting change, for example, one as shown in FIG. 36B can be illustrated. Specifically, the message "Setting is being changed" is displayed and the message "Setting is being changed. After setting change is completed, transition to normal game is made by closing the frame door." There is. Moreover, although illustration is omitted, as an output of “setting change in progress” related to “voice output”, an example in which sound output of “setting is in progress” can be exemplified, and “setting change in progress” related to “lamp display” As an output of "", what drives a predetermined | prescribed several LED by the pattern decided beforehand as an output of "in setting change" can be illustrated.

  Next, when the setting change described above is completed and the setting change process is completed, the control state shifts to the normal mode. At this time, the output of “standby screen A” as shown in FIG. 33A, for example, is performed as “image display” as the state correspondence output. In addition, audio output indicating "change completion" such as "setting change completed" is performed as "voice output". Furthermore, as for "lamp display", "demo display" is performed with the drive pattern at the time of standby demonstration. Further, triggered by the completion of the setting change, the prohibition timer for the touch effect according to “J: setting of permission timing” in FIG. 23 is cleared, and the restriction of the touch effect in the subsequent standby screen is released.

  In this state, when the touch detection changes from "none" to "presence", a touch notification or the like corresponding to the state of the standby screen A is performed. Specifically, the voice of the character appearing on the gaming machine as the effect for promoting the character and the game as described above, outputs a voice such as "I'm welcome, please enjoy the pachinko even today!" The lamp display interlocking with the voice is performed, or the character image is displayed in the display area (see FIG. 25 and FIG. 34A if necessary). In addition, since it sets that touch detection changes from "absent" to "presence" as an opportunity which a standby screen changes from A to B, about the image display regarding alerting | reporting, as shown in FIG.34 (b) While the standby screen B is displayed, character images and character display such as "Welcome ♪" are executed. In addition, after the production prohibition timer is cleared, the production prohibition timer is set at the timing when the touch detection changes from "absent" to "present", and the production is performed at the timing when the touch detection changes to "present" and "absent" Although the timing of the prohibition timer is started, a more specific processing aspect of the rendering output accompanying such touch detection will be described later.

  Next, when the standby screen A is displayed, the touch detection changes from "absent" to "present", and after the touch notification effect based on this and the status change to the standby screen B are performed, the touch detection is performed again. When it is performed, the processing such as the effect based on the touch detection changes according to the timing when the touch detection is performed. FIG. 28 exemplifies the case where the touch detection changes from "absent" to "present" when the standby screen A is displayed, and then the counting time of the effect timer is not "0". In the case, the touch effect is not performed. In addition, the prohibition timer for the touch effect relating to the “J: setting of permission timing” described above is set to an initial value (for example, 60 seconds). After that, when the touch detection changes from "present" to "absent", the timing of the effect prohibition timer is started.

  As described above, as described in the flow from the power on to the transition to the normal mode (standby screen) through the setting change mode, the effect based on touch detection is the gaming state of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is comprised so that the execution presence / absence and the content of execution may be set by the production | presentation permission control conditions shown in FIG. Here, the production prohibition timer according to the production permission regulation condition will be described in detail.

  The effect prohibition timer is a clock timer for determining whether or not the execution of the effect based on the change is permitted when the “touch detection” changes. Further, the effect prohibit timer functions as a clock timer in "H1: Processing of clock timer (addition, subtraction, clear, etc.)" shown in FIG. 23, and as an internal timer in "J: Setting of permission timing". It is. For example, in the example of FIG. 28, when the setting change is completed, the effect prohibition timer is cleared. Then, regardless of what time the effect prohibit timer is, a process of permitting execution of the touch effect is performed.

  Next, as shown in the "image display" of the "status corresponding output", if there is a touch detection while the "standby screen A" is displayed, the touch effect is not permitted during a predetermined period thereafter (for example, 60 seconds) Then, a process of setting "60 seconds" to the effect prohibition timer is performed. Then, when the CPU 521 is notified that the finger has been released from the emission handle (20) and the touch detection has changed (here, it is turned off from on), processing for starting subtraction of the effect prohibit timer is performed.

  After the start of the above-mentioned subtraction (during the subtraction of the production prohibition timer), if there is touch detection again before the production prohibition timer becomes “0”, the time for the production prohibition timer is again (for example, (60 seconds) is set, and the timing of the effect prohibition timer is started when it changes to a state different from the touch detection. That is, processing is performed to control that touch effect is not performed for a predetermined time (60 seconds in this case) after the change in touch is finally recognized.

Note that the effect prohibit timer performs both of the effects related to touch detection when the touch detection changes to “absent 有 present” and when the effects change to “present ⇒ no”. It is possible to prepare for each case.
<< Example of effect output in the state of adjustment screen >>

  Subsequently, an example of effect output in the state of the “adjustment screen” related to the above-described environment setting (customization) will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, in the state of the “adjustment screen”, “control state” becomes “under initial setting” upon power on, and transitions to “normal mode” upon power failure recovery (power failure recovery), as described above Transition to the standby state (game standby state) like. Then, in the state of the “adjustment screen”, the environment setting is performed, the environment setting is completed, and the process shifts to the standby state. Furthermore, in relation to the gaming state shown in FIG. 22 and FIG. 23, "B13: gaming standby C (setting screen such as effect and voice)" of "B1: gaming standby state", "B11: gaming standby A (normally It corresponds to "demo display)".

  In the example of FIG. 29, when there is a power failure recovery, the "image display" of the "status corresponding output" is the "standby screen A". Furthermore, "audio output" is not performed, and "lamp display" is "demo display".

  As shown at the bottom of the figure, when the "effect button" is operated, the "image display" becomes the "adjustment screen" at the end of the operation detection. Furthermore, although "audio output" is "audio at adjustment (unscheduled)", this outputs (sample output) the volume adjusted by the volume adjustment operation (sample output), and an adjustment screen (for example, FIG. 33). (C) The operation sound etc. of the cursor movement in the inside can be output. And, in this case, since it is necessary to input the adjustment operation, it is treated as "irregular".

  Furthermore, "lamp display" is "light emission at adjustment". This is to perform light output according to the light emission luminance (light amount) set at that time. In the example of FIG. 29, although the button operation of the "production button" is detected and the "state corresponding output" is performed based on the timing when the detection of the operation is completed, the present invention is not limited thereto. Based on the timing of the start of detection of the operation, the “state corresponding output” may be performed.

  In this state, if there is "touch detection", "image display" in "touch effect" is not performed, but "voice effect" and "lamp effect" are performed in a touch notification mode. As described above, by not performing “image display”, it is possible to prevent an operation of environment setting (customization) performed while looking at the screen display. When the adjustment operation is completed as shown in the central portion on the top of the figure, the "image display" of the "status corresponding output" becomes the "standby screen A". Furthermore, although "audio output" is not performed, "lamp display" can be in the form of "demo display".

  In the example of FIG. 29, when there is “touch detection” after completion of the adjustment operation, touch notification by “image display”, “voice effect”, and “lamp display” is performed. Then, when there is a touch notification at this time, the "image display" of the "status corresponding output" is switched from the "standby screen A" to the "standby screen B". In addition, it is not limited to an effect such as a change from "standby screen A" to "standby screen B". For example, touch notification (such as character display of "welcome") is superimposed on "standby screen A". After that, the screen may shift to the "standby screen B".

  Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 29, the effect prohibit timer is cleared when there is a power failure return, and is set when there is touch detection. Furthermore, time measurement is started based on the timing of the end of touch detection, and thereafter, the value of the effect prohibition timer is “0”. Furthermore, the effect prohibition timer is set by the subsequent touch detection, and the clocking is started based on the timing of the end of the touch detection.

In the example shown in FIG. 29, since it is not the setting change but the (normal) power supply recovery, it is clear whether the effect prohibit timer is cleared after the power failure return and what time the effect prohibit timer before the power failure is Regardless, it is designed to allow execution of touch effects.
<< Example of effect output in the state of reach screen >>

  Subsequently, an example of effect output in the state where the reach effect is being performed (the state of the reach screen) will be described. As shown in FIG. 30, in the state of the "reach screen", when the variation start condition of the special symbol (and the rendering symbol) is satisfied, the "control state" is as shown by the rising of the "symbol changing" diagram. The symbol change is started. Under the present circumstances, since it is a state in play normally, about the "touch detection", the state currently detected is continuing.

  In the example of FIG. 30, “image display” of “state corresponding output” is “standby screen B” until symbol variation is started. Furthermore, "voice output" is an output of "BGM" corresponding to "standby screen B", and "lamp display" is "demo display". When symbol variation is started in this state, "image display" becomes "acceleration effect". As this "acceleration effect", it is possible to illustrate what causes the effect pattern (190) to start fluctuating and accelerates to high speed fluctuation.

  Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 30, after becoming in the state of "notice effect · hearing (temples) turning effect etc." in "image display", it becomes "symbol hearing" and reach occurs. Here, "preliminary effect / hearing (temples) turn effect etc." means such an effect as to the effect of satisfying the expectation of the reach occurrence through various types of preliminary effects. In addition, as the “design hearing aid”, for example, the effect design for the second temporary stop is exemplified for the effect for causing the player to hold the expectation of forming the combination of the first temporary stop production symbol and reach. it can. Then, in "image display", "reach effect" is executed, and then an effect of "symbol stop" is executed in a mode according to the result of the acceptance lottery.

  Furthermore, in the "voice output", with the start of symbol variation, the output of "voice during symbol variation" associated with the effect during variation of the rendering symbol 190 is performed. Further, in the "lamp display", the "symbol change lamp effect" associated with the effect during the change of the effect pattern 190 is performed along with the start of the symbol change.

  In the case of such reach effect, it is conceivable to execute, as the “touch effect”, an operation for preventing the player from releasing the hand from the launch handle (20). For example, in the example of FIG. 30, the state with “touch detection” which has been continued until then is temporarily interrupted during “reach effect”. Then, after that, there is the second “touch detection” in the period shown in FIG. 30, and after a certain detection period, it changes to the state without “touch detection”. Then, based on the timing when the second touch detection is stopped, "predetermined display" is performed in "image display" of "touch effect", output of "predetermined sound" is performed in "voice effect", and "lamp" The "predetermined light emission" is performed in the effect.

  As these “predetermined display”, “predetermined sound” and “predetermined light emission”, it is possible to execute notification effects relating to the game result and effects such as suppressing the game stop. For example, it is considered to be an effect that directly or indirectly indicates the degree of expectation regarding the reach or the occurrence of a big hit, or that "predetermined display" or "predetermined sound" of the content of "do not let go of your hand" Be Further, the character display (382) of "HEAT!" In FIG. 37 (b) described above also corresponds to the "predetermined display" here. In addition, in the case where an effect of “voice” and an effect of “lamp” are accompanied, these correspond to “predetermined sound” and “predetermined light emission”.

Here, in the example of FIG. 30, counting without “touch detection” is started based on the start timing of “reach effect”. Then, after the start of "reach effect", detection of the first state without "touch detection" is without the first "touch detection", and detection of the subsequent state without "touch detection" in the example of FIG. 30 is 2 There is no second "touch detection".
<< Example of effect output in the state of the big hit end demonstration screen >>

  Subsequently, an example of effect output in a state where a big hit end demonstration effect is performed will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 31, when the "control state" changes from the normal control state to the big hit control state by the big hit start and the big winning opening / closing control (round control related to the big hit game) ends, the big hit end demo state Become. Furthermore, when the state of the big hit demo ends, it returns to the state of normal control. Here, in the example of FIG. 31, the big hit start demonstration is performed before the big hit start, but the illustration of the big hit start demo is omitted regarding the “control state”.

  When the jackpot is started, the "image display" of the "state corresponding output" shifts from the effect of the "pattern stop" up to that point to "the jackpot effect". The "big hit middle stage effect" here includes the stage during and between rounds. Furthermore, the "voice output" shifts from that of the "symbol variation" up to that point to that of "big hit". The "big hit effect" related to the "voice output" here includes a voice indicating the progress of the round (round progress voice) and an output of a winning sound in the round (winning sound output).

  In addition, “lamp display” shifts from the “demonstration display” up to that point to the one with “big hit effect”. The "big hit effect" related to the "lamp display" here includes effects for rounds and between rounds. And each "big hit effect" concerning these "image display", "voice output", and "lamp display" is performed until the end of the big winning opening control. Further, in the example of FIG. 31, in the “touch detection” at this time, the state with the “touch detection” continues.

  When the special winning opening / closing control is ended, the "image display" and the "lamp display" of the "status corresponding output" are shifted to the respective "big hit end demonstration display". Furthermore, "voice output" shifts to "big hit end demonstration BGM etc.". In addition, when the big hit demonstration ends, “image display” shifts to “design stop”. Furthermore, "voice output" and "lamp display" are stopped during "pattern stop". Then, when the "symbol stop" of the "image display" is finished, the "voice output" becomes "BGM", and the "lamp display" becomes one according to the state of the gaming machine thereafter.

  Here, in FIG. 31, according to the state of the gaming machine, the reason why no character is described in the diagram according to the "lamp display" after the "pattern stop" is finished (the reason for being blank) Change and it is difficult to identify in the figure. In addition, in the example of FIG. 31, although "voice output" and "lamp display" are stopped during "pattern stop", it is not limited to this, for example, BGM (the game mode at that time is stopped) BGM and the like, and a lamp display pattern may be provided to perform these outputs.

  In the example of FIG. 31, after the big winning opening / closing control is finished, there is temporarily no “touch detection”, and the state changes to “with touch detection” during the big hit end demonstration thereafter. Furthermore, also during the big hit end demonstration, a change to a state without “touch detection” and a change to a state with “touch detection” are performed.

  And for "touch effect", "predetermined display" related to "image effect" and "predetermined sound" related to "voice effect" based on the timing when "touch detection" does not first occur during the big hit end demonstration , “Predetermined light emission” relating to “lamp effect” is also performed. As "predetermined display", "predetermined sound", and "predetermined light emission" at this time, for example, the effect for preventing the game card or the game coin storing the game medium amount being stored, or the game result under the big hit control A presentation for notification can be mentioned.

  In the example of FIG. 31, the subsequent touch detection is the detection of the first “touch detection”. Furthermore, the subsequent touch detection during the big hit end demonstration is regarded as the detection of the second “touch detection”. Then, based on the timing when the second "touch detection" is made, "predetermined display" related to "image effect", "predetermined sound" related to "voice effect", "predetermined light emission related to lamp effect" "Is being executed together.

  As described above, when "predetermined display", "predetermined sound", and "predetermined light emission" are performed a plurality of times (here, twice) during the same type of period (here, in the big hit end demonstration), "predetermined display" It is desirable to make elements such as contents and types of “predetermined sound” and “predetermined light emission” different. For example, when the effect for preventing the removal of a game card or gaming coin is executed as the previous “touch effect”, the effect for notifying the game result under the big hit control or the subsequent “touch effect” It can be exemplified to perform the rendering of the content that promotes the motivation to the next game.

As mentioned above, although the demonstration output example in some states of the gaming machine has been described based on FIG. 28 to FIG. 31, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to consider demonstration output examples in other states is there.
<Example of effect output after power failure return>
<< When the game is in a standby state (any of the display screens A to C) when the power is off >>

  Next, an example of effect output after power failure return will be described. FIG. 32 (a) conceptually shows screen display control when the state of the gaming machine at the time of power-off is in the game standby state, and then the power is turned on again (power-off is restored). . Here, as the game standby state, the aforementioned "B11: game standby A (normal demonstration display)", "B12: game standby B (during symbol stop)", "B13: game standby C (settings such as effects and sounds) (The standby screen A, the standby screen B, the effect setting screen C, etc.).

  After the power is cut off in the various game machine standby states described above, when the power is restored as shown at the left end of FIG. 32 (a), the sub control means (here, the CPU 521 of the sub main board 301) After the initialization process, the process waits for reception of a command (power recovery command) indicating power recovery from the main control unit (here, the CPU 501 of the main board 102).

  In addition, at this time, the image is not displayed on the image display device (here, the effect display device 60) (corresponding to "screen non-display" in the drawing). After that, the sub main CPU 521 receives a power recovery command from the main CPU 501, and it is determined from the contents of the command that no RWM clear or setting change is accompanied at the time of recovery, or that the gaming state is in the game standby Then, power recovery processing is performed based on the condition, and the initialization processing is ended.

  When the initialization processing is completed (corresponding to "ready" in the figure), the sub main CPU 521 performs normal processing (processing for updating the effect random number, lamp display control, voice control, etc.) and the effect display device At (60), the sub main command for displaying the standby screen A is output regardless of which one of the standby screens A to C is the display screen before the power-off. Furthermore, the sub main CPU 521 clears (sets to a predetermined value) the value of the clock timer for screen change, and then executes a power on notification process for notifying that the power is restored without RWM clearing.

  As an example of the effect display by the power-on notification processing, for example, the characters “power is restored” or “energized” shown in FIG. 35 (a) are displayed on the effect display device (60) An example of lighting the LED of 11) in a predetermined lighting pattern can be exemplified. Furthermore, it is conceivable that the effect display by the power on notification process is continuously performed for a predetermined period (for example, about 30 seconds). In the present embodiment, even if the power-on notification is being executed after the initialization process is completed, the normal process described above is performed on the operation means (the operation button (22) which is the effect button). The input is determined, and the standby screen can be changed according to the input. Such power-on notification processing and normal processing are shown as “power-on notification” and “normal processing (individual processing, waiting for command / operation means input)” in the drawing. Also, "individual processing" means individual display control processing, random number update processing, timekeeping processing, and the like.

  As described above, after the clocking timer is initialized by the completion of the initialization process, if it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed based on the clocking timer (the value of the clocking timer becomes "0" by subtraction. In this case, or when the clock timer reaches a predetermined value (30 seconds in this case, etc.) by addition, it is determined that the display change time of the standby screen (corresponding to “time A”) has arrived and the screen display is on standby The screen A is changed to the standby screen B. Then, a value corresponding to the time for changing from the standby screen B to the standby screen A again is set in the clock timer. For example, if the clock timer is to be added, the arrival time “20 seconds” is set, and if the clock timer is to be decremented, a necessary value (eg, 2 ms) until it becomes “0”. Set 10000, etc., which is 0 in 20 seconds by subtraction for each interrupt.

Then, as in the case of standby screen A, when a predetermined time passes after standby screen B is displayed (for example, when the clock timer is decremented to "0", or the clock timer is added, When it becomes “20 seconds” etc.), it is determined that the display change time of the standby screen (corresponding to “time B”) has arrived, and the screen display is changed from the standby screen B to the standby screen A. In addition, when a game is played while the standby screen A or the standby screen B is displayed, and the start winning opening (62, 63) is won, the symbol transition screen is transitioned, and the ejection handle 20 is touched. In the screen transition to the content corresponding to the touch detection (such as the superimposed display of the characters "Welcome") is made. In the example of FIG. 32 (a), it is assumed that there is neither operation of the operation button (22) nor touch detection.
<< When there was a symbol change during power off >>

  Next, based on FIG. 32 (b), an example of effect output when the symbol is changing at power off will be described. FIG. 32 (b) is a conceptual view of screen display control when power is cut off and power is turned on again (power is restored) after symbol fluctuation is in progress and hold is not generated. Is shown.

  As described above, when power is restored after a power failure occurs in the state of symbol fluctuation with no hold, the sub main CPU 521 performs its own initialization processing, and then receives a power recovery command from the main CPU 501. wait. In addition, at this time, the image is not displayed on the effect display device (60) (corresponding to "screen non-display" in the figure). Thereafter, the power recovery command from the main CPU 501 is received, and it is determined from the contents of the command that the RWM is not cleared or the setting is not changed at the time of recovery, or that the gaming state is changing. Power recovery processing based on the above, and the initialization processing ends.

  When the initialization processing is completed (corresponding to “ready” in the figure), the sub main CPU 521 displays a power on notification screen (for example, “power is turned on” on the effect display device (60) or FIG. The character display of "energized" shown in) and the display showing that the symbol is changing etc. is displayed, and the state is maintained until the symbol stop command from the main board 102 is received. In the present embodiment, the power-on notification performed during the standby screen is different from the screen display. As an example (power on notification screen) of the power on notification at this time, one as shown in FIG. 35 (b) can be adopted. In addition, even if the power-on notification is being executed after the initialization process is completed, the input of the operation means (effect button) is determined by the normal process, and if the input is valid, the input is valid. It is possible to execute processing according to. The output of the power-on notification and the normal processing are shown as "power-on notification screen" and "normal processing (individual processing, waiting for command / operation means input)" in the figure. Also, "individual processing" means individual display control processing, random number update processing, timekeeping processing, and the like.

  When the CPU 521 of the sub main board 301 receives the symbol stop command from the main substrate 102 (corresponding to the "stop command" in the figure), the symbol stop command information, or the symbol according to the information based on the power recovery command When the symbol to be stopped can be grasped by the default symbol combination and information determined, the screen on which the symbol is displayed in a stopped state, that is, the pattern change standby similar to the standby screen B as shown in FIG. 34 (c) Display the screen. Here, in the present embodiment, if the symbol is changing at the time of the power-off (power-supply return), the clocking timer is not started but the clocking timer is received at the timing when the stop command is received. The setting process is performed, and it is always set to display the standby screen B after receiving the stop command.

  After that, when the predetermined time has passed after the standby screen B is displayed (in the case where the clock timer is decremented to "0", or the clock timer is added, as in the case of the game standby) When "20 seconds" is reached, etc., it is determined that the display change time of the standby screen (corresponding to "time B" in the figure) has arrived, and the screen display is changed from the standby screen B to the standby screen A. In addition, when a game is played while displaying the power-on notification screen and the start winning hole (62, 63) is won, after the standby screen B is displayed according to the stop command reception, the screen changes to the symbol variation screen. Also, when the launch handle (20) is touched, a screen transition to a content corresponding to touch detection (such as superimposed display of the characters "Welcome") is made.

In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, in any case of FIG. 32 (a), (b), about the initial operation confirmation process currently normally performed about the movable presentation member which is a movable combination, an initialization process The processing can be executed later in parallel with the display processing and the like, and the processing is executed until the confirmation of the initial operation of the movable role is completed, regardless of the display transition of the screen (screen display: 32 (a) and (b), while the operation for confirmation of the movable part is performed). In addition, until the confirmation of the initial movement of the movable combination is finished, the control such that the execution of the effect of the movable combination and the like accompanied by the symbol variation is regulated. In the example of FIG. 32B, it is assumed that there is neither operation of the operation button (22) nor touch detection. Further, the effect pattern in which the movable role operates is selected by the operation of the operation button (22) of the player, and the effect pattern is generated (executed) during the initial operation of the movable effect member. When the operation button (22) is operated, execution (actual drive) of the effect of the movable effect member is restricted.
<Touch detection, touch performance and other characteristics>

  The touch detection and touch effect described above can be considered as follows. First, with regard to touch effects (emission detection effects) executed during standby (during standby screen A or standby screen B), the game is actually performed by detecting the shooting operation (detecting the touch detection and the change of the shooting intensity volume) The execution time of touch effect is shorter than the actual measurement value (for example, the average value of multiple measurements) until the ball is fired and enters the starting winning opening (for example, the first starting winning opening 62). can do. The touch effect in this case may be completed in about 3 seconds.

  On the contrary to this, for the touch effect (emission detection effect) to be executed during standby (during standby screen A or standby screen B), detection of the shooting operation (detection of touch detection and detection of change of emission intensity volume) The execution time of touch effect is better than the actual measurement value (for example, the average value of multiple measurements) until the game ball is actually fired and entered the starting winning opening (for example, the first starting winning opening 62). The touch effect may be as long as 20 seconds. In this case, if a notice effect is generated in response to entering the first start winning opening (62) during the 20 second touch effect execution, the notice effect is a predetermined first group (for example, a character In the case of a brief notice such as a word notice of the content emitting a line, the touch effect is kept executed, and this notice effect is performed in another predetermined second group (for example, a movie notice using the entire screen of the display device) In the case of non-simple notice, it is conceivable that the touch effect is interrupted.

  In addition, although not normally occurring, even when touch detection is performed after the rotation operation of the emission handle (20) (during the rotation of the handle), the touch effect (emission detection effect) can be performed.

  Furthermore, when there is a starting opening winning combination during execution of the touch effect (emission detection effect), it is possible not to interrupt the touch effect. However, in the case of a touch effect such as voice, the volume may be continued as "zero" in accordance with the priority of the effect at the time of winning opening winning. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and when there is a starting opening winning during the execution of the touch effect (emission detection effect), the touch effect may be interrupted.

  Furthermore, when error detection is performed during execution of touch effect and error notification is performed, error notification can be prioritized over touch effect. Also, the present invention is not limited to this, and the touch effect and the error notification may be output in duplicate. For example, when the first error (illegal prize error, porcelain detection error, etc.) is detected, the touch effect is interrupted, but the second error (firing direction improper error, door opening error, etc.) is not interrupted. It is possible to adopt a control mode.

  In addition, when performing touch effect during volume adjustment at the time of customization (environmental setting), even during the volume adjustment, voice output related to the touch effect according to the volume adjusted at the start of the touch effect It is conceivable to do.

  Furthermore, it is possible to prohibit touch effect during volume adjustment at the time of customization (environmental setting) and not to perform touch effect even if touch effect is performed in other situations. is there.

In addition, the touch effect (fire detection effect) is interrupted, for example, when the game ball is detected at the start winning prize port (62, 63) during execution, but with the operation port (68) or the general winning port (72) It is also possible to adopt a control mode such as not interrupting when the gaming ball is detected.
<About operation detection signal>

  Next, various possible examples of an operation detection signal (touch detection signal) related to touch detection will be described. As described above, when considering various aspects of the effect output related to the touch effect, it is also possible to specifically consider the operation detection signal related to the touch detection operation, to ensure the reliability of the effect control, etc. It is important from the aspect of First, with regard to the operation detection signal, it is considered to consider “1. Use of operation detection signal”, “2. Transmission method of operation detection signal”, “3a. Processing when operation detection signal is received”, etc. Be

  Among these, “1. Application of operation detection signal” can be used for various processes, can be used as a trigger for various processes, and the like. For example, the operation detection signal may be "(1) security of operation by the player". Furthermore, the operation detection signal includes “(2) trigger for transition between demo state and normal state”, “(3) trigger for transition to special effect state”, “(4) trigger for return from power saving mode”, “( 5) External output opportunity "," (6) Suggestion (method change) opportunity such as launch "," (7) Use for effect (of opportunity) "," (8) Use for fixed handle detection and notification "," ( 9) It can be considered that it is used to change the presentation frequency etc.

  In addition, as a signal generation method when using the operation detection signal as the above-mentioned “(2) transition trigger between demo state and normal state”, the detection signal of the touch detection unit is a dedicated detection unit for the sub main board (301) It is possible to adopt the method (first method) of outputting from. As a dedicated detection unit for the sub main substrate 301, a touch detection unit (touch sensor) in which an output signal is input only to the sub main substrate (301) can be mentioned.

  In addition, as another signal generation method, it is also possible to adopt a method (second method) in which some kind of processing (signal processing) is performed on the signal (detection signal) of the dedicated detection unit described above. In this case, it is assumed that a common detection unit (common detection unit) to which an output signal is input to both the main substrate (102) and the sub main substrate (301) is used, and the signal from the common detection unit is used. It is possible to use after performing some processing (signal processing).

  Furthermore, a method (third method) of combining the output signals of the dedicated detection unit and the common detection unit with other signals can be considered. In this case, information on the output status that appears in the “other signal” is combined with the output signal of the dedicated detection unit or the common detection unit, and the main board (102) or sub is used as a reference signal for detection related to the change in the operation state. It is conceivable to perform output to the main substrate (301).

  The features of the first method and the second method described above are that processing and devices for signal generation are unnecessary compared to the third method, since they do not need to be combined with other signals. It may be possible to simplify the configuration.

  In addition, as another feature of the above-mentioned second method, since the generation of input signals to a plurality of different input objects (here, the main substrate (102) and the sub main substrate (301)) can be made common, individual inputs In some cases, processing and device configuration can be simplified as compared to the case of individually generating an input signal for an object. In addition, in consideration of the influence of the chattering in a touch switch (310) etc., it is possible to make a touch more than fixed time (for example, 50 ms) a requirement, and to raise detection accuracy. Of course, it is also possible to configure so as to obtain an output upon continuous detection for a predetermined time by using a capacitor having a suitable capacitance.

  Furthermore, as a feature of the third method, processing on the main substrate (102) or the sub main substrate (301) is performed using a signal of a form other than the form of the output signal of the dedicated detection unit or the common detection unit. it can. Therefore, processing on the main substrate (102) and the sub main substrate (301) can be performed without being restricted by only the form of the output signal of the dedicated detection unit or the common detection unit.

  Regarding the above-mentioned "2. Transmission method of operation detection signal", the processing form in each control board can be considered in line with the transmission path of the operation detection signal. For example, regarding the section from the touch sensor (310) to the emission control board (105), signal lines used for transmission from the touch sensor (310) should be "(1) common to emission control". Or, it may be considered as "(2) different from the one for launch control".

  Here, if the touch sensor (310) is a 3-wire type sensor as an aspect in which the signal lines are common, three signal lines (power supply line, output) derived from the touch sensor (310) If a signal line, GND, etc. is used as a common one and the touch sensor (310) is a two-wire type sensor, two signal lines (output signal line and GND) derived from the touch sensor (310) Alternatively, it is possible to exemplify one that uses the output signal line and the power supply line etc. in common.

  In the section from the launch control board (105) to the winning ball control board (the payout control board 103), the signal lines used for transmission are "(1) independent signal lines (output only for effect)" It can be considered that “(2) common with other control signals”. Among these, in the case of “(2) common with other control signals”, it is conceivable to adopt a form (composition form) of combining by a method such as making transmission timing different.

  Furthermore, also in the section from the prize ball control board (the payout control board 103) to the main control board (the main board 102), “(1) independent signal lines”, “(2) other control signals and It can be considered common. Among them, in the case of “(2) common with other control signals”, a form (synthesizing form) of combining by a method such as transmitting / receiving in a command form (command form) or making transmission timing different. It is conceivable to transmit and receive at Also, with regard to transmission timing, it is possible to think of a signal transmission mode in which transmission is not performed in a specific case.

  Furthermore, also in the section from the main control board (main board 102) to the effect control board (sub main board 301), “(1) independent signal line” or “(2) common with other control signals”. It can be considered that Among these, in the case of “(1) independent signal line”, for example, it is conceivable to transmit and receive signals at fixed time intervals (periodically). In addition, in the case of “(2) common with other control signals”, transmission / reception is performed in a command format, similarly to the section from the prize ball control board (delivery control board 103) to the main control board (main board 102). It can be considered to be in a composite form. Furthermore, it is conceivable that the transmission timing of the signal is determined based on the relationship with the content, type, and the like of the previous transmission information.

  Subsequently, the above-mentioned "3a. Processing when receiving an operation detection signal" can be considered in various gaming states. And as a game state, "(1) Normal game", "(2) Special game (per game)", "(3) Abnormal", "(4) Preparing (power-off return / power-off "Processing", "(5) demo in progress (not operated)", and "(6) demo in progress (my crack operation / effect setting operation)" can be mentioned.

  Among these gaming states, "(1) normal gaming" includes a high base state and a low base state. Further, when an operation detection signal related to touch detection is received in the emission control board (105), it is conceivable to perform "(1) emission control processing only when in common with emission processing". This means that when the touch detection signal is received at the same time as the process related to the emission control, only the process related to the emission control is performed and the process based on the touch detection signal is not performed. There is.

  Also, it can be considered that "(2) Ignoring in the other case for the launch control". This means that the process based on the touch detection is not performed when the touch detection signal is received when the process relating to the emission control is not performed.

  Subsequently, in the prize ball control board (the payout control board 103) and the main control board (the main board 102), it is conceivable to store information related to touch detection until a command to be transmitted is transmitted. Furthermore, in the main control board (main board 102), based on the information of touch detection, for example, it is not to give influence to the effect drawing related to success or failure such as the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation P) drawing. It is conceivable to do so.

  Subsequently, in the effect control board (sub main board 301), the selection target is branched in determining an effect (a change effect, a preread effect, etc.) different from the effect relating to the acceptance or rejection based on the touch detection information ( If it is different, it may be considered as selecting an effect). In addition, even if information based on touch detection is received, it may be considered that processing based on the information is not performed or determination processing of reception of the information is performed but special processing is not performed.

In addition, the processing concerning "(1) Normal game in progress" explained here is "in (2) special game (per game) in progress", "(3) abnormal", "(4) in preparation (e.g. Even in the state of “break return / power-off process”, “(5) demonstration (not operated)”, and “(6) demonstration (my break operation / effect setting operation)”, it is possible to appropriately adopt. Here, in the "my crack operation", for example, a two-dimensional code for providing information is displayed to the player, or information communication with the player's portable information terminal (such as a smartphone) is performed through communication with the Internet server. It means operation for the provision of services to do or do. Further, "effect setting operation" means an operation for the above-mentioned environment setting (customization).
<Functional effects of the invention according to the present embodiment>

  As described above, various control elements are examined with respect to the relationship between touch detection and effect output, and by adopting appropriate control elements from those examined and applying them to the pachinko gaming machine 10, various control elements are implemented. It becomes possible to carry out the rendering based on that. And, it becomes possible to utilize the operation detection of the launch handle including the touch detection more effectively than ever.

  For example, as described above, it is assumed that "D: content of touch effect" is variously divided into, for example, "D1: output destination of effect", "D2: effect data", and "D3: perform only state change". By defining the control processing related to the rendering output and adopting it in the pachinko gaming machine 10, various rendering based on the steering wheel operation becomes possible. And the effect based on this steering wheel operation is further subdivided based on control elements such as "D1: output destination of effect", "D2: effect data", "D3: only change the state" It is possible to

  Also, as described above, variously assume “E: selection criterion of touch effect”, for example, “E1: gaming state (at touch timing)”, “E2: number of operations”, “E3: customization setting” By subdividing into sub-steps and defining control processing relating to rendering output and adopting it in the pachinko gaming machine 10, various renderings based on steering wheel operations become possible. And the effect based on this handle operation is further subdivided based on control elements such as "E1: game state (at touch timing)", "E2: number of operations", "E3: customization setting", etc. It is possible to

  Then, various control elements subdivided are similarly defined for "F: Change of production state", "G: Change of production", "H: Related to trigger parameter of touch effect", etc. By adopting the machine 10, various effects based on the steering wheel operation become possible. Furthermore, permission conditions and control conditions of the effect are defined as “J: setting of permission timing”, and other control elements “K: change of touch state”, “L: method of touch detection”, “M: to sub The effect based on the steering wheel operation can be made more diverse by, for example, determining “transmission method” or the like, selecting these as appropriate, and applying them to the pachinko gaming machine 10.

  Then, as described above, the touch effect is examined in detail, and the touch effect according to the state of the gaming machine is executed to perform the touch effect in a mode based on the balance with the effect continued from before the touch detection. Can be performed. Then, touch effects can be combined with other effects without interfering with other effects, and this combination also enables diversification of touch effects.

In addition, by performing touch effects for each of a plurality of times of touch detection, it is possible to achieve diversification of the entire effect by continuing intermittent touch effects.
<Summary according to the embodiment>

As mentioned above, although the various aspects were illustrated about the presentation based on touch detection, it can be summarized as follows about these.
<Summary 1>
The invention according to the present embodiment fires a game ball in a game area and that the game ball enters a start winning opening (a first start winning port, a second start winning port, etc.) formed in the game area. In the pachinko game machine which performs a special game that can give a player a benefit when the symbol (such as a special symbol) is variably displayed as a symbol game and then stopped and displayed when the symbol displayed is a predetermined display mode. Main control means (such as a main board) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game, and transmission information (such as a main command) which is communicably connected to the main control means and transmitted from the main control means A sub control means (such as a sub main board) that performs control processing according to the above, a presentation output means (such as a presentation display device, a speaker, and various LEDs) that outputs a presentation under the control of the sub control means Contact with A touch operation unit (such as a touch switch) to be ejected and a rotation operation detection unit (such as a discharge intensity volume) to detect a rotation operation of the player; There are things (touch effect etc.) that are output triggered by touch detection that is detection,
A game standby state (such as "B1: game standby state (normal demonstration display)") in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is executed as the state of the pachinko gaming machine, and the symbol game It has a game running state ("B2: a game in progress", etc.) in which any of the special games is being executed, and in the game standby state, the output contents of the effect by the sub control means Any of the plurality of types of game standby states including different types of game standby states ("B11: game standby A (normal demo display)" to "B14: game standby (power saving)", etc.) Depending on whether it is a state, it is configured that whether or not an effect is output triggered by the touch detection and / or an effect output triggered by the touch detection may differ.
As a result, various effects can be performed by more effectively utilizing the operation detection of the launch handle.
<Summary 2>

The other inventions according to the present embodiment fire the gaming ball in the gaming area, and the gaming ball enters the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, etc.) formed in the gaming area. A game is played pachinko game to play a special game that can give a benefit to the player when the symbol (such as a special symbol) is variably displayed as a symbol game and then stopped and displayed when the symbol displayed is the predetermined display mode. A main control means (such as a main board) for controlling the progress of a game including the symbol game, and transmission information (main command) which is communicably connected to the main control means and transmitted from the main control means Etc.), effect output means (speaker etc.) for outputting sound as effects under the control of the sub control means, and contact of the player To detect A touch detection means (touch switch etc.) and a rotation operation detection means (launch intensity volume etc.) for detecting a rotation operation of the player, and the effect output means is a touch of the player by the touch detection means It is possible to execute voice output (such as sound output) triggered by touch detection which is detection, and as the state of the pachinko gaming machine, a state in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is performed. State (such as "B1: game standby state (normal demonstration display)"), or a state in which any of the symbol game and the special game is being executed ("B2: state during game", etc.) And a plurality of types of game standby states (“B11: game standby A (normal demonstration display)” to “B14: game standby (during power saving), etc.) are included in the game standby state, and the plurality of Depending on which game standby state among the game standby states of the kind, whether the sound is output triggered by the touch detection and / or the sound output triggered by the touch detection is different It is configured to earn.
Thereby, various voice effects can be performed by more effectively utilizing the operation detection of the launch handle.
<Summary 3>

The other inventions according to the present embodiment fire the gaming ball in the gaming area, and the gaming ball enters the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, etc.) formed in the gaming area. A game is played pachinko game to play a special game that can give a benefit to the player when the symbol (such as a special symbol) is variably displayed as a symbol game and then stopped and displayed when the symbol displayed is the predetermined display mode. Machine,
Main control means (such as a main board) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game;
A sub control means (such as a sub main board) which is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control means;
Effect output means (effect display device, speakers, various LEDs, etc.) for outputting an effect under control of the sub control means;
Touch detection means (touch switch or the like) for detecting a player's touch;
Rotation operation detection means (e.g., a firing intensity volume) for detecting the rotation operation of the player;
And an effect operation unit (operation button, cross key, etc.) operated by the player during the effect operation;
Among the effects, there are effects (touch effects, etc.) that are output triggered by touch detection that is detection of a player's touch by the touch detection means.
As a state of the pachinko gaming machine, it has a game standby state (such as "B1: game standby state (normal demonstration display)") in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is executed.
In the game standby state, a plurality of types of game standby states (“B11: game standby A (normal demonstration display)” to “B14: game standby (during power saving), etc.) with different output contents of effects by the sub control means Including
The effect execution condition is determined such that whether or not the effect is output triggered by the touch detection and / or the effect output triggered by the touch detection may differ.
In the condition set as the effect execution condition, which of the plurality of types of game standby states is in the game standby state, at which timing the touch detection is performed, or earlier than the touch detection timing Includes whether or not the effect operation unit has been operated.
As a result, it is possible to execute the touch effect associated with the operation state of the effect operation unit while effectively utilizing the operation detection of the launch handle.
<Summary 4>

The other inventions according to the present embodiment fire the gaming ball in the gaming area, and the gaming ball enters the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, etc.) formed in the gaming area. A game is played pachinko game to play a special game that can give a benefit to the player when the symbol (such as a special symbol) is variably displayed as a symbol game and then stopped and displayed when the symbol displayed is the predetermined display mode. Machine,
Main control means (such as a main board) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game;
A sub control means (such as a sub main board) which is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control means;
Effect output means (effect display device, speakers, various LEDs, etc.) for outputting an effect under control of the sub control means;
Touch detection means (touch switch or the like) for detecting a player's touch;
A rotation operation detection means (such as a firing intensity volume) for detecting a rotation operation of the player;
Among the effects, there are effects (touch effects, etc.) that are output triggered by touch detection that is detection of a player's touch by the touch detection means.
A game standby state (such as "B1: game standby state (normal demonstration display)") in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is executed as the state of the pachinko gaming machine, and the symbol game A game in progress state (such as "B2: in-play state") in which any of the special games is being executed,
The pachinko gaming machine includes backup means (such as a backup area of a main board) capable of storing the gaming state of the pachinko machine when the power is cut off when the power supply is cut off due to a drop in supply voltage.
The effect execution condition is determined such that whether or not the effect is output triggered by the touch detection and / or the effect output triggered by the touch detection may differ.
The conditions defined as the effect execution conditions include the timing of the touch detection and the gaming state of the pachinko machine stored in the backup means when returning from the power-off. In the game standby state, a plurality of types of game standby states (“B11: game standby A (normal demonstration display)” to “B14: game standby (during power saving), etc.) with different output contents of effects by the sub control means Including
Depending on which game standby state among the plurality of types of game standby states, whether or not an effect is output triggered by the touch detection, and / or an effect output triggered by the touch detection Are configured to be different.
Thereby, it is possible to execute an appropriate touch effect immediately after the power is turned on, while more effectively utilizing the operation detection of the launch handle.
<Conclusion 5>

The other inventions according to the present embodiment fire the gaming ball in the gaming area, and the gaming ball enters the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, etc.) formed in the gaming area. After the symbol (such as a special symbol) is variably displayed as a symbol game for a predetermined period of time as a symbol game, it is stopped and displayed, and a special game which can give a player a benefit when the symbol displayed is a predetermined display mode. It is a pachinko machine to do,
As for the time for fluctuating display of symbols as the symbol game, one fluctuation time is set from a plurality of fluctuation times,
Main control means (such as a main board) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game;
A sub control means (such as a sub main board) which is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control means;
Effect output means (effect display device, speakers, various LEDs, etc.) for outputting an effect under control of the sub control means;
Touch detection means (touch switch or the like) for detecting a player's touch;
Rotation operation detection means (e.g., a firing intensity volume) for detecting the rotation operation of the player;
And a clock means (clock timer etc.) for clocking time,
Among the effects, there are effects (touch effects, etc.) that are output triggered by touch detection that is detection of a player's touch by the touch detection means.
A game standby state ("B1: game standby state (normal demonstration display)" or the like) in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is executed as the state of the pachinko gaming machine,
It has a gaming state ("B2: gaming state", etc.) in which either the symbol game or the special game is being executed,
The elapsed time in the game standby state is clocked based on the clock means,
It has an initialization means for setting the clocking time of the clocking means to an initial value based on the touch detection,
When the elapsed time in the game standby state has reached a predetermined time by the clocking means, the output of the effect triggered by the subsequent touch detection is allowed ("J11: feature in time (variable / 1 fluctuation and Comparison), etc)),
The predetermined time is set to be shorter than the longest fluctuation time (such as 180 seconds) of the plurality of fluctuation times.
As a result, it is possible to appropriately set the acceptable timing of the touch effect while making effective use of the operation detection of the launch handle.
<Conclusion 6>

The other inventions according to the present embodiment fire the gaming ball in the gaming area, and the gaming ball enters the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, etc.) formed in the gaming area. After the symbol (such as a special symbol) is variably displayed as a symbol game for a predetermined period of time as a symbol game, it is stopped and displayed, and a special game which can give a player a benefit when the symbol displayed is a predetermined display mode. It is a pachinko machine to do,
As for the time for fluctuating display of symbols as the symbol game, one fluctuation time is set from a plurality of fluctuation times,
Main control means (such as a main board) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game;
A sub control means (such as a sub main board) which is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control means;
Effect output means (effect display device, speakers, various LEDs, etc.) for outputting an effect under control of the sub control means;
Touch detection means (touch switch or the like) for detecting a player's touch;
Rotation operation detection means (e.g., a firing intensity volume) for detecting the rotation operation of the player;
An effect operation unit operated by the player during the effect;
And a clock means (clock timer etc.) for clocking time,
Among the effects, there are effects (touch effects, etc.) that are output triggered by touch detection that is detection of a player's touch by the touch detection means.
A game standby state ("B1: game standby state (normal demonstration display)" or the like) in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is executed as the state of the pachinko gaming machine,
It has a gaming state ("B2: gaming state", etc.) in which either the symbol game or the special game is being executed,
The elapsed time in the predetermined game standby state is clocked based on the clock means,
It has an initialization means for setting the clocking time of the clocking means to an initial value based on the touch detection,
When the elapsed time in the game standby state reaches a predetermined time by the clocking means, the output of the effect triggered by the subsequent touch detection is permitted ("J2: composite with other elements", etc.) ,
Even if the effect operation unit is operated before the elapsed time reaches the predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) in the game standby state, if the elapsed time reaches the predetermined time, the subsequent touch detection The output of the presentation triggered by is allowed.
Thereby, it is possible to execute touch effect regardless of the operation of the effect operation unit while effectively utilizing the operation detection of the launch handle.
<Conclusion 7>

The other inventions according to the present embodiment fire the gaming ball in the gaming area, and the gaming ball enters the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, etc.) formed in the gaming area. A game is played pachinko game to play a special game that can give a benefit to the player when the symbol (such as a special symbol) is variably displayed as a symbol game and then stopped and displayed when the symbol displayed is the predetermined display mode. Machine,
Main control means (such as a main board) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game;
A sub control means (such as a sub main board) which is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control means;
Effect output means (effect display device, speakers, various LEDs, etc.) for outputting an effect under control of the sub control means;
Touch detection means (touch switch or the like) for detecting a player's touch;
Rotation operation detection means (e.g., a firing intensity volume) for detecting the rotation operation of the player;
And a clock means (clock timer etc.) for clocking time,
Among the effects, there are effects (touch effects, etc.) that are output triggered by touch detection that is detection of a player's touch by the touch detection means.
A game standby state (such as "B1: game standby state (normal demonstration display)") in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is executed as the state of the pachinko gaming machine, and the symbol game A game in progress state (such as "B2: in-play state") in which any of the special games is being executed,
The pachinko gaming machine includes backup means (such as a backup area of a main board) capable of storing the gaming state of the pachinko machine when the power is cut off when the power supply is cut off due to a drop in supply voltage.
A normal return operation for returning the gaming state of the pachinko machine after power recovery to the gaming state of the pachinko machine before the power outage based on the content stored in the backup unit when recovering from the power shutdown. (The return operation in the case of NO at S111 and S113) and the gaming state of the pachinko machine after power recovery regardless of the playing state of the pachinko machine stored in the backup means before the power is turned off Specific return operation (return operation in the case of YES in S113) is possible,
The effect execution condition is determined such that whether or not the effect is output triggered by the touch detection and / or the effect output triggered by the touch detection may differ.
In the condition defined as the effect execution condition, whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine after recovery from the power-off and the elapsed time in the game standby state by the clock means have reached a predetermined time, And contains
It is configured to set the clocking time of the clocking means to a predetermined value (for example, 20 seconds) when returning from the power-off regardless of whether the return is due to the normal return operation or the specific return operation. There is.
As a result, it is possible to control the execution of the appropriate touch effect even after the return of the power supply, while effectively utilizing the operation detection of the launch handle.
<Summary 8>

The other inventions according to the present embodiment fire the gaming ball in the gaming area, and the gaming ball enters the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, etc.) formed in the gaming area. A game is played pachinko game to play a special game that can give a benefit to the player when the symbol (such as a special symbol) is variably displayed as a symbol game and then stopped and displayed when the symbol displayed is the predetermined display mode. Machine,
Main control means (such as a main board) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game;
A sub control means (such as a sub main board) which is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control means;
Effect output means (effect display device, speakers, various LEDs, etc.) for outputting an effect under control of the sub control means;
Touch detection means (touch switch or the like) for detecting a player's touch;
A rotation operation detection means (such as a firing intensity volume) for detecting a rotation operation of the player;
The main control means
It is possible to give the player a profit according to the result of the game, and it is possible to make settings (such as setting the player's degree of advantage) regarding the profit giving to the player.
The state of the pachinko gaming machine includes a setting change state in which the setting can be performed, and a normal state different from the setting change state.
In the setting change state, regardless of the change mode of the detection state of the touch detection means and / or the detection mode of the rotation operation detection means, the output of the effect based on the detection by the touch detection means is not performed It is done.
Thereby, the touch effect can be limited to the setting operation while effectively utilizing the operation detection of the launch handle.
<Summary 9>

The other inventions according to the present embodiment fire the gaming ball in the gaming area, and the gaming ball enters the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, etc.) formed in the gaming area. A game is played pachinko game to play a special game that can give a benefit to the player when the symbol (such as a special symbol) is variably displayed as a symbol game and then stopped and displayed when the symbol displayed is the predetermined display mode. Machine,
Main control means (such as a main board) for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game;
A sub control means (such as a sub main board) which is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control means;
Effect output means (effect display device, speakers, various LEDs, etc.) for outputting an effect under control of the sub control means;
Touch detection means (touch switch or the like) for detecting a player's touch;
A rotation operation detection means (such as a firing intensity volume) for detecting a rotation operation of the player;
The main control means can fire the gaming ball at an intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation detected by the rotation operation detection means on condition of touch detection which is detection of contact of the player by the touch detection means.
The effects include those that are output triggered by the touch detection (such as touch effects),
The main control means
Even if the game ball enters the start winning opening before the touch detection means detects the player's touch after the pachinko gaming machine is powered on, the variable display of the symbol is displayed. While performing, it is comprised so that the transmission information corresponding to the fluctuation display of the said symbol may be transmitted to the said sub control means.
This makes it possible to use the detection of the operation of the launch handle more effectively, and prevent the presence or absence of touch detection from restricting the progression of the symbol game. <Other Embodiments>

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described various embodiments, and various modifications can be made. For example, according to the present invention, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention allows the player to directly touch the player's ball by paying out the game ball directly to the player as described above. For example, the present invention is also applicable to a sealed circulation type pachinko game machine (management game machine) that is used by circulating game balls inside a game machine. Further, as the enclosed circulation-type pachinko gaming machine, one capable of electromagnetically recording the entrance and exit of game media can be exemplified.

  Further, the present invention comprises a plurality of reels in which a predetermined number of symbols are arranged, controls rotation start and stop of the reel based on the operation of the player, and plays a game such as a game medal according to the winning combination won. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine (roll-type game machine) that pays out media (including storage in a storage device). When the present invention is applied to a slot machine, instead of handle operation detection, detection of operation of a bet button which can be operated by the player at the time of bet setting, and may be performed by the player at the time of bet setting as well. Based on the detection of the insertion of the game medal, it is possible to apply the effect output according to the state of the gaming machine. Furthermore, the present invention can also be applied to, for example, a casino machine installed in a casino facility.

10 pachinko game machines, 20 launch handles, 50 play boards, 52 play areas,
53 main control display device, 62 first start winning opening, 63 second starting winning opening,
70 first special symbol display unit, 71 second special symbol display unit, 90 big winning device,
102 main board, 104 sub board, 113 first success / failure determination means,
117 second success or failure judging means, 120 special game control means, 301 sub main board,
302 sub sub substrate, 310 touch sensor, 311 firing intensity volume 311,
501 Main board CPU, 521 Sub main board CPU.

Claims (1)

The game ball is fired in the game area, and after the game ball enters the start winning opening formed in the game area as a symbol game, the symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed. A pachinko gaming machine that performs a special game capable of giving a player a profit when the symbol is in a predetermined display mode,
As for the time for fluctuating display of symbols as the symbol game, one fluctuation time is set from a plurality of fluctuation times,
Main control means for controlling the progress of the game including the symbol game;
A sub-control unit connected communicably to the main control unit and performing control processing according to transmission information transmitted from the main control unit;
Effect output means for outputting an effect under control of the sub control means;
Touch detection means for detecting a player's touch;
Rotation operation detection means for detecting a rotation operation of the player;
An effect operation unit operated by the player during the effect;
And clock means for clocking time,
Some of the effects are output triggered by touch detection which is detection of a player's touch by the touch detection means,
As the state of the pachinko gaming machine, there is a game standby state in which neither the symbol game nor the special game is executed, and one of the symbol game and the special game is being executed. Have a game running status,
The elapsed time in the predetermined game standby state is clocked based on the clock means,
It has an initialization means for setting the clocking time of the clocking means to an initial value based on the touch detection,
When the elapsed time in the game standby state reaches a predetermined time by the clocking means, the output of the effect triggered by the subsequent touch detection is permitted,
Even when the effect operation unit is operated before the elapsed time reaches the predetermined time in the game standby state, if the elapsed time reaches the predetermined time, the effect is triggered by the subsequent touch detection A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the output of is acceptable.